created 0.6 branch

git-svn-id: svn+slack://slack.fluxo.info/var/svn/simplepkg@341 04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58
author: rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58> 2007-04-13 21:46:27 +0000
committer: rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58> 2007-04-13 21:46:27 +0000
commit: f76d87c78ade79c700b6dd48aeb6b8bbef60cf34 (patch)
tree: a64bfb20225c12ec13001a2ba7a4e3f381532c06
parent: aa280bb3fbf166e31b939342c1d956848a801780 (diff)
download: simplepkg-f76d87c78ade79c700b6dd48aeb6b8bbef60cf34.tar.gz
simplepkg-f76d87c78ade79c700b6dd48aeb6b8bbef60cf34.tar.bz2
115 files changed, 18459 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/branches/0.6/README b/branches/0.6/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4d1463
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/README
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+See doc/README for more information.
+Portuguese documentation at doc/README.pt_BR.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/conf/generic.mkSlackBuild.new b/branches/0.6/conf/generic.mkSlackBuild.new
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b5473e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/conf/generic.mkSlackBuild.new
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+###################################################
+## Generic template for SlackBuilds
+##
+## Version 0.8.1 - Luis ( luis at riseup d0t net)
+##
+###################################################
+<head> all
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# SlackBuild for [[PROGRAM NAME]]
+# [[PROGRAM URL]]
+#
+# Author: [[SLACKBUILD AUTHOR]]
+#
+</head>
+
+<slackbuildrc> all
+# Look for slackbuildrc
+if [ -f ~/.slackbuildrc ]; then
+  source ~/.slackbuildrc
+elif [ -f /etc/slackbuildrc ]; then
+  source /etc/slackbuildrc
+fi
+</slackbuildrc>
+
+<set_variables> all
+# Set variables
+CWD="$(pwd)"
+SRC_NAME="[[SOURCE NAME]]"
+PKG_NAME="[[PACKAGE NAME]]"
+ARCH=${ARCH:=[[ARCH]]}
+SRC_VERSION=${VERSION:=[[VERSION]]}
+PKG_VERSION="$(echo "$SRC_VERSION" | tr '[[:blank:]-]' '_')"
+BUILD=${BUILD:=1[[SLACKBUILD AUTHOR INITIALS]]}
+SRC_DIR=${SRC_DIR:=$CWD}/$PKG_NAME
+TMP=${TMP:=/tmp}
+PKG=${PKG:=$TMP/package-$PKG_NAME}
+REPOS=${REPOS:=$TMP}
+PREFIX=${PREFIX:=[[PREFIX]]}
+PKG_SRC="$TMP/$SRC_NAME-$SRC_VERSION"
+CONF_OPTIONS=${CONF_OPTIONS:=[[OTHER CONFIGURE ARGS]]}
+NUMJOBS=${NUMJOBS:="-j4"}
+</set_variables>
+
+<slkflags> all
+# Set system libraries' path and optmization flags based on $ARCH
+LIBDIR="$PREFIX/lib"
+
+if [ "$ARCH" = "i386" ]; then
+  SLKCFLAGS="-O2 -march=i386 -mcpu=i686"
+elif [ "$ARCH" = "i486" ]; then
+  SLKCFLAGS="-O2 -march=i486 -mcpu=i686"
+elif [ "$ARCH" = "i686" ]; then
+  SLKCFLAGS="-O2 -march=i686"
+elif [ "$ARCH" = "s390" ]; then
+  SLKCFLAGS="-O2"
+elif [ "$ARCH" = "x86_64" ]; then
+  SLKCFLAGS="-O2"
+  LIBDIR="$PREFIX/lib64"
+fi
+</slkflags>
+
+<error_codes> on
+# Set error codes (used by createpkg)
+ERROR_WGET=31;      ERROR_MAKE=32;      ERROR_INSTALL=33
+ERROR_MD5=34;       ERROR_CONF=35;      ERROR_HELP=36
+ERROR_TAR=37;       ERROR_MKPKG=38;     ERROR_GPG=39
+ERROR_PATCH=40;     ERROR_VCS=41;       ERROR_MKDIR=42
+</error_codes>
+
+<start_structure> all
+# Clean up any leftovers of previous builds
+rm -rf "$PKG_SRC" 2> /dev/null
+rm -rf "$PKG" 2> /dev/null
+
+# Create directories if necessary
+mkdir -p "$SRC_DIR" || exit $ERROR_MKDIR
+mkdir -p "$PKG" || exit $ERROR_MKDIR
+mkdir -p "$REPOS" || exit $ERROR_MKDIR
+</start_structure>
+
+<download_source> on
+# Dowload source if necessary
+SRC="$SRC_NAME-$SRC_VERSION.tar.[[SOURCE EXTENSION]]"
+URL="[[DOWNLOAD FOLDER URL]]/$SRC"
+
+if [ ! -s "$SRC_DIR/$SRC" ] || ! [[DECOMPRESSOR]] [[DECOMPRESSOR TEST FLAG]] "$SRC_DIR/$SRC" 2> /dev/null; then
+  wget "$URL" -O "$SRC_DIR/$SRC" || exit $ERROR_WGET
+fi
+</download_source>
+
+<md5sum_download_and_check> off
+# Download source's MD5 checksum if necessary and check it
+if [ ! -s "$SRC_DIR/$SRC.[[MD5SUM EXTENSION]]" ]; then
+   wget "$URL.[[MD5SUM EXTENSION]]" -O "$SRC_DIR/$SRC.[[MD5SUM EXTENSION]]" || exit $ERROR_WGET
+fi
+
+MD5SUM_SRC="$(md5sum "$SRC_DIR/$SRC" | cut -d " " -f 1)"
+MD5SUM_URL="$(grep "$SRC[ \t]*$" "$SRC_DIR/$SRC.[[MD5SUM EXTENSION]]" | cut -d " " -f 1)"
+
+[ "$MD5SUM_SRC" == "$MD5SUM_URL" ] || exit $ERROR_MD5
+</md5sum_download_and_check>
+
+<gpg_signature_check> off
+# Import minimized signing key from
+# [[SIGNING KEY URL]]
+gpg --import << EOKEY || exit $ERROR_GPG
+[[SIGNING KEY]]
+EOKEY
+
+# Dowload source's signature if necessary and check it
+if [ ! -s "$SRC_DIR/$SRC.sig" ]; then
+  wget "$URL.sig" -O "$SRC_DIR/$SRC.sig" || exit $ERROR_WGET
+fi
+
+gpg --verify "$SRC_DIR/$SRC.sig" "$SRC_DIR/$SRC" || exit $ERROR_GPG
+</gpg_signature_check>
+
+<untar_source> all
+# Untar
+cd "$TMP"
+tar --no-same-owner --no-same-permissions -xvf "$SRC_DIR/$SRC" || exit $ERROR_TAR
+cd "$PKG_SRC"
+</untar_source>
+
+<path_source> off
+# Patch source
+patches="[[PATCH FILES]]
+         $PKG_NAME.diff $PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION.diff
+         $PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION-$ARCH.diff $PKG_NAME-$ARCH.diff"
+for patch in $patches; do
+  if [ -f "$CWD/$patch" ]; then
+    patch -Np[[NUMBER OF PREFIX SLASHES TO STRIP]] < "$CWD/$patch" || exit $ERROR_PATCH
+  elif [ -f "$CWD/patches/$patch" ]; then
+    patch -Np[[NUMBER OF PREFIX SLASHES TO STRIP]] < "$CWD/patches/$patch" || exit $ERROR_PATCH
+  fi
+done
+</path_source>
+
+<configure> on
+# Configure
+CFLAGS="$SLKCFLAGS" \
+  CXXFLAGS="$SLKCFLAGS" \
+  ./configure \
+  --prefix="$PREFIX" --libdir="$LIBDIR" "$CONF_OPTIONS" || exit $ERROR_CONF
+</configure>
+
+<make_package> all
+# Compile
+make $NUMJOBS || exit $ERROR_MAKE
+</make_package>
+
+<install_package> all
+# Install
+make install DESTDIR="$PKG" || exit $ERROR_INSTALL
+</install_package>
+
+<strip_binaries> on
+# Strip binaries
+( cd "$PKG"
+  find . | xargs file | grep "executable" | grep ELF | cut -f 1 -d : | \
+    xargs strip --strip-unneeded 2> /dev/null
+  find . | xargs file | grep "shared object" | grep ELF | cut -f 1 -d : | \
+    xargs strip --strip-unneeded 2> /dev/null
+)
+</strip_binaries>
+
+<compress_manpages> off
+# Compress and link manpages
+if [ -d "$PKG/$PREFIX/man" ]; then
+  ( cd "$PKG/$PREFIX/man"
+    for manpagedir in $(find . -type d -name "man*") ; do
+      ( cd $manpagedir
+        for eachpage in $( find . -type l -maxdepth 1) ; do
+          ln -s $( readlink $eachpage ).gz $eachpage.gz
+          rm $eachpage
+        done
+        gzip -9 *.?
+      )
+    done
+  )
+fi
+</compress_manpages>
+
+<compress_info_files> off
+# Compress info files
+if [ -d "$PKG/$PREFIX/info" ]; then
+  ( cd "$PKG/$PREFIX/info"
+    rm -f dir
+    gzip -9 *
+  )
+fi
+</compress_info_files>
+
+<install_documentation> on
+# Install documentation
+DOCS="[[DOCUMENTATION FILES]]"
+mkdir -p "$PKG/usr/doc/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION" || exit $ERROR_MKDIR
+cp -a $DOCS "$PKG/usr/doc/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION"
+</install_documentation>
+
+<slackdesc> on
+# Add package description (slack-desc)
+mkdir -p "$PKG/install" || exit $ERROR_MKDIR
+cat << EODESC > "$PKG/install/slack-desc"
+# HOW TO EDIT THIS FILE:
+# The "handy ruler" below makes it easier to edit a package description.  Line
+# up the first '|' above the ':' following the base package name, and the '|'
+# on the right side marks the last column you can put a character in.  You must
+# make exactly 11 lines for the formatting to be correct.  It's also
+# customary to leave one space after the ':'.
+
+        |-----handy-ruler------------------------------------------------------|
+[[SLACK-DESC]]
+EODESC
+</slackdesc>
+
+<postinstall_script> off
+# Add a post-installation script (doinst.sh)
+cat << EOSCRIPT > "$PKG/install/doinst.sh"
+config() {
+  NEW="\$1"
+  OLD="\$(dirname \$NEW)/\$(basename \$NEW .new)"
+  # If there's no config file by that name, mv it over:
+  if [ ! -r \$OLD ]; then
+    mv \$NEW \$OLD
+  elif [ "\$(cat \$OLD | md5sum)" = "\$(cat \$NEW | md5sum)" ]; then
+    # toss the redundant copy
+    rm \$NEW
+  fi
+  # Otherwise, we leave the .new copy for the admin to consider...
+}
+
+config path/to/config_file.new
+[[REST OF DOINST.SH]]
+EOSCRIPT
+</postinstall_script>
+
+<build_package> all
+# Build the package
+cd "$PKG"
+makepkg -l y -c n "$REPOS/$PKG_NAME-$PKG_VERSION-$ARCH-$BUILD.tgz" || exit $ERROR_MKPKG
+</build_package>
+
+<clean_builds> on
+# Delete source and build directories if requested
+if [ "$CLEANUP" == "yes" ]; then
+  rm -rf "$PKG_SRC" "$PKG"
+fi
+</clean_builds>
diff --git a/branches/0.6/conf/repos.conf.new b/branches/0.6/conf/repos.conf.new
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d77419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/conf/repos.conf.new
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+#
+# repository definitions for simplaret
+# please dont use any spaces inside a repository definition
+#
+
+# root repositories
+ROOT-i386="tds%http://slackware.mirrors.tds.net/pub/slackware/"
+ROOT-i386="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/slackware/"
+ROOT-x86_64="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/slamd64/"
+ROOT-x86_64="slackadelic%http://mirror1.slackadelic.com/slamd64/"
+ROOT-x86_64="heanet%http://ftp.heanet.ie/pub/slamd64/"
+ROOT-powerpc="workaround%http://slackintosh.workaround.ch/pub/slackintosh/"
+ROOT-s390="ibiblio%http://distro.ibiblio.org/pub/linux/distributions/slack390/"
+
+# noarch
+NOARCH="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/noarch"
+
+# i386 10.2
+REPOS-i386-10.2="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-10.2/"
+PATCHES-i386-10.2="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-10.2/patches/"
+
+# x86_64 10.2
+REPOS-x86_64-10.2="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2/"
+PATCHES-x86_64-10.2="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2/patches/"
+
+# x86_64 10.2b
+REPOS-x86_64-10.2b="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2b/"
+PATCHES-x86_64-10.2b="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2b/patches/"
+
+# i386 11.0
+REPOS-i386-11.0="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-11.0/"
+PATCHES-i386-11.0="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-11.0/patches/"
+
+# x86_64 11.0
+REPOS-x86_64-11.0="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-11.0/"
+PATCHES-x86_64-11.0="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/slamd64/slamd64-11.0/patches/"
+
+# powerpc 11.0
+REPOS-powerpc-11.0="sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackintosh/slackintosh-11.0/"
+PATCHES-powerpc-11.0="workaround%http://slackintosh.workaround.ch/pub/slackintosh/11.0/patches/"
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/conf/simplepkg.conf.new b/branches/0.6/conf/simplepkg.conf.new
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a3c687
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/conf/simplepkg.conf.new
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+#
+# /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf
+#
+
+# Default architecture: set this option if you dont want simplepkg
+# to use the value from /etc/slackware-version
+# DEFAULT_ARCH="i386"
+
+# Default version: set this option if you dont want simplepkg;
+# to use the value from /etc/slackware-version
+# DEFAULT_VERSION="11.0"
+
+# Where jails are placed
+JAIL_ROOT="/vservers"
+
+# Wheter mkjial should add new jails in the jail list;
+# to enable it, set to "1" or "yes"
+ADD_TO_JAIL_LIST="1"
+
+# Whether mkjail should clean the package cache before installation
+# to enable it, set to "1" or "yes"
+SIMPLARET_CLEAN="1"
+
+# whether mkjail should clean the package cache after the installation;
+# to enable it, set to "1" or "yes"
+SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN="1"
+
+# Whether mkjail should issue a simplaret --update before install the jail;
+# to enable it, set to "1" or "yes"
+SIMPLARET_UPDATE="1"
+
+# Wheter try to download from the next repository on failed download.
+SIMPLARET_DOWNLOAD_FROM_NEXT_REPO="1"
+
+# Wheter delete also patches when simplaret --purge is called;
+# to enable it, set to "1" or "yes"
+SIMPLARET_PURGE_PATCHES="0"
+
+# Whether delete each package rigth after its installation;
+# to enable it, set to "1" or "yes"
+SIMPLARET_DELETE_DURING="0"
+
+# Delete packages older than N weeks from the cache
+SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS="3"
+
+# Where patches are placed
+PATCHES_DIR="/var/simplaret/patches"
+
+# Place to store your packages
+STORAGE="/var/simplaret/packages"
+
+# Whether to use passive ftp transfers;
+# to enable it, set to "1" or "yes"
+PASSIVE_FTP="1"
+
+# Http retrieval tool;
+# available parameters are "wget" or "curl"
+HTTP_TOOL="wget"
+
+# Ftp retrieval tool;
+# available parameters are "wget", "curl" or "ncftpget"
+FTP_TOOL="wget"
+
+# Set connection timeout in seconds
+CONNECT_TIMEOUT="20"
+
+# ROOT repository package priority
+ROOT_PRIORITY="patches slackware extra testing pasture"
+
+# REPOS repository package priority
+REPOS_PRIORITY="patches slackware extra testing pasture"
+
+# Whether to check package signatures (you should have the repository
+# maintainer key on your keyring)
+SIGNATURE_CHECKING="0"
+
+# Whether simplaret will try to solve dependencies by looking
+# for packages' slack-required
+DEPENDENCY_CHECKING="1"
+
+# Enabling this option (i.e, setting to "1" or "yes"), simplaret will
+# donwload even # already applied patches, a good option when you plan
+# to keep local copies of all needed patches for your system
+DOWNLOAD_EVEN_APPLIED_PATCHES="0"
+
+# Enabling this option (i.e, setting to "1" or "yes"), simplaret will
+# look at your standard repositories for new packages; if it find a
+# package with different version of your current installed package and
+# also this package isnt in the packages folder, then the new package
+# is applied; if in doubt, just say no or leave blank. Otherwise set it
+# either to "yes" or "1" and remember that if enabling this feature can
+# cause problems if you use more than one REPOS definition for each
+# ARCH and VERSION. Also, this option can be very slow.
+CONSIDER_ALL_PACKAGES_AS_PATCHES="0"
+
+# Enabling this option (i.e, setting to "1" or "yes"), simplaret will
+# store patches it finds on ROOT repositories on
+#
+#   $PATCHES_DIR/$ARCH/$VERSION/root-$repository_name.
+#
+# By default this option is turned off because it breaks the standard
+# way to store packages and can cause some confusion, but its an useful
+# feature if you like to see all patches apart from common packages and/or
+# stored in the same tree.
+STORE_ROOT_PATCHES_ON_PATCHES_DIR="0"
+
+# Set to yes if your templates will be placed in a subversion repository
+# This just work if TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE is set to own-folder (default)
+TEMPLATES_UNDER_SVN="no"
+
+# Where your templates will be located.
+# Dont change it except you know what you're doing.
+TEMPLATE_FOLDER="/etc/simplepkg/templates"
+
+# This variable controls in which folder / subfolder your templates will
+# be stored. Possible values are:
+#
+# - simplepkg-folder: templates are stored at /etc/simplepkg
+# - templates-folder: templates are stored at /etc/simplepkg/templates
+# - own-folder: each template stored at its own folder
+#               at /etc/simplepkg/templates/template-name
+#
+# This variable has backwards purposes only, so dont change it.
+TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE="own-folder"
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/CHANGELOG b/branches/0.6/doc/CHANGELOG
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cfaa5d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/CHANGELOG
@@ -0,0 +1,389 @@
+simplepkg changelog
+===================
+
+0.5pre17
+========
+
+  - createpkg, lspkg, jail-commit:
+    - bugfixes
+
+0.5pre16
+========
+
+  - doinst.sh:
+    - small fix
+
+0.5pre15
+========
+
+  - simplaret:
+    - small bugfix
+
+  - common.sh:
+    - small bugfix
+
+  - mkbuild:
+    - some changes
+
+0.5pre14
+========
+
+  - simplaret
+    - added variable REPOS_PRIORITY
+    - added variable SIMPLARET_DOWNLOAD_FROM_NEXT_REPO
+
+  - lspkg:
+    - small bugfix
+
+  - common.sh:
+     - on search_template, doesnt return a template from
+       defaults/ if the function is called with --update
+
+  - utils/add-slack-required:
+    - command line enhancement
+
+0.5pre9 - 0.5pre13
+==================
+
+  - bugfix releases
+
+0.5pre8
+=======
+
+  - lspkg:
+    - bugfix
+
+  - common.sh:
+    - bugfix in function slash
+
+0.5pre7
+=======
+
+  - simplaret:
+    - fixed bug for ROOT definitions when there is packages
+      inside of folders different than ROOT_PRIORITY
+
+0.5pre6
+=======
+
+  - repos:
+    - FILE_LIST generation fix
+
+  - mkjail:
+    - new config variable ADD_TO_JAIL_LIST controls wheter to
+      add new jails into the JAIL_LIST file
+
+0.5pre5
+=======
+
+  - jail-commit
+    - SILENT env variable to decrease verbosity
+    
+0.5pre4
+=======
+
+  - templatepkg:
+    - small fixes
+    - help usage summary improvements
+    - now using variable TEMPLATE_FOLDER
+    - SILENT env variable to decrease verbosity
+    - option -p | --post-install renamed to -b | --batch-edit
+    - option -p | --post-install now used to build a package from a template
+    - option -d | --delete now can also remove post-install scripts
+
+  - common.sh
+    - small fixes
+    - now using variable TEMPLATE_FOLDER
+
+  - jail-commit:
+    - calling templatepkg silently
+    - small fixes
+
+0.5pre3
+=======
+
+  - again, lots of bugfixes
+
+  - jail-commit:
+    - update a template just once if finds more than one entry
+      for a template in the jailist
+
+0.5pre2
+=======
+
+  - lots of bugfixes
+
+  - templatepkg:
+    - now creates missing components in a template
+
+0.5pre1
+=======
+
+  Lots of changes!
+
+  - repos: cosmetic changes
+
+  - lspkg:
+    - support for $ROOT env variable
+    - some improvements
+
+  - CHANGELOG cleanup
+
+  - subversion repository support for templates
+
+  - metapkg moved to utils/
+
+  - simplaret:
+    - new config variables:
+      - STORE_ROOT_PATCHES_ON_PATCHES_DIR
+      - SIGNATURE_CHECKING
+      - ROOT=/otherroot works for --install, --remove and --upgrade
+    - signature checking
+    - dependency checking through slack-required
+
+  - mkjail:
+    - added support for slack-required as templates
+    - templates now can be stored either on
+      - /etc/simplepkg/template_name.template
+      - /etc/simplepkg/templates/template_name.template
+      - /etc/simplepkg/templates/template_name/template_name.template
+
+  - jail-update
+    - old script renamed to jail-commit
+    - now update a jail from a template
+    - svn repository support
+
+  - jail-commit
+    - new script, commit changes from a jail to the templates
+    - svn repository support
+
+  - templatepkg:
+    - major rewrite
+    - svn repository support
+    - now supports a tagfile or slack-required as a template
+    - new/changed options
+      -c | --create: improvements
+      -a | --add: changed to add files into a template
+      -u | --update: update a template
+      -d | --delete: delete files or folders from a template
+      -s | --sync: sync /etc/simplepkg/templates working copy
+      -e | --export: export /etc/simplepkg/templates to a svn repository
+      -i | --import: grab /etc/simplepkg/templates from a svn repository
+      -r | --remove: remove a template
+      -l | --list: list templates
+      -p | --post-install: add or edit post-installation scripts
+      -t | --template-edit: edit template package list
+      -h | --help: display this summary
+
+0.4.9pre18-23
+=============
+
+  - simplaret:
+    - enhanced http retrieval: curl support
+    - enhanced verbosity
+    - get-patches small changes
+    - various fixes
+
+0.4.9pre10-17
+=============
+
+  - lots of simplaret fixes
+
+0.4.9pre9
+=========
+
+  - createpkg:
+    - speedup
+    - ncftpget support
+    - timeout support
+    - sets the correct architecture
+
+  - deleted jail-upgrade
+
+  - removed swaret support
+
+0.4.9pre8
+=========
+
+  - createpkg: bugfix
+
+  - common.sh:
+    - enhanced config file evaluation
+    - fixed function default_arch
+
+  - simplaret:
+    - config evaluation via common.sh
+    - new config parameter SIMPLARET_PURGE_PATCHES
+ 
+0.4.9pre7
+=========
+
+  - repos: added patches/ metafile creation
+
+  - jail-upgrade:
+    - added option CONSIDER_ALL_PACKAGES_AS_PATCHES
+    - merged swaret and simplaret upgrade procedures
+    - act recursively on patches' folder
+
+  - simplaret: lots of changes, most important are:
+    - new repository scheme, take a look at repos.conf.new.
+    - --get looks first to PATCHES repositories, then ROOT,
+      then REPOS and finally at NOARCH repositories; the
+      firts matching package is downloaded.
+    - new config parameter ROOT_PRIORITY set the priority
+      of folder lookup at a ROOT repository, defaults to
+      "patches slackware extra testing pasture".
+    - for --get, check if an already existing package
+      in the local repository has the same version and
+      build number, otherwise erase the old and download
+      the new one.
+    - fixed --get-paches
+    - added --upgrade option
+    - added --install
+    - added --remove
+    - new config parameter DOWNLOAD_EVEN_APPLIED_PATCHES
+
+  - createpkg: lots of changes
+
+0.4.9pre6
+=========
+
+  - createpkg:
+    - fixes
+    - now with slackbuild error handling
+    - increased verbosity
+
+  - small fixes on rebuildpkg 
+
+  - lspkg enhancements
+
+  - simplaret fix on --purge
+
+  - updated default repos.conf
+
+0.4.9pre5
+=========
+
+  - added script "repos"
+
+  - moved simplaret to /usr/bin
+
+0.4.9pre4
+=========
+
+  - createpkg: better command line evaluation,
+    now using "upgradepkg --install-new" to
+    install a package and added the command
+    line option --no-deps so createpkg doesn't
+    goes down to solve all slack-required
+    dependencies.
+
+0.4.9pre3
+=========
+
+  - small fix on createpkg when handling with
+    slackbuilds with similar names
+
+0.4.9pre2
+=========
+
+  - fixed simplepkg.SlackBuild
+
+  - fixed doinst.sh
+
+  - re-organized the source repository
+
+  - added createpkg
+
+  - updated README and README.pt_BR
+
+0.4.8
+=====
+
+  - simplaret: removed extra folder from slamd64 definition
+
+  - fixed a typo
+
+0.4.7
+=====
+
+  - templatepkg bugfix on blank template lines and on package deletion
+    changed simplaret working dir in simplaret.conf.new
+
+0.4.6
+=====
+
+  - small bugfix on jail-update that prevented template update
+
+0.4.5
+=====
+
+  - vserver template update
+
+0.4.4
+=====
+
+  - WARNING option on config file for simplaret
+
+  - SILENT env var, if a non-zero value, keeps simplaret
+    work silenty when purging and works like if WANRING is set
+    to not null.
+
+  - added SIMPLARET_DELETE_DURING config parameter: when set
+    to a non-zero value deletes each package rigth after its
+    installation
+
+0.4.3
+=====
+
+  - added openoffice.org template
+
+0.4.2
+=====
+
+  - common.sh: fix on install_packages when handling
+    with similar package names
+
+0.4.1
+=====
+
+  - templatepkg: fixed tagfiles and comment handling
+
+0.4
+===
+
+  - multi-plataform and version management
+
+    now simplepkg supports jails with architectures and versions 
+    others than the main system, read the docs for details.
+
+  - added simplaret: a small script for downloading packages
+     
+  - jail-upgrade
+
+      * arch checking via /etc/slackware-version on each jail
+      * supports multi-arch and multi-version repository
+      * integrated with simplaret
+
+  -  common.sh: improved functions to support simplaret
+
+0.3.7-0.3.9
+===========
+
+  - bugfix releases
+
+0.3.6
+=====
+
+  - added "-u" option to eval_config to ask for a swaret --update
+
+0.3.5
+=====
+
+  - "main" jail support for jail-update
+
+0.3.4
+=====
+
+  - Started changelog :)
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/COPYING b/branches/0.6/doc/COPYING
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d60c31a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/COPYING
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+		       Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+     59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+			    Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+			    NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+		     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+	    How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+    Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year  name of author
+    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+  `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+  Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/README b/branches/0.6/doc/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50b0e9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/README
@@ -0,0 +1,258 @@
+Simplepkg: installation manager and metapackage system
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+Author: Silvio Rhatto <rhatto at riseup.net>
+Licence: GPL
+
+Simplepkg is a non-intrusive package management system running on top of pkgtool.
+It uses templates -- lists of installed packages, scripts and configuration files
+-- allowing the creation of installation profiles that can be used do install a
+complete and configured slackware system in another partition or to create chroot
+environments. The same templating scheme extends slackware packaging system, adding
+metapackages: a list of packages installed or removed with a single command.
+
+Documentation
+-------------
+
+  English documentation: README | http://slack.sarava.org/node/15
+  Portuguese documentation: REAMDE.pt_BR | http://slack.sarava.org/node/12
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+All GNU/Linux distributions comes with a well developed packaging system. The question now
+is how pratical is the way to install, configure and control any changes in a system.
+
+As an example, suppose you should keep a list of about 200 slackware machines, some
+of them used as desktops, others as mail or webservers. If you lost some hardrives
+or usually need to re-install or update some of those boxes.
+
+Using the slackware installation cd and configuring by hand all the time you got a crash
+is a time loss activity and you'll never know if something remained missconfigured. An
+alternative is to keep a complete backup of a machine or some parts of the tree, but for
+a large number of different boxes this procedure costs a lots of resources.
+
+Simplepkg offers an alternative sollution for this and other problems related to installation
+management, allowing you to keep templates of each machine and install a custom slackware
+system with just one or a few commands. Creating and upgrading chroot and vservers is easy
+with simplepkg.
+
+Architecture
+------------
+
+Simplepkg is a set of scripts wrote in the KISS philosophy. Its a pretty simple system, composed
+by the following commands:
+
+   - mkjail: build a slackware jail/installation in a folder
+   - metapkg: install or remove a metapackage
+   - templatepkg: create or update a package list of an installation template
+   - lspkg: show installed packages and its contents
+   - jail-upgrade: upgrade all or some of the jails/installations 
+   - jail-update: update all configuration files of a template
+   - rebuildpkg: rebuild a package based on its /var/log/packages entry
+   - simplaret: package retrieval tool
+   - createpkg: donwload, compile and package creationg script based on http://slack.sarava.org/slackbuilds
+
+Simplepkg configs are placed at /etc/simplepkg. Templates are .template files containing an one-by-line
+package list. A template can be something like this:
+
+  aaa_base
+  aaa_elflibs
+  apache
+  bash
+  bin
+  coreutils
+  findutils
+
+Slackware's tagfile format can be used too as a template.
+
+Installation
+------------
+
+The latest version of simplepkg is locate at http://slack.sarava.org/packages/noarch/.
+Install it with the usual way:
+
+  installpkg simplepkg-VERSION-noarch-BUILD.tgz
+
+If you have a working swaret on your system, add this line on you swaret.conf:
+
+  REPOS_ROOT=SlackMidiataticaNoarch%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/noarch
+
+and then issue those commands:
+
+  swaret --update
+  swaret --install simplepkg
+
+Configuration
+-------------
+
+As an example, we'll create a jail based on the packages installed in your slackware
+system. Edit the config file /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf:
+
+  # /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf
+  JAIL_ROOT="/vservers" # where jails are placed
+  SIMPLARET="simplaret" # package grabber program (can be swaret if you have it installed)
+  SIMPLARET_CLEAN="1" # clean package cache before installation
+  SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN="1" # clean package cache after the installation
+  SIMPLARET_UPDATE="0" # issue an simplaret --update before install the jail
+  SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS="N" # delete packages older than N weeks from the cache
+  PATCHES_DIR="/storage/package/patches" # where patches are placed
+  DEFAULT_ARCH="i386"
+  DEFAULT=VERSION="10.2"
+  STORAGE="/storage/packages" # where simplepkg store packages
+  PASSIVE_FTP="1"
+
+You should also put in /etc/simplepkg/repos.conf all package repositories you use, like this:
+
+  ROOT-i386="http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware"
+  REPOS-i386="slack-sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-10.2/"
+  ROOT-x86_64-10.2="http://darkstar.ist.utl.pt/pub/slamd64/"
+  REPOS-x86_64-10.2="slamd-sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2/"
+
+Instead of simplaret you can use swaret to fetch packages and them your swaret.conf must
+be configured to use the same place as STORAGE to the package cache. In this case you cant
+keep installations and jails with multiple arquitetures and for that reason the use of
+simplaret is recommended.
+
+Creating jails and replicating installations
+--------------------------------------------
+
+  templatepkg my-slackare
+  mkjail jail my-slackware
+
+The previous commands creates a template called my-slackware from based on your installed
+softwares listed in /var/log/packages and then creates a completely new slackware
+tree with all those packages in the folder /vservers/jail (depending on the value of JAIL_ROOT from
+your simplepkg.conf).
+
+If you want that some config files get copied or some scripts executed after install this jail,
+place in the folder /etc/simplepkg/my-slackware.d all your config files (preserving the file
+system hierarchy, i.e, /etc/simplepkg/my-slackware/etc/apache/httpd.conf) and the scripts at
+/etc/simplepkg/my-slackware.s/. The template vserver, which comes in the simplepkg package, has
+an example script to use with mkjail.
+
+You can specify an alternative destination for your jail with a command like
+
+  ROOT=/mnt mkjail hda2 my-slackware
+
+This does exactly what you think: installs slackware in /mnt/hda2 with exactly the same packages
+you have on your system, replacing the need of the slackware installer!
+
+In case no template specified, mkjail uses the one called /etc/simplepkg/default.template.
+
+If you keep your jails in JAIL_ROOT with the same name as the template you used to create it, its
+possible to use the command jail-update to copy all modifications made in the files which their
+counterparts are placed at /etc/simplepkg/jail-name.d. Then you can copy all configuration files
+you edited to the template folder and leave a crontab entry to everyday seek for changes and update
+the template. When you issue the command
+
+  jail-update
+
+all jails listed in /etc/simplepkg/jaillist are updated. This command also updates the package list
+of the template.
+
+To add or remove packages from a template, you can just edit by hand the template file or use the
+command templatepkg with the -a (append) flag, which adds just the new installed packages in the
+template file. 
+
+If you want to create a template from a jail, use
+
+  templatepkg jail /vservers/jail
+
+Metapackages
+------------
+
+Another use for the templates is the creation of metapackegs: new users have lots of difficulties
+to track dependencies when installing a software. Using a template containing the name of all
+packages needed by some program allow users to easily install it through the command
+
+  metapkg --install program-name
+
+This seems like swaret or slapt-get, with the only difference in the way metapkg deals with
+dependence resolution. Slapt-get support the slack-required file, wich comes or not with the
+package. Swaret has its own tool for dependence matching.
+
+Simplepkg doesn't wish to substitute those two dependence checking modes, but offer an alternate
+way to distribute packages where dependences are resolved without an specific tool or a change
+in the package itself.
+
+A metapackage, i.e, all installed packages from a template, can be removed with 
+
+  metapkg --remove program-name
+
+Upgrading jails
+---------------
+
+Both the main installation (your root system) and your jails are upgraded with the command
+jail-upgrade: just adjust simplepkg.conf's PATCHES_DIR to where you store slackware patches
+(that can be rsync'ed everyday) and do a
+
+  jail-upgrade
+
+This will upgrade your main system and all jails living in JAIL_ROOT. To specify another
+folder, use
+
+  ROOT=/otherroot jail-upgrade
+
+If you want to upgrade just one specific jail,
+
+  jail-upgrade jail-name
+
+To use a patches folder other than PATCHES_DIR, e.g when you have jails with different
+slackware versions, use
+ 
+  PATCHES=/alternative/patches/folder jail-upgrade jail-name
+
+Different archs and versions
+----------------------------
+
+Simplepkg was idealized to permit a template to create jails from any architecture and version
+of a slackware-like system. Upgrading tasks also are unified. This feature just works if you
+use simplaret and not swaret as the package retrieval tool.
+
+As another example, to create an slack 10.1 installation (assuming your /etc/simplepkg/repos.conf with
+the right configuration), just type
+
+  VERSION=10.1 mkjail my-jail server-template 
+
+Different archs can be used too. If you have a x86_64 system and wants to install a slack 10.2
+in a partition, try something like
+
+  ARCH=i386 VERSION=10.2 ROOT=/mnt mkjail hda2 my-slackware
+
+Note that the templates are arch and version independent, as they just contain package names,
+configuration files and scripts. For this reason, the commands templatepkg, metapkg, lspkg and
+jail-update can be used normaly.
+
+To upgrade jails with othes archs and versions, jail-upgrade checks this information through
+/etc/slackware-version for each jail and applies the correspondent patches grabed from
+simplaret (see the proper documentation).
+
+By this way, doesn't matter which versions and archs each of your jails has, jail-upgrade remains
+the same since your patches are sorted by arch an version, as explained in simplaret documentation
+found at http://slack.sarava.org/node/17.
+
+Auxiliar applications: rebuildpkg and createpkg
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Simplepkg comes with an additional helper tool that recover installed packages which the original
+.tgz file was lost. The command rebuildpkg rebuilds a package from their entry in /var/log/packages.
+As an example,
+
+  rebuildpkg coreutils
+
+rebuilds the coreutils package using the files, scripts and metainformations stored in
+/var/log/packages/ and /var/log/scripts/.
+
+If you want to build you own packages using the scripts available from http://slack.sarava.org/slackbuilds,
+use the createpkg script:
+
+  createpkg package-name
+
+Source
+------
+
+Source code for simplepkg and its package builder can be fetched via subversion:
+
+  svn checkout svn://slack.sarava.org/simplepkg
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/README.pt_BR b/branches/0.6/doc/README.pt_BR
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..80634d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/README.pt_BR
@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+Simplepkg: gerenciamento de instala��es e pacotes
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Autor: Silvio Rhatto <rhatto at riseup.net>
+Licen�a: GPL
+
+O simplepkg � um sistema de gerenciamento de pacotes que roda sobre o pkgtool. Ele � composto
+por v�rios scripts que desempenham fun��es de administra��o e desenvolvimento de sistemas
+do tipo Slackware, procurando fechar um circuito de produ��o, envolvendo a constru��o, a
+instala��o de pacotes e at� mesmo a instala��o do sistema de forma automatizada.
+
+Do lado do desenvolvedor/a, ele ajuda na cria��o de SlackBuilds e constru��o de pacotes.
+Do lado do administrador/a, ele possibilita a instala��o automatizada de sistemas, instala��o
+de pacotes e a cria��o de "templates" de instala��o -- que cont�m todos os arquivos de configura��o,
+informa��es de permiss�es e scripts de p�s-instala��o de uma dada m�quina ou jaula.
+
+Ele trabalha com templates -- listas com pacotes instalados, scripts e arquivos de configura��o
+-- permitindo criar perfis de instala��o que podem ser ent�o usados para instalar o sistema numa
+outra parti��o, criar um chroot espec�fico ou at� trabalhar com o conceito de metapacotes: uma
+lista de pacotes que pode ser instalada e removida com apenas um comando.
+
+Documenta��o
+------------
+
+A documenta��o mais atualizada do simplepkg est� em http://slack.sarava.org/simplepkg
+
+Descri��o
+---------
+
+Todas as distribui��es de GNU/Linux j� tem algum sistema de empacotamento amadurecido. A quest�o
+agora � a praticidade de instalar e controlar o que est� instalado, tanto pacotes como arquivos
+de configura��o de uma m�quina, al�m da facilidade na cria��o de pacotes.
+
+Imagine por exemplo se voc� precisa manter uma lista de pacotes de 200 m�quinas slackware, sendo
+que algumas s�o usadas como desktop, outras como servidores web, alguma sendo o servidor de email
+e assim por diante. Imagine agora que voc� perca o disco de algumas dessas m�quinas ou que precise
+cotidianamente reinstalar ou atualizar um sistema.
+
+Usar o cd de instala��o do slackware e configurar na m�o toda a vez que der um pau faria com que
+voc� ficasse louco/a e desperdi�asse muito tempo, al�m do que sempre ocorre de esquecermos algum
+detalhe ou pacote durante a configura��o do sistema. Manter um backup completo de cada m�quina,
+por outro lado, pode ser muito custoso se o n�mero delas for muito grande.
+
+O simplepkg permite que voc� mantenha um template para cada grupo de m�quinas e com apenas um
+comando instalar o template numa parti��o. Al�m do template, voc� precisa configurar o simplepkg
+para obter pacotes de um reposit�rio local ou remoto.
+
+Gerenciar instala��es e pacotes n�o � tudo o que o simplepkg faz. Ele pode ser usado at� na
+cria��o de jaula e vservers. Ou ent�o ele ...
+
+Arquitetura
+-----------
+
+O simplepkg � um conjunto de scripts escritos com a filosofia KISS em mente. Ele � um sistema muito
+simples, composto pelos seguintes comandos:
+
+   - mkjail: constr�i uma jaula/instala��o de slackware numa pasta
+   - metapkg: instala ou remove um metapacote
+   - templatepkg: criar ou adiciona pacotes a um template
+   - lspkg: lista pacotes instalados
+   - jail-upgrade: faz o upgrade nas jaulas
+   - rebuildpkg: reconstr�i um pacote a partir de sua entrada no /var/log/packages
+   - simplaret: obt�m pacotes de reposit�rios locais ou remotos
+   - createpkg: baixa, compila e empacota software de acordo com http://slack.sarava.org/slackbuilds
+
+A pasta de configura��o e armazenamento de templates � a /etc/simplepkg. Templates s�o arquivos contendo
+uma lista de pacotes, um pacote por linha e com a extens�o .template. Como exemplo, um template poderia se
+chamar minimo.template e conter a seguinte lista:
+
+  aaa_base
+  aaa_elflibs
+  apache
+  bash
+  bin
+  coreutils
+  findutils
+
+Se voc� quiser tamb�m � poss�vel usar um tagfile do slackware como template, sem nem precisar edit�-lo.
+
+Instalando o simplepkg
+----------------------
+
+Para baixar o pacote do simplepkg, v� em http://slack.sarava.org/packages/noarch/.
+
+  installpkg simplepkg-VERSAO-noarch-BUILD.tgz
+
+Configurando o simplepkg
+------------------------
+
+Como exemplo, vamos criar uma jaula baseada nos pacotes instalados no seu slackware. Edite o
+arquivo /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf:
+
+  # /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf
+  JAIL_ROOT="/vservers" # local onde as jaulas ser�o criadas
+  SIMPLARET="simplaret" # programa que baixa os pacotes (pode ser o swaret se voce o tiver)
+  STORAGE="/var/simplaret" # local onde o simplepkg armazena seus pacotes
+  SIMPLARET_CLEAN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes antes da instala��o da jaula
+  SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes ap�s a instala��o
+  SIMPLARET_UPDATE="0" # atualiza as listas de pacotes antes de iniciar a instala��o da jaula
+  SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS="N" # apaga os pacotes do cache mais velhos que N semanas antes de instalar
+  PATCHES_DIR="/var/simplaret/patches" # local os patches s�o armazenados
+  DEFAULT_ARCH="i386"
+  DEFAULT=VERSION="10.2"
+  STORAGE="/storage/packages" # where simplepkg store packages
+  PASSIVE_FTP="1"
+
+Para definir quais reposit�rios de pacotes voc� usar�, edite o arquivo /etc/simplepkg/repos.conf,
+colocando algo como
+
+  ROOT-i386="http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware"
+  REPOS-i386="slack-sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-10.2/"
+  ROOT-x86_64-10.2="http://darkstar.ist.utl.pt/pub/slamd64/"
+  REPOS-x86_64-10.2="slamd-sarava%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2/"
+
+Para informa��es detalhadas sobre o simplaret, consulte seu artigo espec�fico em http://slack.sarava.org/node/16
+
+Se voc� quer utilizar o swaret em lugar do simplaret, o swaret.conf deve estar bem configurado para que ele
+seja capaz de baixar e instalar todos os pacotes dos templates. Par�metros como EXCLUDE podem ser um empecilho,
+e se voc� os remover da sua instala��o tenha muito cuidado ao atualizar o seu sistema via swaret --upgrade.
+A desvantagem de usar o swaret � que voc� n�o ter� como administrar jaulas e instala��es de m�ltiplas arquiteturas.
+
+Criando jaulas e replicando instala��es
+---------------------------------------
+
+  templatepkg meu-slackware
+  mkjail jaula meu-slackware
+
+Isso cria o template meu-slackware a partir da sua lista de pacotes em /var/log/packages e cria uma nova �rvore
+com esses pacotes na pasta /vservers/jaula (dependendo de qual o valor da vari�vel JAIL_ROOT do simplepkg.conf, � claro).
+
+Se voc� quiser que alguns arquivos de configura��o e executar scripts ap�s a instala��o dessa jaula, basta colocarmos na
+pasta /etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/ os arquivos de configura��o (dentro da hierarquia de pastas do sistema, isto �,
+/etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf) e os script em /etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.s/. O template vserver,
+que j� vem no mkjail cont�m um exemplo de script.
+
+Voc� pode especificar tamb�m destinos alternativos para sua jaula, atrav�s de um comando do tipo
+
+  ROOT=/mnt mkjail hda2 meu-slackware
+
+O comando acima faz exatamente o que voc� est� pensando: replica sua instala��o slackware em /mnt/hda2, dispensando
+totalmente o programa de instala��o do slackware!
+
+Caso nenhum template for especificado, o mkjail utiliza o template /etc/simplepkg/default.template.
+
+Se voc� manter uma jaula em JAIL_ROOT com o mesmo nome que um template, � poss�vel ainda usar o script jail-update
+para copiar todas as altera��es de arquivos da jaula na pasta de arquivos do seu template (/etc/simplepkg/nome-da-jaula.d).
+Assim, basta que voc� copie todos os arquivos de configura��o que voc� editou para essa pasta e deixar o jail-update numa
+crontab para que voc� tenha sempre um template atualizado e baseado nas jaulas / instala��es que voc� tem rodando e que
+estiverem listadas no arquivo /etc/simplepkg/jailist:
+
+  jail-update
+ 
+Para adicionar ou remover pacotes de um template, basta editar o arquivo de template. Uma outra forma de adicionar
+arquivos � usando o templatepkg com a op��o -a, que adiciona apenas novos pacotes ao template. Se voc� quiser que o
+templatepkg crie um template a partir de uma jaula, simplesmente use
+
+  templatepkg jaula /vservers/jaula
+ 
+Metapacotes
+-----------
+
+Outro uso dos templates � a cria��o de pacotes: imagine por exemplo a dificuldade de um usu�rio/a novo de slackware
+para instalar o cinelerra e todas as suas depend�ncias. Criando um template contendo o nome de todos os pacotes
+necess�rios para rodar esse software permite que um usu�rio instale-o simplesmente com o comando
+
+  metapkg --install cinelerra
+ 
+O comando sugere uma semelhan�a com o uso direto do swaret ou do slapt-get, com a �nica diferen�a residindo no
+modo como cada um desses programas lida com as depend�ncias de um pacote. Os slapt-get suporta o arquivo
+slack-required, que pode ou n�o estar presente no pacote. J� o swaret possui uma ferramenta pr�pria para a
+cria��o de uma lista de depend�ncias.
+
+O simplepkg n�o pretende substituir esses dois modos de checagem e sim propor uma alternativa de distribui��o
+de pacotes em que as depend�ncias s�o resolvidas sem precisar de um reposit�rio de depend�ncias ou uma modifica��o
+no pr�prio pacote, que � o caso do slack-required, um arquivo que na maioria das vezes n�o est� presente.
+
+A remo��o de um aplicativo e todas as suas depend�ncias podem ser feitas simplesmente com o comando
+
+  metapkg --remove cinelerra
+ 
+Upgrade de jaulas
+-----------------
+
+O upgrade de jaulas que estejam em JAIL_ROOT pode ser efetuado com o comando jail-upgrade. Simplesmente coloque
+os patches em PATCHES_DIR e d� o comando
+
+  jail-upgrade
+
+Se voc� quiser atualizar apenas uma das jaulas que est�o em JAIL_ROOT, use
+
+  jail-upgrade nome-da-jaula
+ 
+Para especificar uma pasta contendo patches diferente de PATCHES_DIR (�til quando voc� possui jaulas com
+diferentes vers�es do slackware), simplesmente use
+
+  PATCHES=/local/dos/patches jail-upgrade nome-da-jaula
+ 
+De modo an�logo ao mkjail, � poss�vel indicar ao jail-upgrade uma outra pasta onde a jaula est� armazenada:
+
+  ROOT=/otherroot jail-upgrade
+
+Arquiteturas e vers�es diferentes
+---------------------------------
+
+O simplepkg foi idealizado para permitir que um mesmo template possa ser usado para criar jaulas de
+arquiteturas e vers�es diferentes de sistemas padr�o slackware. A atualiza��o desses sistemas tamb�m
+� unificada. Essa possibilidade s� � permitida se voc� usa o simplaret e n�o o swaret como ferramenta
+de obten��o de pacotes.
+
+Por exemplo, para criar uma instala��o de slackware 10.1 (assumindo que suas defini��es de reposit�rios
+do /etc/simplepkg/repos.conf contenham locais com slack 10.1), basta usar o comando
+
+  VERSION=10.1 mkjail minha-jaula template-servidor
+
+Arquiteturas diferentes tamb�m podem ser usadas. Se voc� est� num sistema x86_64 e quer instalar um
+slack 10.2 numa parti��o, experimente
+
+  ARCH=i386 VERSION=10.2 ROOT=/mnt mkjail hda2 meu-slackware
+
+Note que os templates independem de arquitetura e vers�o, j� que eles s� cont�m nomes de pacotes,
+arquivos de configura��o e scripts. Por isso, o templatepkg, o metapkg, o lspkg e o jail-update
+funcionam normalmente.
+
+Para atualizar suas jaulas, o jail-upgrade checa antes qual a vers�o e arquitetura de cada uma
+de suas jaulas atrav�s do /etc/slackware-version correspondente e a partir disso aplica os patches
+da arquitetura e vers�o da mesma, usando para isso o simplaret (veja a documenta��o pr�pria).
+
+Desse modo, mesmo que voc� tenha jaulas de vers�es e arquiteturas diversas, usar o comando "jail-upgrade"
+faz a atualiza��o sem problemas, desde que seus patches estejam organizados por arquitetura e vers�o,
+conforme � detalhado na documenta��o do simplaret, em http://slack.sarava.org/node/16.
+ 
+Aplicativos auxiliares: rebuildpkg e createpkg
+----------------------------------------------
+
+O simplepkg acompanha ainda um aplicativo auxiliar que ajuda a recuperar pacotes instalados cujo tgz original
+foi perdido. O comando rebuildpkg reconstr�i um pacote a partir de uma entrada no /var/log/packages. O comando
+
+  rebuildpkg coreutils
+
+reconstr�i um pacote do coreutils usando os arquivos e as metainforma��es listadas no arquivo
+do /var/log/packages/ correspondente ao coreutils.
+
+Se voc� quiser construir seus pr�prios pacotes baseados nos slackbuilds dispon�veis em
+http://slack.sarava.org/slackbuilds, basta utilizar o createpkg:
+
+  createpkg nome-do-pacote
+
+Fonte
+-----
+
+Se voc� quiser obter diretamente o c�digo-fonte do simplepkg, baixe-o do reposit�rio:
+
+  svn checkout svn://slack.sarava.org/simplepkg
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/README.simplaret b/branches/0.6/doc/README.simplaret
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce7efbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/README.simplaret
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+simplaret: simplepkg retrieval tool
+-----------------------------------
+
+Simplaret is a simplepkg tool used to download packages from local and remote repositories.
+With simplaret, one can grab packages for all archictectures and versions of slackware-like
+distributions that follows the mirror guidelines, allowing an easy management all
+jails and slackware installations in a machine, no matter wich arquiteture or version
+each one has.
+
+It was inspired in swaret behavior but don't tries to get its complexity level, but
+execute package download in a different way, where the local repository is organized
+by archictecture and version. It can also search for packages.
+
+Documentation
+-------------
+
+The always updated english documentation is hosted at http://slack.sarava.org/node/17
+
+Downloading and installing
+--------------------------
+
+Simplaret comes with simplepkg, wich installation and configuration is detailed
+at http://slack.sarava.org/node/15. Simplaret uses /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf for
+its definitions and /etc/simplepkg/repos.conf for repository information.
+
+Repository organization
+-----------------------
+
+Simplaret local storage folder is defined through STORAGE parameter and is organized
+in this manner:
+
+  $STORAGE/arch/version/
+
+Packages from contributed repositories (i.e, not from an official distro mirror) are
+stored at
+
+  $STORAGE/arch/version/repository-name/
+
+This means, for example, that slack 10.2 packages are located in
+
+  $STORAGE/i386/10.2/
+
+And the slack.sarava.org's slamd64 packages can be stored in a place such as
+
+  $STORAGE/x86_64/10.2/slack.sarava.org/
+
+In the repository definition file (/etc/simplepkg/repos.conf), the entries must match
+the following schema, something that remembers a swaret.conf:
+
+  ROOT-i386="http://slack.sarava.org/slackware/"
+  ROOT-x86_64="http://ftp.heanet.ie/pub/slamd64/"
+  REPOS-i386-10.2="slack.sarava.org%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-10.2/"
+  REPOS-x86_64-10.2="slack.sarava.org%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2/"
+
+Repositories defined as ROOT are those wich
+
+  - Have packages from the official distro or
+  - Are organized by version according to the mirror guidelines
+
+Repositories defined as REPOS are those containing packages from a specific version or
+non-oficial packages.
+
+When simplaret searches for a package, precedence is given first for ROOT definitions and then
+for REPOS ones. REPOS definitions should also include a identification name, delimited from
+the repository URL by the special sign %.
+
+Fetching the package list
+-------------------------
+
+After configured, simplaret can fetch the package list with
+
+  simplaret --update
+
+This updates the package list from arch defined in DEFAULT_ARCH and version from DEFAULT_VERSION.
+To fetch package listings for x86_64 (slamd64) and version 10.2, use
+
+  ARCH=x86_64 VERSION=10.2 simplaret --update
+
+Searching
+---------
+
+To search for a package, use the following commands as examples:
+
+  simplaret --search coreutils
+
+for a Slack/390 package,
+
+  ARCH=s390 simplaret --search x11
+
+for slack 10.1 with contributed i686 packages,
+
+  ARCH=i686 VERSION=10.1 simplaret --search icecast
+
+Downloading
+-----------
+
+To download a package,
+
+  simplaret --get icecast
+
+Simplaret downloads the first package found with the precedence explaned above.
+Future versions should contain an option to explicit get a package from a
+specific repository.
+
+Downloading patches
+-------------------
+
+From the PATCHES_DIR parameter is possible to specify a folder where patches are
+placed, sorted by arch and version.
+
+Patches for slack 10.2 are always located at
+
+  $PATCHES_DIR/i386/10.2/
+
+In reality, patches are downloaded with a "simplaret --get" and stored in the $STORAGE
+subfolder for its arch and version and a symlink is created in $PATCHES_DIR/$ARCH/$VERSION.
+
+To grab all patches from an arch and version, use
+
+  ARCH=architecture VERSION=version simplaret --get-patches
+
+Purging the cache
+-----------------
+
+Simplaret cache from an arch and version can be purged with a
+
+  simplaret --purge
+
+But why use that?
+-----------------
+
+You may ask why someone wishes to use such tool.
+
+Simplaret was written with a *x86 environment in mind, where lots of jails with different archs
+and versions are installed. Suppose a x86_64 with the following chroots installed:
+
+  - slamd64 10.2
+  - slackware 10.2
+  - slackware 10.1 with additional i686 packages
+  - uSlack (i386 uClibc) 
+
+Keep all this stuff update manually is really a headache. Simplaret just tries to make it trivial.
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/README.simplaret.pt_BR b/branches/0.6/doc/README.simplaret.pt_BR
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b1cd58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/README.simplaret.pt_BR
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+simplaret: ferramenta para obten��o de pacotes
+----------------------------------------------
+
+O simplaret � a ferramenta do simplepkg utilizada para obter pacotes de reposit�rios locais
+ou remotos. Com ele, voc� pode n�o s� baixar pacotes do seu sistema slackware como tamb�m pode
+baixar de qualquer vers�o ou arquitetura cujo reposit�rio siga os Mirror Guidelines do slackware,
+permitindo que voc� gerencie facilmente todas as suas jaulas e instala��es de slackware,
+independentemente da arquitetura ou vers�o que elas utilizem.
+
+Ele foi inspirado no comportamento do swaret mas n�o pretende de modo algum chegar no n�vel de
+complexidade deste, mas sim executar a obten��o de pacotes de um modo diferente. Sua finalidade
+� apenas baixar pacotes para que os aplicativos do simplepkg possam utiliz�-lo posteriormente.
+O simplaret ainda pode ser usado sozinho para procurar e baixar pacotes.
+
+Documenta��o
+------------
+
+A documenta��o atualizada do simplaret se encontra em http://slack.sarava.org/node/16
+
+Obtendo e instalando
+--------------------
+
+O simplaret acompanha o simplepkg e por isso sua instala��o e configura��o � dada no artigo do simplepkg.
+Ele utiliza o mesmo arquivo de configura��o do simplepkg, o /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf e guarda as
+defini��es de reposit�rios em /etc/simplepkg/repos.conf.
+
+Organiza��o do reposit�rio
+--------------------------
+
+O reposit�rio de armazenamento local do simplaret � definido pelo par�metro STORAGE e � organizado
+da seguinte maneira:
+
+  $STORAGE/arch/version/
+
+Pacotes obtidos num reposit�rio que n�o seja oficial da distribui��o ficam em
+
+  $STORAGE/arch/version/repository-name/
+
+Isso quer dizer, por exemplo, que pacotes do slackware 10.2 ficariam em
+
+  $STORAGE/i386/10.2/
+
+e os pacotes obtidos a partir do reposit�rio slamd64 do slack.sarava.org ficaria, por exemplo, em
+
+  $STORAGE/x86_64/10.2/slack.sarava.org/
+
+No arquivo de reposit�rios (/etc/simplepkg/repos.conf), as defini��es de reposit�rio seguem o
+seguinte esquema, semelhante ao formato de configura��o do swaret:
+
+  ROOT-i386="http://slack.sarava.org/slackware/"
+  ROOT-x86_64="http://ftp.heanet.ie/pub/slamd64/"
+  REPOS-i386-10.2="slack.sarava.org%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slackware/slackware-10.2/"
+  REPOS-x86_64-10.2="slack.sarava.org%http://slack.sarava.org/packages/slamd64/slamd64-10.2/"
+
+Reposit�rios definidos como ROOT s�o aqueles que
+
+  - Possuem pacotes da distribui��o oficial ou
+  - Est�o organizados por vers�o, de acordo com os mirror guidelines 
+
+J� os reposit�rios definidos como REPOS s�o aqueles que cont�m pacotes para uma vers�o espec�fica e/ou
+que s�o n�o-oficiais.
+
+Quando o simplaret busca ou obt�m um pacote, a preced�ncia pelos reposit�rios � dada �s defini��es de
+ROOT e em seguinda �s de REPOS. As defini��es REPOS ainda devem possuir, al�m da URL do reposit�rio, um
+nome para identific�-lo, sendo que esses dois campos s�o separados por um delimitador.
+
+Baixando as listas de pacotes
+-----------------------------
+
+Ap�s configur�-lo, � preciso atualizar a lista de pacotes:
+
+  simplaret --update
+
+Isso atualiza a lista de pacotes da arquitetura definida em DEFAULT_ARCH e da vers�o DEFAULT_VERSION
+apenas. Se voc� quiser for�ar a atualiza��o, por exemplo, para a arquitetura x86_64 (slamd64)
+e vers�o 10.2, basta
+
+  ARCH=x86_64 VERSION=10.2 simplaret --update
+
+Buscando pacotes
+----------------
+
+Para buscar um pacote, esses comandos servem de exemplo:
+
+  simplaret --search coreutils
+
+pacote para o Slack/390,
+
+  ARCH=s390 simplaret --search x11
+
+e para slackware 10.1 com pacotes adicionais em i686,
+
+  ARCH=i686 VERSION=10.1 simplaret --search icecast
+
+Baixando um pacote
+------------------
+
+Para baixar um pacote:
+
+  simplaret --get icecast
+
+O simplaret baixa o primeiro pacote na ordem de preced�ncia dos reposit�rios.
+Vers�es futuras dever�o conter uma op��o que force a obten��o do pacote de um
+reposit�rio espec�fico.
+
+Baixando patches
+----------------
+
+Atrav�s do par�metro de configura��o PATCHES_DIR � poss�vel especificar uma pasta
+onde os patches de cada distribui��o ser�o armazenados, organizados tamb�m por arquitetura.
+
+Por exemplo, patches do slackware 10.2 ficar�o sempre em
+
+  $PATCHES_DIR/i386/10.2/
+
+Os patches na verdade s�o baixados atrav�s de um "simplaret --get" e armazenados na subpasta
+de $STORAGE correspondente e apenas um link simb�lico � mantido em $PATCHES_DIR/$ARCH/$VERSION.
+
+Para baixar os patches, use uma chamada do tipo
+
+  ARCH=arquitetura VERSION=versao simplaret --get-patches
+
+E os patches dessa arquitetura e vers�o ser�o baixados.
+
+Apagando pacotes
+----------------
+
+O reposit�rio de pacotes de uma arquitetura e vers�o pode ser apagado com o comando
+
+  simplaret --purge
+
+Mas pra qu� serve isso?
+-----------------------
+
+Voc� pode estar se perguntando: quem utilizaria uma ferramenta que baixa pacotes de v�rias arquiteturas?
+
+O simplaret foi escrito tendo em mente um ambiente *86 onde v�rias jaulas de diferentes arquiteturas est�o
+instaladas. Suponha por exemplo uma m�quina x86_64 que possua as seguintes jaulas:
+
+  - slamd64 11.0
+  - slackware 11.0
+  - slackware 11.0 com pacotes adicionais em i686
+  - ucslack (uClibc para i386) 
+
+O condenado/a em quest�o que roda todas essas jaulas, pelos mais diversos motivos, pode ter uma grande dor
+de cabe�a para manter os pacotes em ordem de forma manual. Com o simplaret e eventualmente com o simplepkg,
+a tarefa se torna trivial.
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/TODO b/branches/0.6/doc/TODO
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9178f6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/TODO
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+simplepkg todo list
+-------------------
+
+TODO list at http://slack.sarava.org/wiki/Main/SimplePKG
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.aux b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.aux
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad47a5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.aux
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+\relax 
+\catcode`"\active
+\ifx\hyper@anchor\@undefined
+\global \let \oldcontentsline\contentsline
+\gdef \contentsline#1#2#3#4{\oldcontentsline{#1}{#2}{#3}}
+\global \let \oldnewlabel\newlabel
+\gdef \newlabel#1#2{\newlabelxx{#1}#2}
+\gdef \newlabelxx#1#2#3#4#5#6{\oldnewlabel{#1}{{#2}{#3}}}
+\AtEndDocument{\let \contentsline\oldcontentsline
+\let \newlabel\oldnewlabel}
+\else
+\global \let \hyper@last\relax 
+\fi
+
+\select@language{brazilian}
+\@writefile{toc}{\select@language{brazilian}}
+\@writefile{lof}{\select@language{brazilian}}
+\@writefile{lot}{\select@language{brazilian}}
+\newlabel{start}{{}{1}{\relax }{}{}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}Descri\c c\~ao}{1}{section.1}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {2}Arquitetura}{2}{section.2}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {3}Instalando o simplepkg}{2}{section.3}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {4}Configurando o simplepkg}{3}{section.4}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {5}Criando jaulas e replicando instala\c c\~oes}{3}{section.5}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {6}Metapacotes}{4}{section.6}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {7}Upgrade de jaulas}{5}{section.7}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {8}Arquiteturas e vers\~oes diferentes}{5}{section.8}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {9}Aplicativo auxiliar: rebuildpkg}{6}{section.9}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {10}Fonte}{6}{section.10}}
+\@writefile{toc}{\contentsline {section}{\numberline {11}P\'agina de desenvolvimento}{6}{section.11}}
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.dvi b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.dvi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2779fbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.dvi
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.html b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85b2b06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.html
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+O <i>simplepkg</i> � um sistema de gerenciamento de pacotes que roda sobre o <i>pkgtool</i> e o <i>swaret</i>. Ele trabalha com templates -- listas com pacotes instalados, scripts e arquivos de configura��o -- permitindo criar perfis de instala��o que podem ser ent�o usados para instalar o sistema numa outra parti��o, criar um chroot espec�fico ou at� trabalhar com o conceito de <i>metapacotes</i>: uma lista de pacotes que pode ser instalada e removida com apenas um comando.
+<!--break-->
+<b>Descri��o</b>
+
+Todas as distribui��es de GNU/Linux j� tem algum sistema de empacotamento amadurecido. A quest�o agora � a praticidade de instalar e controlar o que est� instalado, tanto pacotes como arquivos de configura��o de uma m�quina.
+
+Imagine por exemplo se voc� precisa manter uma lista de pacotes de 200 m�quinas slackware, sendo que algumas s�o usadas como desktop, outras como servidores web, alguma sendo o servidor de email e assim por diante. Imagine agora que voc� perca o disco de algumas dessas m�quinas ou que precise cotidianamente reinstalar ou atualizar um sistema.
+
+Usar o cd de instala��o do slackware e configurar na m�o toda a vez que der um pau faria com que voc� ficasse louco/a e desperdi�asse muito tempo, al�m do que sempre ocorre de esquecermos algum detalhe ou pacote durante a configura��o do sistema. Manter um backup completo de cada m�quina, por outro lado, pode ser muito custoso se o n�mero delas for muito grande.
+
+O simplepkg permite que voc� mantenha um template para cada grupo de m�quinas e com apenas um comando instalar o template numa parti��o. Al�m do template, voc� precisa do <i>swaret</i> configurado para os reposit�rios de pacote que possuem seus aplicativos.
+
+Gerenciar instala��es e metapacotes n�o � tudo o que o simplepkg faz. Ele pode ser usado at� na cria��o de <i>vservers</i>. O simplepkg inclusive � um amadurecimento de id�ias delineadas nos seguintes artigos:
+
+- <a href="/node/3">Rodando o OpenOffice.org em chroot no Slamd64</a>
+- <a href="/node/6">Linux Vservers e seguran�a por contexto</a>
+- <a href="/node/7">Instalando o Slackware sem programa de instala��o</a>
+
+O <i>simplepkg</i> permite que o trampo proposto nos artigos acima seja simplificado a uma meia d�zia de comandos, desde que existam templates prontos.
+
+<b>Arquitetura</b>
+
+O <i>simplepkg</i> � um conjunto de scripts escritos com a filosofia KISS em mente. Ele � um sistema muito simples, composto pelos seguintes comandos:
+
+- mkjail: constr�i uma jaula/instala��o de slackware numa pasta
+- metapkg: instala ou remove um metapacote
+- templatepkg: criar ou adiciona pacotes a um template
+- lspkg: lista pacotes instalados
+- jail-upgrade: faz o upgrade nas jaulas
+- rebuildpkg: reconstr�i um pacote a partir de sua entrada no <i>/var/log/packages</i>
+
+A pasta de configura��o e armazenamento de templates � a <i>/etc/simplepkg</i>. Templates s�o arquivos contendo uma lista de pacotes, um pacote por linha e com a extens�o <i>.template</i>.  Como exemplo, um template poderia se chamar <i>minimo.template</i> e conter a seguinte lista:
+
+
+<pre>
+aaa_base
+aaa_elflibs
+apache
+bash
+bin
+coreutils
+findutils
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;
+Se voc� quiser tamb�m � poss�vel usar um <i>tagfile</i> do slackware como template, sem nem precisar edit�-lo.
+
+<b>Instalando o simplepkg</b>
+
+Para baixar o pacote do simplepkg, v� em http://slack.midiatatica.org/packages/noarch/. Depois de instal�-lo, n�o esque�a de configurar seu <i>swaret</i>:
+
+<pre>
+installpkg swaret-VERSAO-noarch-BUILD.tgz simplepkg-VERSAO-noarch-BUILD.tgz
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+Alternativamente, se voc� j� est� com o swaret instalado, adicione em seu <i>swaret.conf</i> a linha
+
+<pre>
+REPOS_ROOT=SlackMidiataticaNoarch%http://slack.midiatatica.org/packages/noarch
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+e ent�o digite
+
+<pre>
+swaret --update
+swaret --install simplepkg
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;
+<b>Configurando o simplepkg</b>
+
+Como exemplo, vamos criar uma jaula baseada nos pacotes instalados no seu slackware. Edite o arquivo <i>/etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf</i>:
+
+<pre>
+# /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf
+JAIL_ROOT="/vservers" # local onde as jaulas ser�o criadas
+SWARET_PACKS="/var/swaret" # local onde o swaret armazena seus pacotes
+SWARET_CLEAN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes antes da instala��o da jaula
+SWARET_DELETE_DOWN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes ap�s a instala��o
+SWARET_UPDATE="0" # executa um swaret --update antes de iniciar a instala��o da jaula
+SWARET_PURGE_WEEKS="N" # apaga os pacotes do cache mais velhos que N semanas antes de instalar
+PATCHES_DIR="/var/swaret/patches" # local os patches s�o armazenados
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;
+O <i>swaret.conf</i> deve estar bem configurado para que ele seja capaz de baixar e instalar todos os pacotes dos templates. Par�metros como <i>EXCLUDE</i> podem ser um empecilho, e se voc� os remover da sua instala��o tenha muito cuidado ao atualizar o seu sistema via <i>swaret --upgrade</i>.
+
+<b>Criando jaulas e replicando instala��es</b>
+
+<pre>
+templatepkg meu-slackware
+mkjail jaula meu-slackware
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;<br>&nbsp;
+Isso cria o template <i>meu-slackware</i> a partir da sua lista de pacotes em <i>/var/log/packages</i> e cria uma nova �rvore com esses pacotes na pasta <i>/vservers/jaula</i> (dependendo de qual o valor da vari�vel <i>JAIL_ROOT</i> do simplepkg.conf, � claro).
+
+Se voc� quiser que alguns arquivos de configura��o e executar scripts ap�s a instala��o dessa jaula, basta colocarmos na pasta <i>/etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/</i> os arquivos de configura��o (dentro da hierarquia de pastas do sistema, isto �, <i>/etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf</i>) e os script em <i>/etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.s/</i>. O template <i>vserver</i>, que j� vem no mkjail cont�m um exemplo de script.
+
+Voc� pode especificar tamb�m destinos alternativos para sua jaula, atrav�s de um comando do tipo
+
+<pre>
+ROOT=/mnt mkjail hda2 meu-slackware
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+O comando acima faz exatamente o que voc� est� pensando: replica sua instala��o slackware em </i>/mnt/hda2</i>, dispensando totalmente o programa de instala��o do slackware!
+
+Caso nenhum template for especificado, o <i>mkjail</i> utiliza o template <i>/etc/simplepkg/default.template</i>.
+
+Se voc� manter uma jaula em <i>JAIL_ROOT</i> com o mesmo nome que um template, � poss�vel ainda usar o script <i>jail-update</i> para copiar todas as altera��es de arquivos da jaula na pasta de arquivos do seu template (<i>/etc/simplepkg/nome-da-jaula.d</i>). Assim, basta que voc� copie todos os arquivos de configura��o que voc� editou para essa pasta e deixar o <i>jail-update</i> numa crontab para que voc� tenha sempre um template atualizado e baseado nas jaulas / instala��es que voc� tem rodando e que estiverem listadas no arquivo <i>/etc/simplepkg/jailist</i>:
+
+<pre>
+jail-update
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+O <i>jail-update</i> considera que o template <i>main</i>, caso exista, se refere � instala��o principal da sua m�quina, isto �, o sistema de voc� roda. Dessa forma a invoca��o do <i>jail-update</i> atualiza todos os templates cujas jaulas est�o em <i>JAIL_ROOT</i> e ainda atualiza o template da instala��o principal.
+
+Para adicionar ou remover pacotes de um template, basta editar o arquivo de template. Uma outra forma de adicionar arquivos � usando o <i>templatepkg</i> com a op��o <i>-a</i>, que adiciona apenas novos pacotes ao template. Se voc� quiser que o <i>templatepkg</i> crie um template a partir de uma jaula, simplesmente use
+
+<pre>
+templatepkg jaula /vservers/jaula
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+<b>Metapacotes</b>
+
+Outro uso dos templates � a cria��o de pacotes: imagine por exemplo a dificuldade de um usu�rio/a novo de slackware para instalar o cinelerra e todas as suas depend�ncias. Criando um template contendo o nome de todos os pacotes necess�rios para rodar esse software permite que um usu�rio instale-o simplesmente com o comando
+
+<pre>
+metapkg --install cinelerra
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+O comando sugere uma semelhan�a com o uso direto do <i>swaret</i> ou do <i>slapt-get</i>, com a �nica diferen�a residindo no modo como cada um desses programas lida com as depend�ncias de um pacote. Os <i>slapt-get</i> suporta o arquivo <i>slack-required</i>, que pode ou n�o estar presente no pacote. J� o <i>swaret</i> possui uma ferramenta pr�pria para a cria��o de uma lista de depend�ncias.
+
+O <i>simplepkg</i> n�o pretende substituir esses dois modos de checagem e sim propor uma alternativa de distribui��o de pacotes em que as depend�ncias s�o resolvidas sem precisar de um reposit�rio de depend�ncias ou uma modifica��o no pr�prio pacote, que � o caso do <i>slack-required</i>, um arquivo que na maioria das vezes n�o est� presente.
+
+A remo��o de um aplicativo e todas as suas depend�ncias podem ser feitas simplesmente com o comando
+
+<pre>
+metapkg --remove cinelerra
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+<b>Upgrade de jaulas</b>
+
+O upgrade de jaulas que estejam em <i>JAIL_ROOT</i> pode ser efetuado com o comando <i>jail-upgrade</i>. Simplesmente coloque os patches em <i>PATCHES_DIR</i> e d� o comando
+
+<pre>
+jail-upgrade
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+Se voc� quiser atualizar apenas uma das jaulas que est�o em <i>JAIL_ROOT</i>, use
+
+<pre>
+jail-upgrade nome-da-jaula
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+Para especificar uma pasta contendo patches diferente de <i>PATCHES_DIR</i> (�til quando voc� possui jaulas com diferentes vers�es do slackware), simplesmente use
+
+<pre>
+PATCHES=/local/dos/patches jail-upgrade nome-da-jaula
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+De modo an�logo ao <i>mkjail</i>, � poss�vel indicar ao <i>jail-upgrade</i> uma outra pasta onde a jaula est� armazenada:
+
+<pre>
+ROOT=/otherroot jail-upgrade
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+<b>Aplicativo auxiliar: rebuildpkg</b>
+
+O simplepkg acompanha ainda um aplicativo auxiliar que ajuda a recuperar pacotes instalados cujo tgz original foi perdido. O comando <i>rebuildpkg</i> reconstr�i um pacote a partir de uma entrada no <i>/var/log/packages</i>. O comando
+
+<pre>
+rebuildpkg coreutils
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+reconstr�i um pacote do coreutils usando os arquivos e as metainforma��es listadas no arquivo do <i>/var/log/packages/</i> correspondente ao coreutils.
+
+<b>Fonte</b>
+
+Se voc� quiser obter diretamente o c�digo-fonte do <i>simplepkg</i>, baixe-o do reposit�rio:
+
+<pre>
+svn checkout svn://slack.midiatatica.org:40/simplepkg
+</pre>
+
+<br>&nbsp;
+<b>P�gina de desenvolvimento</b>
+
+A p�gina de desenvolvimento do <i>simplepkg</i> fica <a href="http://slack.midiatatica.org/wiki/Main/SimplePKG">aqui</a>.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.log b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.log
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c6a55ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.log
@@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
+This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2C 7.4.5) (format=latex 2005.1.14)  10 FEB 2006 12:19
+**simplepkg.tex
+(./simplepkg.tex
+LaTeX2e <2001/06/01>
+Babel <v3.7h> and hyphenation patterns for american, french, german, ngerman, n
+ohyphenation, loaded.
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/article.cls
+Document Class: article 2001/04/21 v1.4e Standard LaTeX document class
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/size10.clo
+File: size10.clo 2001/04/21 v1.4e Standard LaTeX file (size option)
+)
+\c@part=\count79
+\c@section=\count80
+\c@subsection=\count81
+\c@subsubsection=\count82
+\c@paragraph=\count83
+\c@subparagraph=\count84
+\c@figure=\count85
+\c@table=\count86
+\abovecaptionskip=\skip41
+\belowcaptionskip=\skip42
+\bibindent=\dimen102
+)
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty
+Package: babel 2001/03/01 v3.7h The Babel package
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf
+Language: portuges 2001/02/16 v1.2o Portuguese support from the babel system
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/generic/babel/babel.def
+File: babel.def 2001/03/01 v3.7h Babel common definitions
+\babel@savecnt=\count87
+\U@D=\dimen103
+)
+
+Package babel Warning: No hyphenation patterns were loaded for
+(babel)                the language `Portuguese'
+(babel)                I will use the patterns loaded for \language=0 instead.
+
+\l@portuges = a dialect from \language0
+\l@brazilian = a dialect from \language\l@portuges 
+Package babel Info: Making " an active character on input line 126.
+)) (/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/inputenc.sty
+Package: inputenc 2001/07/10 v0.99a Input encoding file 
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/latin1.def
+File: latin1.def 2001/07/10 v0.99a Input encoding file 
+))
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/graphics/graphics.sty
+Package: graphics 2001/07/07 v1.0n Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR)
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/graphics/trig.sty
+Package: trig 1999/03/16 v1.09 sin cos tan (DPC)
+)
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/config/graphics.cfg
+File: graphics.cfg 2001/08/31 v1.1 graphics configuration of teTeX/TeXLive
+)
+Package graphics Info: Driver file: dvips.def on input line 80.
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/graphics/dvips.def
+File: dvips.def 1999/02/16 v3.0i Driver-dependant file (DPC,SPQR)
+))
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/hyperref/hyperref.sty
+Package: hyperref 2003/01/22 v6.73n Hypertext links for LaTeX
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/graphics/keyval.sty
+Package: keyval 1999/03/16 v1.13 key=value parser (DPC)
+\KV@toks@=\toks14
+)
+\@linkdim=\dimen104
+\Hy@linkcounter=\count88
+\Hy@pagecounter=\count89
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/hyperref/pd1enc.def
+File: pd1enc.def 2003/01/22 v6.73n Hyperref: PDFDocEncoding definition (HO)
+)
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/config/hyperref.cfg
+File: hyperref.cfg 2002/06/06 v1.2 hyperref configuration of TeXLive and teTeX
+)
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper figures OFF on input line 1792.
+Package hyperref Info: Link nesting OFF on input line 1797.
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper index ON on input line 1800.
+Package hyperref Info: Plain pages ON on input line 1805.
+Package hyperref Info: Backreferencing OFF on input line 1812.
+
+Implicit mode ON; LaTeX internals redefined
+Package hyperref Info: Bookmarks ON on input line 1916.
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/html/url.sty
+Package: url 1999/03/02  ver 1.4  Verb mode for urls, email addresses, and file
+ names
+)
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \url on input line 2055.
+\Fld@menulength=\count90
+\Field@Width=\dimen105
+\Fld@charsize=\dimen106
+\Choice@toks=\toks15
+\Field@toks=\toks16
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper figures OFF on input line 2513.
+Package hyperref Info: Link nesting OFF on input line 2518.
+Package hyperref Info: Hyper index ON on input line 2521.
+Package hyperref Info: backreferencing OFF on input line 2528.
+Package hyperref Info: Link coloring OFF on input line 2533.
+\c@Item=\count91
+\c@Hfootnote=\count92
+)
+*hyperref using default driver hdvips*
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/hyperref/hdvips.def
+File: hdvips.def 2003/01/22 v6.73n Hyperref driver for dvips
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/hyperref/pdfmark.def
+File: pdfmark.def 2003/01/22 v6.73n Hyperref definitions for pdfmark specials
+\pdf@docset=\toks17
+\pdf@box=\box26
+\pdf@toks=\toks18
+\pdf@defaulttoks=\toks19
+\Fld@listcount=\count93
+\@outlinefile=\write3
+)) (./simplepkg.aux)
+\openout1 = `simplepkg.aux'.
+
+LaTeX Font Info:    Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    ... okay on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    ... okay on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    ... okay on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    ... okay on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    ... okay on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    ... okay on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    Checking defaults for PD1/pdf/m/n on input line 11.
+LaTeX Font Info:    ... okay on input line 11.
+Package hyperref Info: Link coloring OFF on input line 11.
+
+(/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/hyperref/nameref.sty
+Package: nameref 2001/01/27 v2.19 Cross-referencing by name of section
+\c@section@level=\count94
+)
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \ref on input line 11.
+LaTeX Info: Redefining \pageref on input line 11.
+ (./simplepkg.out)
+(./simplepkg.out)
+\openout3 = `simplepkg.out'.
+
+LaTeX Font Info:    External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font)              <12> on input line 13.
+LaTeX Font Info:    External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font)              <8> on input line 13.
+LaTeX Font Info:    External font `cmex10' loaded for size
+(Font)              <6> on input line 13.
+LaTeX Font Info:    Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 31.
+ (/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/omscmr.fd
+File: omscmr.fd 1999/05/25 v2.5h Standard LaTeX font definitions
+)
+LaTeX Font Info:    Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available
+(Font)              Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 31.
+ [1
+
+]
+Overfull \hbox (15.53741pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 48--49
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 rebuildpkg: re-con-str^^Soi um pa-cote a par-tir de sua en-tr
+ada no \OT1/cmr/m/it/10 /var/log/packages 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (40.63974pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 68--69
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Para baixar o pa-cote do sim-plepkg, v^^Sa em http://slack.midi
+atatica.org/packages/noarch/.
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (64.49643pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 78--78
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 REPOS_ROOT=SlackMidiataticaNoarch%http://slack.midiatatica.o
+rg/packages/noarch[] 
+ []
+
+[2]
+Overfull \hbox (122.24593pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 101--101
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 SIMPLARET="simplaret" # programa que baixa os pacotes (pode 
+ser o swaret se voce o tiver)[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (11.99689pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 101--101
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 STORAGE="/var/simplaret" # local onde o swaret armazena seus
+ pacotes[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (48.74657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 101--101
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 SIMPLARET_CLEAN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes antes da inst
+ala^^Xc~ao da jaula[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (22.4968pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 101--101
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes ap^^Sos
+ a instala^^Xc~ao[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (132.74583pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 101--101
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 SIMPLARET_UPDATE="0" # atualiza as listas de pacotes antes d
+e iniciar a instala^^Xc~ao da jaula[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (116.99597pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 101--101
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS="N" # apaga os pacotes mais velhos que
+ N semanas antes de instalar[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (27.74675pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 101--101
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 PATCHES_DIR="/var/simplaret/patches" # local os patches s~ao
+ armazenados[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (77.7997pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 103--104
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Para definir quais reposit^^Sorios de pa-cotes voc^e usar^^Sa
+, edite o ar-quivo \OT1/cmr/m/it/10 /etc/simplepkg/repos.conf\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (64.49643pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 110--110
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 REPOS-i386="slack-midiatatica%http://slack.midiatatica.org/p
+ackages/slackware"[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (90.7462pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 110--110
+[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 REPOS-x86_64-10.2="slamd-midiatatica%http://slack.midiatatic
+a.org/packages/slamd64"[] 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (16.50899pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 123--124
+\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 /var/log/packages \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 e cria uma nova ^^Sarvore co
+m esses pa-cotes na pasta \OT1/cmr/m/it/10 /vservers/jaula
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (12.48833pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 125--126
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 in-stala^^Xc~ao dessa jaula, basta colo-car-mos na pasta \OT1/c
+mr/m/it/10 /etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (54.39502pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 125--126
+\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 /etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf\OT1/cmr/m
+/n/10 ) e os script em \OT1/cmr/m/it/10 /etc/simplepkg/meu-
+ []
+
+[3]
+Overfull \hbox (97.57161pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 135--136
+[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Caso nen-hum tem-plate for es-peci-fi-cado, o \OT1/cmr/m/it/1
+0 mk-jail \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 uti-liza o tem-plate \OT1/cmr/m/it/10 /etc/simplepkg/
+default.template\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . 
+ []
+
+[4] [5]
+Overfull \hbox (13.77249pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 231--232
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Se voc^e quiser obter di-re-ta-mente o c^^Sodigo-fonte do \OT1/
+cmr/m/it/10 sim-plepkg\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , baixe-o do reposit^^Sorio: 
+ []
+
+
+Overfull \hbox (17.25352pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 239--240
+\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A p^^Sagina do \OT1/cmr/m/it/10 sim-plepkg \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 fica
+ em [][][][]. 
+ []
+
+[6] (./simplepkg.aux) ) 
+Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
+ 2420 strings out of 95847
+ 32073 string characters out of 1195948
+ 90698 words of memory out of 1000001
+ 5358 multiletter control sequences out of 10000+50000
+ 8746 words of font info for 31 fonts, out of 500000 for 1000
+ 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 1000
+ 25i,6n,36p,605b,344s stack positions out of 1500i,500n,5000p,200000b,5000s
+
+Output written on simplepkg.dvi (6 pages, 25288 bytes).
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.out b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.out
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4839e4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.out
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.1}{Descri\347\343o}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.2}{Arquitetura}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.3}{Instalando o simplepkg}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.4}{Configurando o simplepkg}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.5}{Criando jaulas e replicando instala\347\365es}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.6}{Metapacotes}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.7}{Upgrade de jaulas}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.8}{Arquiteturas e vers\365es diferentes}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.9}{Aplicativo auxiliar: rebuildpkg}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.10}{Fonte}{}
+\BOOKMARK [1][-]{section.11}{P\341gina de desenvolvimento}{}
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.pdf b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9895ebb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.pdf
diff --git a/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.tex b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c98e54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/doc/simplepkg.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[brazilian]{babel}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[dvips]{graphics}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\newcommand\link{\hyperlink}
+
+\title{Gerenciamento de instala��es e metapacotes com o simplepkg}
+\author{Silvio Rhatto}
+
+\begin{document}\label{start}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+O \emph{simplepkg} � um sistema de gerenciamento de pacotes que roda sobre o \emph{pkgtool}. Ele trabalha com templates -- listas com pacotes instalados, scripts e arquivos de configura��o -- permitindo criar perfis de instala��o que podem ser ent�o usados para instalar o sistema numa outra parti��o, criar um chroot espec�fico ou at� trabalhar com o conceito de \emph{metapacotes}: uma lista de pacotes que pode ser instalada e removida com apenas um comando.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Descri��o}
+
+Todas as distribui��es de GNU/Linux j� tem algum sistema de empacotamento amadurecido. A quest�o agora � a praticidade de instalar e controlar o que est� instalado, tanto pacotes como arquivos de configura��o de uma m�quina.
+
+Imagine por exemplo se voc� precisa manter uma lista de pacotes de 200 m�quinas slackware, sendo que algumas s�o usadas como desktop, outras como servidores web, alguma sendo o servidor de email e assim por diante. Imagine agora que voc� perca o disco de algumas dessas m�quinas ou que precise cotidianamente reinstalar ou atualizar um sistema.
+
+Usar o cd de instala��o do slackware e configurar na m�o toda a vez que der um pau faria com que voc� ficasse louco/a e desperdi�asse muito tempo, al�m do que sempre ocorre de esquecermos algum detalhe ou pacote durante a configura��o do sistema. Manter um backup completo de cada m�quina, por outro lado, pode ser muito custoso se o n�mero delas for muito grande.
+
+O simplepkg permite que voc� mantenha um template para cada grupo de m�quinas e com apenas um comando instalar o template numa parti��o. Al�m do template, voc� precisa do \emph{swaret} configurado para os reposit�rios de pacote que possuem seus aplicativos.
+
+Gerenciar instala��es e metapacotes n�o � tudo o que o simplepkg faz. Ele pode ser usado at� na cria��o de \emph{vservers}. O simplepkg inclusive � um amadurecimento de id�ias delineadas nos seguintes artigos:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item \link{/node/3}{Rodando o OpenOffice.org em chroot no Slamd64}
+  \item \link{/node/6}{Criando Vservers em Slackware}
+  \item \link{/node/7}{Instalando o Slackware sem programa de instala��o}
+\end{itemize}
+
+O \emph{simplepkg} permite que o trampo proposto nos artigos acima seja simplificado a uma meia d�zia de comandos, desde que existam templates prontos.
+
+\section{Arquitetura}
+
+O \emph{simplepkg} � um conjunto de scripts escritos com a filosofia KISS em mente. Ele � um sistema muito simples, composto pelos seguintes comandos:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+  \item mkjail: constr�i uma jaula/instala��o de slackware numa pasta
+  \item metapkg: instala ou remove um metapacote
+  \item templatepkg: criar ou adiciona pacotes a um template
+  \item lspkg: lista pacotes instalados
+  \item jail-upgrade: faz o upgrade nas jaulas
+  \item rebuildpkg: reconstr�i um pacote a partir de sua entrada no \emph{/var/log/packages}
+  \item simplaret: obt�m pacotes de reposit�rios locais ou remotos
+\end{itemize}
+
+A pasta de configura��o e armazenamento de templates � a \emph{/etc/simplepkg}. Templates s�o arquivos contendo uma lista de pacotes, um pacote por linha e com a extens�o \emph{.template}.  Como exemplo, um template poderia se chamar \emph{minimo.template} e conter a seguinte lista:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+aaa_base
+aaa_elflibs
+apache
+bash
+bin
+coreutils
+findutils
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Se voc� quiser tamb�m � poss�vel usar um \emph{tagfile} do slackware como template, sem nem precisar edit�-lo.
+
+\section{Instalando o simplepkg}
+
+Para baixar o pacote do simplepkg, v� em http://slack.midiatatica.org/packages/noarch/. Depois de instal�-lo.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+installpkg simplepkg-VERSAO-noarch-BUILD.tgz
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Alternativamente, se voc� usa o swaret, adicione em seu \emph{swaret.conf} a linha
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+REPOS_ROOT=SlackMidiataticaNoarch%http://slack.midiatatica.org/packages/noarch
+\end{verbatim}
+
+e ent�o digite
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+swaret --update
+swaret --install simplepkg
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Configurando o simplepkg}
+
+Como exemplo, vamos criar uma jaula baseada nos pacotes instalados no seu slackware. Edite o arquivo \emph{/etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf}:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+# /etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf
+JAIL_ROOT="/vservers" # local onde as jaulas ser�o criadas
+SIMPLARET="simplaret" # programa que baixa os pacotes (pode ser o swaret se voce o tiver)
+STORAGE="/var/simplaret" # local onde o swaret armazena seus pacotes
+SIMPLARET_CLEAN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes antes da instala��o da jaula
+SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN="1" # apaga o cache de pacotes ap�s a instala��o
+SIMPLARET_UPDATE="0" # atualiza as listas de pacotes antes de iniciar a instala��o da jaula
+SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS="N" # apaga os pacotes mais velhos que N semanas antes de instalar
+PATCHES_DIR="/var/simplaret/patches" # local os patches s�o armazenados
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Para definir quais reposit�rios de pacotes voc� usar�, edite o arquivo \emph{/etc/simplepkg/repos.conf}, colocando algo como
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ROOT-i386="http://slack.midiatatica.org/packages/slackware"
+REPOS-i386="slack-midiatatica%http://slack.midiatatica.org/packages/slackware"
+ROOT-x86_64-10.2="http://darkstar.ist.utl.pt/pub/slamd64/"
+REPOS-x86_64-10.2="slamd-midiatatica%http://slack.midiatatica.org/packages/slamd64"
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Se voc� quer utilizar o swaret em lugar do simplaret, o swaret.conf deve estar bem configurado para que ele seja capaz de baixar e instalar todos os pacotes dos templates. Par�metros como \emph{EXCLUDE} podem ser um empecilho, e se voc� os remover da sua instala��o tenha muito cuidado ao atualizar o seu sistema via \emph{swaret --upgrade}. A desvantagem de usar o swaret � que voc� n�o ter� como administrar jaulas e instala��es de m�ltiplas arquiteturas.
+
+Para informa��es detalhadas sobre o simplaret, consulte seu \link{/node/16}{artigo espec�fico}.
+
+\section{Criando jaulas e replicando instala��es}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+templatepkg meu-slackware
+mkjail jaula meu-slackware
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Isso cria o template \emph{meu-slackware} a partir da sua lista de pacotes em \emph{/var/log/packages} e cria uma nova �rvore com esses pacotes na pasta \emph{/vservers/jaula} (dependendo de qual o valor da vari�vel \emph{JAIL\_ROOT} do simplepkg.conf, � claro).
+
+Se voc� quiser que alguns arquivos de configura��o e executar scripts ap�s a instala��o dessa jaula, basta colocarmos na pasta \emph{/etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/} os arquivos de configura��o (dentro da hierarquia de pastas do sistema, isto �, \emph{/etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf}) e os script em \emph{/etc/simplepkg/meu-slackware.s}. O template \emph{vserver}, que j� vem no mkjail, cont�m um exemplo de script.
+
+Voc� pode especificar tamb�m destinos alternativos para sua jaula, atrav�s de um comando do tipo
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ROOT=/mnt mkjail hda2 meu-slackware
+\end{verbatim}
+
+O comando acima faz exatamente o que voc� est� pensando: replica sua instala��o slackware em \emph{/mnt/hda2}, dispensando totalmente o programa de instala��o do slackware!
+
+Caso nenhum template for especificado, o \emph{mkjail} utiliza o template \emph{/etc/simplepkg/default.template}.
+
+Se voc� manter uma jaula em \emph{JAIL\_ROOT} com o mesmo nome que um template, � poss�vel ainda usar o script \emph{jail-update} para copiar todas as altera��es de arquivos da jaula na pasta de arquivos do seu template (\emph{/etc/simplepkg/nome-da-jaula.d}). Assim, basta que voc� copie todos os arquivos de configura��o que voc� editou para essa pasta e deixar o \emph{jail-update} numa crontab para que voc� tenha sempre um template atualizado e baseado nas jaulas / instala��es que voc� tem rodando e que estiverem listadas no arquivo \emph{/etc/simplepkg/jailist}:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+jail-update
+\end{verbatim}
+
+O \emph{jail-update} considera que o template \emph{main}, caso exista, se refere � instala��o principal da sua m�quina, isto �, o sistema de voc� roda. Dessa forma a invoca��o do \emph{jail-update} atualiza todos os templates cujas jaulas est�o em \emph{JAIL\_ROOT} e ainda atualiza o template da instala��o principal.
+
+Para adicionar ou remover pacotes de um template, basta editar o arquivo de template. Uma outra forma de adicionar arquivos � usando o \emph{templatepkg} com a op��o \emph{-a}, que adiciona apenas novos pacotes ao template. Se voc� quiser que o \emph{templatepkg} crie um template a partir de uma jaula, simplesmente use
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+templatepkg jaula /vservers/jaula
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Metapacotes}
+
+Outro uso dos templates � a cria��o de pacotes: imagine por exemplo a dificuldade de um usu�rio/a novo de slackware para instalar o cinelerra e todas as suas depend�ncias. Criando um template contendo o nome de todos os pacotes necess�rios para rodar esse software permite que um usu�rio instale-o simplesmente com o comando
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+metapkg --install cinelerra
+\end{verbatim}
+
+O comando sugere uma semelhan�a com o uso direto do \emph{swaret} ou do \emph{slapt-get}, com a �nica diferen�a residindo no modo como cada um desses programas lida com as depend�ncias de um pacote. Os \emph{slapt-get} suporta o arquivo \emph{slack-required}, que pode ou n�o estar presente no pacote. J� o \emph{swaret} possui uma ferramenta pr�pria para a cria��o de uma lista de depend�ncias.
+
+O \emph{simplepkg} n�o pretende substituir esses dois modos de checagem e sim propor uma alternativa de distribui��o de pacotes em que as depend�ncias s�o resolvidas sem precisar de um reposit�rio de depend�ncias ou uma modifica��o no pr�prio pacote, que � o caso do \emph{slack-required}, um arquivo que na maioria das vezes n�o est� presente.
+
+A remo��o de um aplicativo e todas as suas depend�ncias podem ser feitas simplesmente com o comando
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+metapkg --remove cinelerra
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Upgrade de jaulas}
+
+O upgrade de jaulas que estejam em \emph{JAIL\_ROOT} pode ser efetuado com o comando \emph{jail-upgrade}. Simplesmente coloque os patches em \emph{PATCHES\_DIR} e d� o comando
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+jail-upgrade
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Se voc� quiser atualizar apenas uma das jaulas que est�o em \emph{JAIL\_ROOT}, use
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+jail-upgrade nome-da-jaula
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Para especificar uma pasta contendo patches diferente de \emph{PATCHES\_DIR} (�til quando voc� possui jaulas com diferentes vers�es do slackware), simplesmente use
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+PATCHES=/local/dos/patches jail-upgrade nome-da-jaula
+\end{verbatim}
+
+De modo an�logo ao \emph{mkjail}, � poss�vel indicar ao \emph{jail-upgrade} uma outra pasta onde a jaula est� armazenada:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ROOT=/otherroot jail-upgrade
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{Arquiteturas e vers�es diferentes}
+
+O \emph{simplepkg} foi idealizado para permitir que um mesmo template possa ser usado para criar jaulas de arquiteturas e vers�es diferentes de sistemas padr�o slackware. A atualiza��o desses sistemas tamb�m � unificada. Essa possibilidade s� � permitida se voc� usa o simplaret e n�o o swaret como ferramenta de obten��o de pacotes.
+
+Por exemplo, para criar uma instala��o de slackware 10.1 (assumindo que suas defini��es de reposit�rios do \emph{/etc/simplepkg/repos.conf} contenham locais com slack 10.1), basta usar o comando
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+VERSION=10.1 mkjail minha-jaula template-servidor
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Arquiteturas diferentes tamb�m podem ser usadas. Se voc� est� num sistema \emph{x86\_64} e quer instalar um slack 10.2 numa parti��o, experimente
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ARCH=i386 VERSION=10.2 ROOT=/mnt mkjail hda2 meu-slackware
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note que os templates independem de arquitetura e vers�o, j� que eles s� cont�m nomes de pacotes,
+arquivos de configura��o e scripts. Por isso, o \emph{templatepkg}, o \emph{metapkg}, o \emph{lspkg} e o \emph{jail-update} funcionam normalmente.
+
+Para atualizar suas jaulas, o \emph{jail-upgrade} checa antes qual a vers�o e arquitetura de cada uma
+de suas jaulas atrav�s do \emph{/etc/slackware-version} correspondente e a partir disso aplica os patches da arquitetura e vers�o da mesma, usando para isso o simplaret (veja a \link{node/16}{documenta��o pr�pria}).
+
+Desse modo, mesmo que voc� tenha jaulas de vers�es e arquiteturas diversas, usar o comando \emph{jail-upgrade} faz a atualiza��o sem problemas, desde que seus patches estejam organizados por arquitetura e vers�o, conforme � detalhado na \link{/node/16}{documenta��o do simplaret}.
+
+\section{Aplicativo auxiliar: rebuildpkg}
+
+O simplepkg acompanha ainda um aplicativo auxiliar que ajuda a recuperar pacotes instalados cujo \emph{.tgz} original foi perdido. O comando \emph{rebuildpkg} reconstr�i um pacote a partir de uma entrada no \emph{/var/log/packages}. O comando
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+rebuildpkg coreutils
+\end{verbatim}
+
+reconstr�i um pacote do coreutils usando os arquivos e as metainforma��es listadas no arquivo do \emph{/var/log/packages/} correspondente ao coreutils.
+
+\section{Fonte}
+
+Se voc� quiser obter diretamente o c�digo-fonte do \emph{simplepkg}, baixe-o do reposit�rio:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+svn checkout svn://slack.midiatatica.org:40/simplepkg
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\section{P�gina de desenvolvimento}
+
+A p�gina do \emph{simplepkg} fica em \link{http://slack.midiatatica.org/wiki/Main/SimplePKG}{http://slack.midiatatica.org/wiki/Main/SimplePKG}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/branches/0.6/install/doinst.sh b/branches/0.6/install/doinst.sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a61648e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/install/doinst.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+( if [ ! -f "etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf" ]; then mv etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf.new etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf; fi )
+( if [ ! -f "etc/simplepkg/repos.conf" ]; then mv etc/simplepkg/repos.conf.new etc/simplepkg/repos.conf; fi )
+( if [ ! -f "etc/simplepkg/generic.mkslackbuild" ]; then mv etc/simplepkg/generic.mkSlackBuild.new etc/simplepkg/generic.mkSlackBuild; fi )
diff --git a/branches/0.6/install/slack-desc b/branches/0.6/install/slack-desc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..586d7b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/install/slack-desc
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+# HOW TO EDIT THIS FILE:
+# The "handy ruler" below makes it easier to edit a package description.  Line
+# up the first '|' above the ':' following the base package name, and the '|'
+# on the right side marks the last column you can put a character in.  You must
+# make exactly 11 lines for the formatting to be correct.  It's also
+# customary to leave one space after the ':'.
+
+         |-----handy-ruler-------------------------------------------------------|
+simplepkg: simplepkg (slackware management system)
+simplepkg:
+simplepkg: simplepkg is a very small set of scripts intended to help slackware
+simplepkg: users and developers, like the createpkg packagement tool, simplaret
+simplepkg: package retrieval, mkjail chroot installer and templatepkg template
+simplepkg: management system.
+simplepkg: 
+simplepkg:
+simplepkg:
+simplepkg:
+simplepkg:
diff --git a/branches/0.6/lib/common.sh b/branches/0.6/lib/common.sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c53a09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/lib/common.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,713 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# common.sh: common functions for simplepkg
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | gpl
+#
+# Uses some functions from pkgtools, which license is:
+#
+# Copyright 1999  Patrick Volkerding, Moorhead, Minnesota, USA 
+# Copyright 2001, 2002, 2003  Slackware Linux, Inc., Concord, California, USA
+# All rights reserved.
+#
+# Redistribution and use of this script, with or without modification, is
+# permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+#
+# 1. Redistributions of this script must retain the above copyright
+#    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+#
+#  THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
+#  WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+#  MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO
+#  EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
+#  SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+#  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
+#  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+#  WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
+#  OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
+#  ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+#
+
+BASE_CONF="/etc/simplepkg"
+CONF="$BASE_CONF/simplepkg.conf"
+JAIL_LIST="$BASE_CONF/jailist"
+SIMPLARET="simplaret"
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#               pkgtool functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function package_name {
+
+  STRING=`basename $1 .tgz`
+  # Check for old style package name with one segment:
+  if [ "`echo $STRING | cut -f 1 -d -`" = "`echo $STRING | cut -f 2 -d -`" ]; then
+    echo $STRING
+  else # has more than one dash delimited segment
+    # Count number of segments:
+    INDEX=1
+    while [ ! "`echo $STRING | cut -f $INDEX -d -`" = "" ]; do
+      INDEX=`expr $INDEX + 1`
+    done
+    INDEX=`expr $INDEX - 1` # don't include the null value
+    # If we don't have four segments, return the old-style (or out of spec) package name:
+    if [ "$INDEX" = "2" -o "$INDEX" = "3" ]; then
+      echo $STRING
+    else # we have four or more segments, so we'll consider this a new-style name:
+      NAME=`expr $INDEX - 3`
+      NAME="`echo $STRING | cut -f 1-$NAME -d -`"
+      echo $NAME
+    fi
+  fi
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#             package info functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function package_version {
+
+  # get VERSION from a package name
+  local file pack version
+  file="`basename $1`"
+  pack="`package_name $1`"
+  version="`echo $file | sed -e "s/^$pack-//" | cut -d "-" -f 1`"
+  echo $version
+
+}
+
+function package_arch {
+
+  # get ARCH from a package name
+  local file pack arch
+  file="`basename $1`"
+  pack="`package_name $1`"
+  arch="`echo $file | sed -e "s/^$pack-//" | cut -d "-" -f 2`"
+  echo $arch
+
+}
+
+function package_build {
+
+  # get BUILD from a package name
+  local file pack build
+  file="`basename $1 .tgz`"
+  pack="`package_name $1`"
+  build="`echo $file | sed -e "s/^$pack-//" | cut -d "-" -f 3`"
+  echo $build
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#       package administrative functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function install_packages {
+
+  local check installed unable_to_install root
+
+  # check if is time to clean the local repository
+  if [ "$SIMPLARET_CLEAN"  == "1" ]; then
+    ARCH=$ARCH VERSION=$VERSION $SIMPLARET --purge
+  elif [ ! -z "$SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS" ] && [ "$SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS" != "0" ]; then
+    ARCH=$ARCH VERSION=$VERSION $SIMPLARET --purge -w $SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS
+  fi
+
+  root="$JAIL_ROOT/$server"
+
+  # now tries to install each package listed in the template
+  for pack in `cat $TEMPLATE | grep -v -e "^#" | cut -d : -f 1 | awk '{ print $1 }'`; do
+
+    # try to install the package
+    ROOT=/$root ARCH=$ARCH VERSION=$VERSION $SIMPLARET --install $pack --skip-checks
+
+    # check if the package was installed
+    pack="`echo $pack | sed -e 's/\+/\\\+/'`"
+    installed=`eval "ls /$root/var/log/packages/ | egrep -E '^$pack-[^-]+-[^-]+-[^-]+$'"`
+    check=$?
+
+    if [ ! -z "$installed" ] && [ "$check" == "0" ]; then
+      # the package is installed
+      if [ ! -z "$SIMPLARET_DELETE_DURING" ] && [ "$SIMPLARET_DELETE_DURING" != "0" ]; then
+        SILENT=1 ARCH=$ARCH VERSION=$VERSION $SIMPLARET --purge
+      fi
+    else
+      unable_to_install="$unable_to_install\n\t$pack"
+    fi
+
+  done
+
+  # purge packages, if needed
+  if [ "$SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN" == "1" ]; then
+    ARCH=$ARCH VERSION=$VERSION $SIMPLARET --purge
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -z "$unable_to_install" ]; then
+    echo "mkjail was unable to install the following packages on $root:"
+    echo -e "$unable_to_install"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function remove_packages {
+
+  for pack in `cat $TEMPLATE | grep -v -e "^#" | cut -d : -f 1`; do
+    ROOT=/$JAIL_ROOT/$server removepkg $pack
+  done
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#             config file functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function eval_parameter {
+
+  # usage: eval $1 parameter from $CONF
+  # return the evaluated parameter if available or $2 $3 ... $n
+
+  if grep -qe "^$1=" $CONF; then
+    grep -e "^$1=" $CONF | cut -d = -f 2 | sed -e 's/"//g' -e "s/'//g" | sed -e 's/ *#.*$//'
+  else
+    shift
+    echo $*
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function eval_boolean_parameter {
+
+  # get a boolean parameter from the configuration
+
+  local value
+
+  # get the value
+  value="`eval_parameter $1 $2`"
+
+  # force case insensitiveness
+  value="`echo $value | tr '[:upper:]' '[:lower:]'`"
+
+  # convert it to wheter 0 or 1
+  if [ "$value" == "yes" ] || [ "$value" == "1" ]; then
+    echo 1
+  else
+    echo 0
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function eval_config {
+
+  # simplepkg config file evaluation
+  # usage: eval_config <program-name> [-u]
+
+  if [ -f "$CONF" ]; then
+
+    DEFAULT_ARCH="`eval_parameter DEFAULT_ARCH $(default_arch)`"
+    DEFAULT_VERSION="`eval_parameter DEFAULT_VERSION $(default_version)`"
+
+    STORAGE="`eval_parameter STORAGE /var/simplaret/packages`"
+    JAIL_ROOT="`eval_parameter JAIL_ROOT /vservers`"
+    PATCHES_DIR="`eval_parameter PATCHES_DIR /var/simplaret/patches`"
+    ROOT_PRIORITY="`eval_parameter ROOT_PRIORITY patches slackware extra testing pasture`"
+    REPOS_PRIORITY="`eval_parameter REPOS_PRIORITY patches slackware extra testing pasture`"
+    SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS="`eval_parameter SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS 0`"
+    FTP_TOOL="`eval_parameter FTP_TOOL curl`"
+    HTTP_TOOL="`eval_parameter HTTP_TOOL curl`"
+    CONNECT_TIMEOUT="`eval_parameter CONNECT_TIMEOUT 0`"
+    TEMPLATE_FOLDER="`eval_parameter TEMPLATE_BASE /etc/simplepkg/templates`"
+    TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE="`eval_parameter TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE own-folder`"
+
+    SIMPLARET_CLEAN="`eval_boolean_parameter SIMPLARET_CLEAN 1`"
+    SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN="`eval_boolean_parameter SIMPLARET_DELETE_DOWN 1`"
+    SIMPLARET_UPDATE="`eval_boolean_parameter SIMPLARET_UPDATE 0`"
+    SIMPLARET_DELETE_DURING="`eval_boolean_parameter SIMPLARET_DELETE_DURING 0`"
+    SIMPLARET_PURGE_PATCHES="`eval_boolean_parameter SIMPLARET_PURGE_PATCHES 0`"
+    SIMPLARET_DOWNLOAD_FROM_NEXT_REPO="`eval_boolean_parameter SIMPLARET_DOWNLOAD_FROM_NEXT_REPO 1`"
+    PASSIVE_FTP="`eval_boolean_parameter PASSIVE_FTP 0`"
+    WARNING="`eval_boolean_parameter WARNING 0`"
+    SIGNATURE_CHECKING="`eval_boolean_parameter SIGNATURE_CHECKING 0`"
+    DEPENDENCY_CHECKING="`eval_boolean_parameter DEPENDENCY_CHECKING 1`"
+    TEMPLATES_UNDER_SVN="`eval_boolean_parameter TEMPLATES_UNDER_SVN 0`"
+    ADD_TO_JAIL_LIST="`eval_boolean_parameter ADD_TO_JAIL_LIST 1`"
+
+    # Enabling this option (i.e, setting to "1" or "yes"), simplaret will
+    # donwload even # already applied patches, a good option when you plan
+    # to keep local copies of all needed patches for your system
+    DOWNLOAD_EVEN_APPLIED_PATCHES="`eval_boolean_parameter DOWNLOAD_EVEN_APPLIED_PATCHES 0`"
+
+    # Enabling this option, jail-upgrade will look at your
+    # standard repositories for new packages; if it find a package
+    # with different version of your current installed package and
+    # also this package isnt in the packages folder, then the new
+    # package is apllied; if in doubt, just say no or leave blank.
+    CONSIDER_ALL_PACKAGES_AS_PATCHES="`eval_boolean_parameter CONSIDER_ALL_PACKAGES_AS_PATCHES 0`"
+
+    # Enabling this option (i.e, setting to "1" or "yes"), simplaret will
+    # store patches it finds on ROOT repositories on
+    #
+    #   $PATCHES_DIR/$ARCH/$VERSION/root-$repository_name.
+    #
+    # By default this option is turned off because it breaks the standard
+    # way to store packages and can cause some confusion, but its an useful
+    # feature if you like to see all patches apart from common packages and/or
+    # stored in the same tree.
+    STORE_ROOT_PATCHES_ON_PATCHES_DIR="`eval_boolean_parameter STORE_ROOT_PATCHES_ON_PATCHES_DIR 0`"
+
+    # now we place "patches" on the top of ROOT_PRIORITY
+    ROOT_PRIORITY="patches `echo $ROOT_PRIORITY | sed -e 's/patches//'`"
+
+  else
+    echo $1 error: config file $CONFIG not found
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -d "$STORAGE" ]; then
+    mkdir -p $STORAGE
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -d "$PATCHES_DIR" ]; then
+    mkdir -p $PATCHES_DIR
+  fi
+
+  if [ -z "$ARCH" ]; then
+    ARCH="$DEFAULT_ARCH" 
+  fi
+
+  if [ -z "$VERSION" ]; then
+    VERSION="$DEFAULT_VERSION"
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$FTP_TOOL" != "wget" ] && [ "$FTP_TOOL" != "curl" ] && [ "$FTP_TOOL" != "ncftpget" ]; then
+    echo "$1 configuration error: invalid value $FTP_TOOL for config parameter FTP_TOOL"
+    echo "$1 assuming value \"curl\" for variable FTP_TOOL"
+    FTP_TOOL="curl"
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$HTTP_TOOL" != "wget" ] && [ "$HTTP_TOOL" != "curl" ]; then
+    echo "$1 configuration error: invalid value $HTTP_TOOL for config parameter HTTP_TOOL"
+    echo "$1 assuming value \"curl\" for variable HTTP_TOOL"
+    HTTP_TOOL="curl"
+  fi
+
+  if which $SIMPLARET &> /dev/null; then
+    if [ "$SIMPLARET_UPDATE" == "1" ]; then
+      if [ "$2" == "-u" ]; then
+        ARCH=$ARCH VERSION=$VERSION $SIMPLARET --update
+      fi
+    fi
+  else
+    echo "$SIMPLARET not found, please install it before run $0"
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE" != "simplepkg-folder" ] && \
+     [ "$TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE" != "templates-folder" ] && \
+     [ "$TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE" != "own-folder" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE="own-folder"
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -z "$ROOT" ]; then
+    JAIL_ROOT="$ROOT"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#           arch and version functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function default_version {
+
+  # get version from /etc/slackware-version
+  if [ -f "$1/etc/slackware-version" ]; then
+    cat $1/etc/slackware-version | awk '{ print $2 }' | sed -e 's/.0$//'
+  else
+    echo "none"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function default_arch {
+
+  # get arch from /etc/slackware-version
+
+  local arch
+  arch="`cat $1/etc/slackware-version | awk '{ print $3 }' | sed -e 's/(//' -e 's/)//'`"
+
+  if [ -z "$arch" ]; then
+    echo i386
+  else
+    echo $arch
+  fi
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#              template functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function search_default_template {
+
+  if [ -e "$BASE_CONF/default.template" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$BASE_CONF/default"
+    echo $BASENAME using default template
+  elif [ -e "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/default.template" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/default"
+    echo $BASENAME: using default template
+  elif [ -e "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/default/default.template" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/default/default"
+    echo $BASENAME: using default template
+  elif [ -e "$BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/default/default.template" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/default"
+    echo $BASENAME using default template
+  else
+    echo $BASENAME: error: default template not found
+    echo $BASENAME: please create a template using templatepkg
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function search_template {
+
+  # determine the template to be used
+  # usage: search-template <template-name> [--new | --update]
+
+  #
+  # templates can be stored either on
+  #
+  # - $BASE_CONF/template_name.template
+  # - $TEMPLATE_FOLDER/template_name.template
+  # - $TEMPLATE_FOLDER/template_name/template_name.template
+  #
+  # also, there's a folder for "oficial" simplepkg templates,
+  # $BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/ and you can override any template
+  # in the default folder by placing a template with the same name
+  # in the template storage folders
+  #
+
+  if [ -f "$BASE_CONF/$1.template" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$BASE_CONF/$1"
+  elif [ -f "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1.template" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1"
+  elif [ -f "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1/$1.template" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1/$1"
+  elif [ -f "$BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/$1/$1.template" ] && \
+       [ "$2" != "--update" ]; then
+    TEMPLATE_BASE="$BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/$1/$1"
+  else
+    if [ "$2" == "--new" ]; then
+      # we need to return the path for a new template
+      if [ "$TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE" == "simplepkg-folder" ]; then
+        TEMPLATE_BASE="$BASE_CONF/$1"
+      elif [ "$TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE" == "templates-folder" ]; then
+        TEMPLATE_BASE="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1"
+      else
+        TEMPLATE_BASE="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1/$1"
+      fi
+    elif [ "$2" == "--update" ]; then
+      return 1
+    else
+      echo $BASENAME: template $1 not found
+      search_default_template
+    fi
+  fi
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#           unix permission functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function numeric_perm {
+
+  # get the numeric permission of a file
+  # usage: numeric_perm <file-name>
+
+  # just a bit of forbidden secrets
+
+  if [ -a "$1" ]; then
+    ls -lnd $1 | awk '{ print $1 }' | \
+    sed -e 's/^.//' -e 's/r/4/g' -e 's/w/2/g' -e 's/x/1/g' \
+        -e 's/-/0/g' -e 's/\(.\)\(.\)\(.\)/\1+\2+\3/g' |   \
+    fold -w5 | bc -l | xargs | sed -e 's/ //g'
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function get_owner {
+
+  # get the numeric owner for a file
+  # usage: get_owner <file>
+
+  if [ -a "$1" ]; then
+    ls -lnd $1 | awk '{ print $3 }'
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function get_group {
+
+  # get the numeric group for a file
+  # usage: get_group <file>
+
+  if [ -a "$1" ]; then
+    ls -lnd $1 | awk '{ print $4 }'
+  fi
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#              subversion functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function use_svn {
+
+  # check if svn usage is enabled
+
+  if [ "$TEMPLATES_UNDER_SVN" == "1" ] && \
+     [ "$TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE" == "own-folder" ]; then
+     return 0
+   else
+     return 1
+   fi
+
+}
+
+function svn_check {
+
+  # check if a file is under svn
+  # usage: svn_check <file>
+
+  local cwd folder
+
+  cwd="`pwd`"
+  folder="`dirname $1`"
+
+  if [ -d "$folder/.svn" ]; then
+
+    cd $folder
+
+    if [ "`svn status $1 | awk '{ print $1 }'`" == "?" ]; then
+      return 1
+    else
+      return 0
+    fi
+
+    cd $cwd
+
+  else
+
+    return 1
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#           update jail functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function update_template_files {
+
+  # update template files from svn
+  # usage: update_template_files
+
+  if use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/.svn" ]; then
+    echo Checking out last template revision from svn...
+    cd `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+    svn update
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function copy_template_files {
+
+  # copy template files into jail
+  # usage: copy_template_files <jail-path>
+
+  if [ -d "$1" ]; then
+    if [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d" ]; then 
+      echo "Copying template files to $1..."
+      if use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/.svn" ]; then
+        rsync -av --exclude=.svn $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/ $1/
+      else
+        rsync -av $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/ $1/
+      fi
+    fi
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function set_jail_perms {
+
+  # set template file permissions under a jail
+  # usage: set_jail_perms <jail-path>
+
+  if [ -s "$TEMPLATE_BASE.perms" ]; then
+    echo Setting jail $1 permissions...
+    cat $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms | while read entry; do
+      file="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 1`"
+      if [ -e "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$file" ] && [ -a "$1/$file" ]; then
+        owner="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 2`"
+        group="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 3`"
+        perms="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 4`"
+        chmod $perms $1/$file
+        chown $owner:$group $1/$file
+      fi
+    done
+  fi
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#           repository build functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function svn_add_meta {
+
+  find *meta -exec svn add {} 2> /dev/null \;
+  find . -name *meta -exec svn add {} 2> /dev/null \;
+
+}
+
+function gen_filelist {
+
+  # generate FILELIST.TXT
+  # usage: gen_filelist <folder>
+
+  local cwd
+
+  for file in `find | grep -e ".tgz$"`; do ls -l $file; done > FILELIST.TXT
+  echo "Created new FILELIST.TXT"
+
+}
+
+function gen_patches_filelist {
+
+  # generate FILE_LIST
+  # usage: gen_patches_filelist <folder>
+
+  if [ ! -z "$1" ] && [ -d "$1" ]; then
+
+    cwd="`pwd`"
+    cd $1
+    for file in `find | grep -e ".tgz$"`; do ls -l $file; done > FILE_LIST
+    cd $pwd
+
+    if [ "$1" == "." ]; then
+      echo "Created new FILE_LIST"
+    else
+      echo "Created new $1/FILE_LIST"
+    fi
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function gen_packages_txt {
+
+  # generate PACKAGES.TXT
+  # usage: gen_packages_txt <folder>
+
+  if [ ! -z "$1" ] && [ -d "$1" ]; then
+
+    cwd="`pwd`"
+    cd $1
+
+    echo '' > PACKAGES.TXT
+    find . -type f -name '*.meta' -exec cat {} \; >> PACKAGES.TXT
+    cat PACKAGES.TXT | gzip -9 -c - > PACKAGES.TXT.gz
+    cd $pwd
+
+    if [ "$1" == "." ]; then
+      echo "Created new PACKAGES.TXT and PACKAGES.TXT.gz"
+    else
+      echo "Created new $1/PACKAGES.TXT and $1/PACKAGES.TXT.gz"
+    fi
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function gen_md5_checksums {
+
+  # generate CHECKSUMS.md5
+  # usage: gen_md5_checksums <folder>
+
+  if [ ! -z "$1" ] && [ -d "$1" ]; then
+
+    cwd="`pwd`"
+    cd $1
+
+    echo '' > CHECKSUMS.md5
+    find . -type f -name '*.tgz' -exec md5sum {} \; >> CHECKSUMS.md5
+    cat CHECKSUMS.md5 | gzip -9 -c - > CHECKSUMS.md5.gz
+    cd $pwd
+
+    if [ "$1" == "." ]; then
+      echo "Created new CHECKSUMS.md5 and CHECKSUMS.md5.gz"
+    else
+      echo "Created new $1/CHECKSUMS.md5 and $1/CHECKSUMS.md5.gz"
+    fi
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function gen_meta {
+
+  # generate metafiles
+  # usage: gen_meta <package-file>
+
+  if [ ! -f $1 ]; then
+    echo "File not found: $1"
+    exit 1;
+  else
+    echo "Processing $1"
+  fi
+
+  if [ "`echo $1|grep -E '(.*{1,})\-(.*[\.\-].*[\.\-].*).tgz[ ]{0,}$'`" == "" ]; then
+    return;
+  fi
+
+  NAME=$(echo $1|sed -re "s/(.*\/)(.*.tgz)$/\2/")
+  LOCATION=$(echo $1|sed -re "s/(.*)\/(.*.tgz)$/\1/")
+  SIZE=$( expr `gunzip -l $1 | tail -n 1|awk '{print $1}'` / 1024 )
+  USIZE=$( expr `gunzip -l $1 | tail -n 1|awk '{print $2}'` / 1024 )
+  REQUIRED=$(tar xzfO $1 install/slack-required 2>/dev/null|xargs -r -iZ echo -n "Z,"|sed -e "s/,$//")
+  CONFLICTS=$(tar xzfO $1 install/slack-conflicts 2>/dev/null|xargs -r -iZ echo -n "Z,"|sed -e "s/,$//")
+  SUGGESTS=$(tar xzfO $1 install/slack-suggests 2>/dev/null|xargs -r )
+  METAFILE=${NAME%tgz}meta
+
+  echo "PACKAGE NAME:  $NAME" > $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+
+  if [ -n "$DL_URL" ]; then
+    echo "PACKAGE MIRROR:  $DL_URL" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+  fi
+
+  echo "PACKAGE LOCATION:  $LOCATION" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+  echo "PACKAGE SIZE (compressed):  $SIZE K" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+  echo "PACKAGE SIZE (uncompressed):  $USIZE K" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+  echo "PACKAGE REQUIRED:  $REQUIRED" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+  echo "PACKAGE CONFLICTS:  $CONFLICTS" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+  echo "PACKAGE SUGGESTS:  $SUGGESTS" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+  echo "PACKAGE DESCRIPTION:" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+
+  tar xzfO $1 install/slack-desc | grep -E '\w+\:'|grep -v '^#' >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+
+  echo "" >> $LOCATION/$METAFILE
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------
+#                 misc functions
+# -----------------------------------------------
+
+function slash {
+
+  # remove additional slashes
+  echo $* | sed -e 's/\/\+/\//g'
+
+}
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/simplepkg.SlackBuild b/branches/0.6/simplepkg.SlackBuild
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..fdc8a7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/simplepkg.SlackBuild
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# SlackBuild script for simplepkg
+#
+
+PACKAGE="simplepkg"
+PACK_DIR="package-$PACKAGE"
+BUILD=${BUILD:=1rha}
+VERSION="0.5pre17"
+ARCH="noarch"
+LIBEXEC="/usr/libexec/$PACKAGE"
+BINDIR="/usr/bin"
+BINARY_LIST="simplaret repos lspkg mkbuild"
+SBINDIR="/usr/sbin"
+SBINARY_LIST="exec-slackbuild mkjail templatepkg jail-update jail-commit metapkg rebuildpkg createpkg exec-slackbuild"
+LIB_LIST="common.sh"
+DOC_DIR="/usr/doc"
+DOC_LIST="COPYING TODO CHANGELOG README README.pt_BR README.simplaret README.simplaret.pt_BR"
+
+rm -rf $PACK_DIR
+mkdir -p $PACK_DIR/install
+cp install/slack-desc $PACK_DIR/install
+cp install/doinst.sh $PACK_DIR/install
+
+mkdir -p $PACK_DIR/$SBINDIR
+for binary in $SBINARY_LIST; do
+  if [ -f "src/$binary" ]; then
+    cp src/$binary $PACK_DIR/$SBINDIR
+    chmod +x $PACK_DIR/$SBINDIR/$binary
+  fi
+done
+
+mkdir -p $PACK_DIR/$BINDIR
+for binary in $BINARY_LIST; do
+  cp src/$binary $PACK_DIR/$BINDIR/
+  chmod +x $PACK_DIR/$BINDIR/$binary
+done
+
+mkdir -p $PACK_DIR/$LIBEXEC
+for lib in $LIB_LIST; do
+  cp lib/$lib $PACK_DIR/$LIBEXEC/
+done
+
+rm -rf $PACK_DIR/$DOC_DIR
+mkdir -p $PACK_DIR/$DOC_DIR/$PACKAGE-$VERSION
+for file in $DOC_LIST; do
+ cp doc/$file $PACK_DIR/$DOC_DIR/$PACKAGE-$VERSION/
+done
+
+mkdir -p $PACK_DIR/etc/$PACKAGE/{defaults,templates}
+rsync -av --exclude=.svn templates/* $PACK_DIR/etc/$PACKAGE/defaults/templates/
+chmod +x $PACK_DIR/etc/$PACKAGE/defaults/templates/vserver/vserver.s/*.sh
+chmod +x $PACK_DIR/etc/$PACKAGE/defaults/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/*.sh
+cp conf/simplepkg.conf.new $PACK_DIR/etc/$PACKAGE
+cp conf/repos.conf.new $PACK_DIR/etc/$PACKAGE
+cp conf/generic.mkSlackBuild.new $PACK_DIR/etc/$PACKAGE
+cp utils/exec-slackbuild $PACK_DIR/$SBINDIR/
+
+if [ -f "$PACK_DIR/usr/sbin/jail-upgrade" ]; then
+  cd $PACK_DIR/usr/sbin && ln -s jail-upgrade vserver-upgrade
+  cd -
+fi
+
+cd $PACK_DIR
+chown -R root.root *
+
+makepkg -c y -l y ../simplepkg-$VERSION-$ARCH-$BUILD.tgz
+cd ..
+
+if [ "$CLEANUP" != "no" ]; then
+  rm -rf $PACK_DIR
+fi
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/createpkg b/branches/0.6/src/createpkg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..03612a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/createpkg
@@ -0,0 +1,511 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# createpkg: package builder using http://slack.sarava.org/slackbuilds scripts
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | gpl
+#
+#  createpkg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  createpkg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+# /etc/simplepkg/slackbuildrc parameters:
+#
+# SLACKBUILDS_DIR="/folder/to/place/slackbuilds", defaults to /var/slackbuilds
+# SVN="svn://repository", defaults do svn://slack.sarava.org/slackbuilds
+# SYNC="yes|no", whether to always update the repository
+#
+# TODO
+#
+# - optionally show a dependency tree before create the package
+# - in function solve_dep: resolve program versions
+# - mkdir source directory - error... (please check!)
+
+#---------------------------------------------------
+#               Createpkg functions
+#---------------------------------------------------
+
+CREATEPKG_VERSION="1.0.5"
+
+function error_codes {
+
+    # Slackbuilds error codes
+    ERROR_WGET=31       # wget error
+    ERROR_MAKE=32       # make source error
+    ERROR_INSTALL=33    # make install error
+    ERROR_MD5=34        # md5sum error
+    ERROR_CONF=35       # ./configure error
+    ERROR_HELP=36       # dasable
+    ERROR_TAR=37        # tar error
+    ERROR_MKPKG=38      # makepkg error
+    ERROR_GPG=39        # gpg check error
+    ERROR_PATCH=40      # patch error
+    ERROR_VCS=41        # cvs error
+    ERROR_MKDIR=42      # make directory error
+
+    # Createpkg error codes
+    ERROR_INSTPKG=200    # installpkg error
+    ERROR_DEPEN=201      # dependency error
+    SCRIPT_OR_PACKAGE_NOT_FOUND=202     # Script or package not found
+}
+
+function eecho {
+
+    # echoes a message
+    # usage: eecho <message-type> <message>
+    # message-type can be: commun, messag, error, normal
+
+    echo -e "${1}${2}${normal}"
+
+}
+
+function handle_error {
+
+    # This function deals with internal createpkg errors
+    # and also with non-zero exit codes from slackbuilds
+    # Input:    $1 - error code
+    # Output:   Error mensage
+    #
+    # check slackbuild exit status are:
+    #
+    # ERROR_WGET=31;      ERROR_MAKE=32;      ERROR_INSTALL=33
+    # ERROR_MD5=34;       ERROR_CONF=35;      ERROR_HELP=36
+    # ERROR_TAR=37;       ERROR_MKPKG=38      ERROR_GPG=39
+    # ERROR_PATCH=40;     ERROR_VCS=41;       ERROR_MKDIR=42
+    #
+    # thanks to rudsonalves at yahoo.com.br for this spec.
+
+    # we don't want to process when exit status = 0
+    [ "$1" == "0" ] && return
+
+    # Exit codes
+    case $1 in
+        2)  usage ;;
+        3)  eecho $alert "$BASENAME: could not update the repository $2" ;;
+        4)  eecho $alert "$BASENAME: could not create folder $2" ;;
+        5)  eecho $alert "$BASENAME: script not found for $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_WGET)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error downloading source/package for $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_MAKE)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error compiling $2 source code" ;;
+        $ERROR_INSTALL)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error installing $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_MD5)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error on source code integrity check for $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_CONF)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error configuring the source code for $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_HELP)
+            exit 0 ;; # its supposed to never happen here :P
+        $ERROR_TAR)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error decompressing source code for $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_MKPKG)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error creating package $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_GPG)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error verifying GPG signature the source code for $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_PATCH)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error patching the source code for $2" ;;
+        $ERROR_VCS)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: error downloading $2 source from version control system" ;;
+        $ERROR_MKDIR)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: make directory $2 error, aborting" ;;
+        $ERROR_INSTPKG)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: install package $2 error, aborting" ;;
+        $ERROR_DEPEN)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: dependency solve error, aborting" ;;
+        *)  eecho $error "$BASENAME: unknown error or user interrupt" ;;
+        $SCRIPT_OR_PACKAGE_NOT_FOUND)
+            eecho $error "$BASENAME: SlackBuild or package not found" ;;
+    esac
+
+    exit $1
+
+}
+
+function build_repo {
+
+    # Checkout a new slackbuild working copy
+    BASEDIR="`dirname $SLACKBUILDS_DIR`"
+    mkdir -p $BASEDIR || handle_error 4 $BASEDIR
+    cd $BASEDIR
+    svn checkout $SVN
+    cd $SLACKBUILDS_DIR
+
+}
+
+function usage {
+
+    # Help mensage
+    eecho $commun "Createpkg version $CREATEPKG_VERSION\n"
+    eecho $commun "Usage: createpkg [--install/-i] package-name"
+    eecho $commun "       createpkg --no-deps/-np package-name"
+    eecho $commun "       createpkg --search/-s package-name"
+    eecho $commun "       createpkg --info/-f package-name"
+    eecho $commun "       createpkg --list/-l"
+    eecho $commun "       createpkg --sync"
+    eecho $commun "       createpkg --help/-h"
+}
+
+function check_config {
+
+    # check the configuration
+    TMP=${TMP:=/tmp};
+    REPOS=${REPOS:=$TMP};
+    # Create $TMP and $REPOS if need
+    [ ! -e $TPM ] && mkdir $TMP
+    [ ! -e $REPOS ] && mkdir $REPOS
+    #
+    SLACKBUILDS_DIR=${SLACKBUILDS_DIR:=/var/slackbuilds}
+    SVN=${SVN:=svn://slack.sarava.org/slackbuilds}
+    SYNC=${SYNC:=no}
+    BASEDIR="`dirname $SLACKBUILDS_DIR`"
+
+}
+
+function solve_dep {
+
+    # Solve dependency
+    local PACK="$1"
+    local COND="$2"
+    local VER="$3"
+
+    # Check package in local system
+    PACK="`echo $PACK | sed -e 's/\+/\\\+/'`"
+    INSTALLED=`eval "ls /var/log/packages/ | egrep -E '^$PACK-[^-]+-[^-]+-[^-]+$'"`
+    CHECK=$?
+
+    # TODO: Make check version procedures
+    if [ -z "$INSTALLED" ]; then
+        if [ $CHECK -ne 0 ]; then
+            # Check package in SlackBuilds tree
+            eecho $messag "$BASENAME: processing $PACKAGE dependency $PACK"
+            SYNC=no CREATEPKG_CHILD=$CREATEPKG_CHILD createpkg --install $PACK
+
+            # check if the package was built and installed
+            EXIT_CODE="$?"
+
+            if [ "$EXIT_CODE" == "5" ]; then
+
+                # exit code 5 == slackbuild not found
+                # try to use simplaret
+                ARCH=$DEFAULT_ARCH simplaret --update
+                ARCH=$DEFAULT_ARCH simplaret --install $PACK
+                EXIT_CODE="$?"
+                if [ "$EXIT_CODE" != "0" ]; then
+                    handle_error $SCRIPT_OR_PACKAGE_NOT_FOUND $PACK
+                fi
+
+            elif [ "$EXIT_CODE" != "0" ]; then
+                handle_error $EXIT_CODE $PACK
+            fi
+
+        fi
+    fi
+
+}
+
+function check_repo {
+
+    # Verify if repository exist
+    [ ! -d "$SLACKBUILDS_DIR" ] && build_repo
+
+}
+
+function sync_repo {
+
+    # Synchronize repository
+    cd $SLACKBUILDS_DIR
+    svn update || build_repo
+    #simplaret --update
+
+}
+
+function find_slackbuild {
+
+    # Find SlackBuild script in the repository
+    find $SLACKBUILDS_DIR -iname $1.SlackBuild
+
+}
+
+function info_builds {
+
+    # Show packages info
+    if [ "$PKG_PATH" != "" ]; then
+        for i in $PKG_PATH; do
+            PACKAGE=`basename $i .SlackBuild`
+            NAME_UP=`echo $PACKAGE | tr [a-z] [A-Z]`
+            eecho $commun "$NAME_UP: "
+
+            PKG_DIR=`dirname $i`
+            if [ -e $PKG_DIR/slack-desc ]; then
+                eval "cat $PKG_DIR/slack-desc | grep '^$PACKAGE:' | cut -f2- -d:"
+                eecho $normal
+            else
+                eval "cat $i | grep '^$PACKAGE:' | cut -f2- -d:"
+                eecho $normal
+            fi
+
+            if [ -e $PKG_DIR/slack-required ]; then
+                eecho $commun "slack-required"
+                cat $PKG_DIR/slack-required | sed 's/^/ /'
+            fi
+        done
+    fi
+
+}
+
+function list_builds {
+
+    # List all available SlackBuilds
+    cd $SLACKBUILDS_DIR
+    echo "Sarava SlackBuilds list"
+    # level 1
+    for i in *; do
+        if [ -d $i ]; then
+            echo -e "  $i: "
+            (
+            cd $i
+            # level 2
+            for j in *; do
+                if [ -d $j ]; then
+                    eecho $commun "    $j"
+                    (
+                    cd $j
+                    BUILD="`ls *.SlackBuild 2>/dev/null`"
+                    if [ "$BUILD" != "" ]; then
+                        # level 3
+                        for k in $BUILD; do
+                            eecho $messag "      $k"
+                        done
+                    else
+                        BUILD=""
+                    fi
+                    for k in *; do
+                        if [ -d $k ]; then
+                            eecho $messag "      $k.SlackBuild"
+                        fi
+                    done
+                    )
+                fi
+            done
+            )
+        fi
+    done
+
+}
+
+function color_select {
+
+    # Select color mode: gray, color or none (*)
+    # commun - Communication
+    # messag - Commum messages
+    # error - Error messages
+    # normal   - turn off color
+    case "$1" in
+    'gray')
+        commun="\033[37;1m"
+        messag="\033[37;1m"
+        error="\033[30;1m"
+        alert="\033[37m"
+        normal="\033[m"
+        ;;
+    'color')
+        commun="\033[34;1m" # green
+        messag="\033[32;1m" # blue
+        error="\033[31;1m" # red
+        alert="\033[33;1m" # yellow
+        normal="\033[m"       # normal
+        ;;
+    *)
+        commun=""
+        messag=""
+        error=""
+        alert=""
+        normal=""
+        ;;
+    esac
+
+}
+
+#---------------------------------------------------
+#                 Starting createpkg
+#---------------------------------------------------
+# Common functions
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+SIMPLEPKG_CONF="/etc/simplepkg/simplepkg.conf"
+
+# Loading error codes
+error_codes
+
+# First load simplepkg helper functions
+source $COMMON && source $SIMPLEPKG_CONF
+if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+    eecho $error "error: file $COMMON not found, check your $BASENAME installation"
+    exit 1
+fi
+
+# Load slackbuildrc definitions
+if [ -f ~/.slackbuildrc ]; then
+    source ~/.slackbuildrc
+else
+    source /etc/slackbuildrc 2>/dev/null
+fi
+
+# Select color mode: gray, color or none (*)
+color_select $COLOR
+
+# This is used to show how many children process we have
+if [ -z "$CREATEPKG_CHILD" ]; then
+    CREATEPKG_CHILD="1"
+else
+    let CREATEPKG_CHILD++
+fi
+
+BASENAME="`basename $0`[$CREATEPKG_CHILD]"
+
+check_config
+check_repo
+
+case $1 in
+    '--search'|'-s')
+        [ $# -ne 2 ] && handle_error 2   # two parameters is required
+        find_slackbuild $2
+        exit
+    ;;
+    '--info'|'-f')
+        [ $# -ne 2 ] && handle_error 2   # two parameters is required
+        PKG_PATH=`find_slackbuild $2`
+        info_builds
+        exit
+    ;;
+    '--install'|'-i')
+        [ $# -ne 2 ] && handle_error 2   # two parameters is required
+        PACKAGE="$2"
+        INSTALL="1"
+    ;;
+    '--no-deps'|'-nd')
+        [ $# -ne 2 ] && handle_error 2   # two parameters is required
+        NO_DEPS="1"
+        PACKAGE="$2"
+    ;;
+    '--sync')
+        sync_repo
+        exit 0
+    ;;
+    '--help'|'-h'|'')
+        usage
+        exit 0
+    ;;
+    '--list'|'-l')
+        list_builds
+        exit 0
+    ;;
+    *)
+        if [ "${1:0:1}" != "-" ]; then
+            PACKAGE="$1"
+        else
+            handle_error 2
+        fi
+    ;;
+esac
+
+# Synchronize repository
+[ "$SYNC" == "yes" ] && sync_repo
+
+# Get SlackBuild script
+BUILD_SCRIPT="`find_slackbuild $PACKAGE`"
+
+# Check SlackBuild script found
+if [ -z "$BUILD_SCRIPT" ]; then
+    handle_error 5 $PACKAGE
+fi
+
+# Select one SlackBuild
+if [ "`echo $BUILD_SCRIPT | wc -w`" -gt 1 ]; then
+    AUX="$PS3"
+    PS3="Choice: "
+    LIST=`echo $BUILD_SCRIPT | sed 's/ /\n/g' | sed -r 's/.*\/(.*)\.SlackBuild$/\1/'`" EXIT"
+
+    select PACKAGE in `echo $LIST`; do
+        break
+    done
+
+    if [ "$PACKAGE" = "EXIT" ]; then
+        eecho $error "error: None package select"
+        exit 1
+    fi
+
+    # Select only one SlackBuild in BUILD_SCRIPT
+    BUILD_SCRIPT=`echo $BUILD_SCRIPT | sed 's/ /\n/g' | grep "/$PACKAGE.SlackBuild"`
+    PS3="$AUX"
+else
+    #PACKAGE=`echo $BUILD_SCRIPT | sed -r 's/.*\/(.*)\.SlackBuild$/\1/'`
+    PACKAGE=`basename $BUILD_SCRIPT .SlackBuild`
+fi
+
+# Get dirname and script name from slackbuild
+SCRIPT_BASE="`dirname $BUILD_SCRIPT`"
+SCRIPT_NAME="`basename $BUILD_SCRIPT`"
+eecho $messag "$BASENAME: found script $PACKAGE.SlackBuild, now checking for dependencies"
+
+# Sets the package's slack-required
+if [ -f "$SCRIPT_BASE/$PACKAGE.slack-required" ]; then
+    SLACK_REQUIRED="$SCRIPT_BASE/$PACKAGE.slack-required"
+elif [ -f "$SCRIPT_BASE/slack-required" ]; then
+    SLACK_REQUIRED="$SCRIPT_BASE/slack-required"
+fi
+
+if [ ! -z "$SLACK_REQUIRED" -a "$NO_DEPS" != "1" ]; then
+    # this routine checks for dependencies in package's slack-required
+    ( grep '^[^#]' $SLACK_REQUIRED | while read dep; do
+        if [ ! -z "$dep" ]; then
+            PROGRAM="`echo $dep | awk '{ print $1 }'`"
+            CONDITION="`echo $dep | awk '{ print $2 }' | tr [=\>\<] [egl]`"
+            VERSION="`echo $dep | awk '{ print $3 }' | tr -dc '[:digit:]'`"
+            solve_dep $PROGRAM $CONDITION $VERSION
+        fi
+        true
+    done )
+    if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+        eecho $messag "$BASENAME: dependency solve error"
+        exit 1
+    fi
+    eecho $messag "$BASENAME: done checking for $PACKAGE dependencies"
+else
+    eecho $messag "$BASENAME: no unmet dependencies for $PACKAGE"
+fi
+
+eecho $messag "$BASENAME: processing $SCRIPT_NAME"
+
+# Change to script base directory
+cd $SCRIPT_BASE
+
+# Select repository directory
+NEW_REPOS=$REPOS/$( echo ${SCRIPT_BASE#$SLACKBUILDS_DIR/} )
+
+# Create repository directory
+[ ! -e $NEW_REPOS ] && mkdir -p $NEW_REPOS 2>/dev/null
+
+
+# Remove old-versions
+rm $NEW_REPOS/$PACKAGE-*-*-*.tgz 2>/dev/null
+
+# Execute SlackBuild script with variables protection
+( INTERACT=no REPOS=$NEW_REPOS sh ./$SCRIPT_NAME )
+
+# Check if package was built
+handle_error $? $PACKAGE
+
+PKG_TGZ="`ls -1 -c $NEW_REPOS/$PACKAGE-*-*-*.tgz | head -n 1`"
+
+if [ "$INSTALL" == "1" ]; then
+    # as we dont have the full package file name, we'll
+    # use the newer file name that matches our wildcard:
+
+    upgradepkg --install-new $PKG_TGZ
+fi
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/jail-commit b/branches/0.6/src/jail-commit
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..f2695d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/jail-commit
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# jail-commit: update config files from a jail to a template
+# feedback: rhatto@riseup.net | gpl
+#
+#  Jail-commit is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Jail-commit is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+  eval_config $BASENAME
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your $BASENAME installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+function usage {
+
+  echo $BASENAME: commit a jail configuration into a template
+  echo "usage: \"$BASENAME [<jail-path> [template]]\""
+  echo "       \"$BASENAME --all\" to commit all templates"
+  echo "       \"$BASENAME --help\" for help"
+
+}
+
+function template_merge {
+
+  # copy differences between the jail
+  # and the template in the template folder
+
+  # usage: template_merge <jail-path>
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ] || [ ! -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d" ]; then
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  echo "" > $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms.tmp
+  cd $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+
+  for file in `find | grep -v -e "/.svn$" | grep -v -e "/.svn/" | grep -v -e  "^\.$"`; do
+
+    if [[ -e "$file" && -e "$1/$file" ]]; then
+
+      if [ ! -d "$file" ] && [ ! -h "$file" ]; then
+        if ! diff $file $1/$file; then
+          echo Updating $file
+          cp -af $1/$file $file
+        fi
+      elif [ -h "$file" ]; then
+        if [ "`readlink $file`" != "`readlink $1/$file`" ]; then
+          rm -f $file
+          ln -s `readlink $1/$file` $file
+        fi
+      fi
+
+      perms="`numeric_perm $1/$file`"
+      owner="`get_owner $1/$file`"
+      group="`get_group $1/$file`"
+      echo "$file;$owner;$group;$perms" >> $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms.tmp
+
+    else
+      if [ ! -e "$1/$file" ]; then
+        echo $BASENAME: warning: missing file `slash $1/$file`
+      fi
+    fi
+
+  done
+
+  cat $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms.tmp | sed '/^$/d' > $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms
+  rm -f $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms.tmp
+
+  if ! svn_check $TEMPLATE_BASE,perms; then
+    svn add $TEMPLATE_BASE,perms
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_svn_commit {
+
+  # issue a svn_commit from a template folder
+  # usage: template_svn_commit <template-folder>
+
+  if use_svn && [ -d "$1/.svn" ]; then
+    cd $1
+    echo First checking out from the repository...
+    svn update
+    echo Commiting changes to the repository...
+    svn commit -m "changes for `date`"
+    if [ "$?" != "0" ]; then
+      echo $BASENAME: commit error
+    fi
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function do_commit {
+
+  # commit jail changes to a repository
+  # usage: do_commit <jailpath> [template]
+
+  local jailpath template
+
+  jailpath="$1"
+  jail="`basename $jailpath`"
+
+  if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+    template="$2"
+  else
+    template="$jail"
+  fi
+
+  search_template $template --update
+  if [ "$?" == "0" ] && ! echo "$TEMPLATE_UPDATE_LIST" | grep -q " `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE` "; then
+    TEMPLATE_UPDATE_LIST=" $TEMPLATE_UPDATE_LIST `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE` " # the spaces are important
+    if [ "$jailpath" == "/" ]; then
+      echo Updating main installation...
+    else
+      echo Updating $jailpath...
+    fi
+    if [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d" ] || [ -a "$TEMPLATE_BASE.template" ]; then
+      SILENT=yes templatepkg -u $template $jailpath
+      template_merge $jailpath
+    fi
+  else
+    if [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+      echo $BASENAME: template $template not found
+    fi
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+}
+
+TEMPLATE_UPDATE_LIST=""
+
+if [ "$1" == "--help" ]; then
+  usage
+elif [ "$1" == "--all" ]; then
+  template_svn_commit $BASE_CONF/templates
+elif echo $1 | grep -q -e "^--"; then
+  usage
+elif [ ! -z "$1" ]; then
+  do_commit $1 $2
+  if [ "$?" == "0" ]; then
+    template_svn_commit `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+  fi
+else
+  SILENT="yes"
+  if [ -e $JAIL_LIST ]; then
+    for jailpath in `cat $JAIL_LIST`; do
+      do_commit $jailpath
+    done
+  fi
+  # main jail
+  do_commit / main
+  template_svn_commit $BASE_CONF/templates
+fi
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/jail-update b/branches/0.6/src/jail-update
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..c5a008f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/jail-update
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# jail-update: update config files from a jail to a template
+# feedback: rhatto@riseup.net | gpl
+#
+#  Jail-update is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Jail-update is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+  eval_config $BASENAME
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your $BASENAME installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+function usage {
+
+  echo "$BASENAME: update a jail configuration from a template"
+  echo "usage: $BASENAME <jail-path> [template]"
+
+}
+
+if [ -z "$1" ] || [ "$1" == "--help" ] || echo $1 | grep -q -e "^--"; then
+  usage
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  template_name="`basename $1`"
+else
+  template_name="$2"
+fi
+
+search_template $template_name --update
+
+if [ "$?" != "0" ]; then
+  echo $BASENAME: template $template_name not found
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1" ]; then
+  echo $BASENAME: jail $1 not found
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+update_template_files
+copy_template_files $1
+set_jail_perms $1
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/lspkg b/branches/0.6/src/lspkg
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..01900f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/lspkg
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# lspkg v0.3: view installed and contents of slackware packages
+#
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | gpl
+#
+#  Lspkg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Lspkg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+    source $COMMON
+else
+    echo "error: file $COMMON not found, check your `basename $0` installation"
+    exit 1
+fi
+
+function head_line {
+    echo "usage: [ROOT=/otherroot] `basename $0` [option expression]"
+}
+
+function usage {
+    head_line
+    echo "
+options are:
+
+   -v, --view: view installed package contents
+   -p, --print: print the contents of a package file
+   -r, --remove: remove matching packages
+   -s, --search: search a file under installed packages
+   -d, --description: show matching packages' descriptions
+"
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------
+#                       lspkg
+# -----------------------------------------------------
+
+if [ $# -eq 2 ]; then
+    LIST_PKGS="`ls /$ROOT/var/log/packages/$2-[0-9]* 2> /dev/null`"
+    if [ -z "$LIST_PKGS" ]; then
+        LIST_PKGS="`ls /$ROOT/var/log/packages/$2* 2> /dev/null`"
+    fi
+elif [ $# -eq 1 ]; then
+    LIST_PKGS="`ls /$ROOT/var/log/packages/$1-[0-9]* 2> /dev/null`"
+    if [ -z "$LIST_PKGS" ]; then
+        LIST_PKGS="`ls /$ROOT/var/log/packages/$1* 2> /dev/null`"
+    fi
+else
+    LIST_PKGS="`ls /$ROOT/var/log/packages/ 2> /dev/null`"
+fi
+
+LIST_PKGS="`slash $LIST_PKGS`"
+
+case $1 in
+    "-h"|"--help")
+        usage
+    ;;
+    "-v"|"--view")
+        if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+            if [ ! -z "$LIST_PKGS" ]; then
+                for file in $LIST_PKGS; do
+                    less $file
+                done
+            else
+                if [ ! -z "$ROOT" ]; then
+                    echo "$2: package not found on /$ROOT/var/log/packages"
+                else
+                    echo "$2: package not found on /var/log/packages"
+                fi
+            fi
+        else
+            head_line
+            exit 1
+        fi
+    ;;
+    "-p"|"--print")
+        if [ -f "$2" ]; then
+            tar ztvf $2
+        else
+            echo $2: file not found
+        fi
+    ;;
+    "-r"|"--remove")
+        if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+            if [ ! -z "$LIST_PKGS" ]; then
+                removepkg /$ROOT/var/log/packages/$1-[0-9]*
+            fi
+        fi
+    ;;
+    "-s"|"--search")
+        if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+            eval "grep -l '\/$2$' /$ROOT/var/log/packages/*"
+        fi
+    ;;
+    "-d"|"--description")
+        if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+            for file in $LIST_PKGS; do
+                pack="`package_name $file`"
+                echo -e " Package description for $file:\n"
+                sed -n "/^$pack:/ { s/$pack://; p; }" $file
+            done
+        else
+            head_line
+            exit 1
+        fi
+    ;;
+    *)
+        if [ ! -z "$LIST_PKGS" ]; then
+            for pack in $LIST_PKGS; do
+              echo $pack
+            done
+        else
+            if [ ! -z "$ROOT" ]; then
+                echo "$1: package not found on /$ROOT/var/log/packages"
+            else
+                echo "$1: package not found on /var/log/packages"
+            fi
+        fi
+    ;;
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/mkbuild b/branches/0.6/src/mkbuild
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..cae7224
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/mkbuild
@@ -0,0 +1,1196 @@
+#!/bin/bash -x
+#
+# Script para gerar SlackBuild
+# Por Rudson R. Alves
+#
+# Este script auxilia a cria��o de SlackBuilds, com o modelo
+# do Luiz do Sarava Linux
+#
+# SlackBuilds s�o scripts utilizados no Slackware para gerar
+# pacotes tgz.
+#
+# Turn off debug
+set +x
+#
+# Version 0.9.18
+PROG_VERSION=0.9.18
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Functions
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Show ./configure --help
+function config_help()
+{
+    view_file "Check ./configure --help" $CONFIG_HELP
+}
+
+# Show file
+# INPUT: $1 string textbox
+#        $2 file
+function view_file()
+{
+    [ $# -ne 2 ] && return 1
+    dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title " $1 " --textbox $2 20 75
+}
+
+# Exit function
+function mk_exit()
+{
+    clean_all
+    clear
+    exit $1
+}
+
+# Clear all temp files
+function clean_all()
+{
+    [ -s $DEPENDENCY_LIST ] && cp $DEPENDENCY_LIST $BASEDIR/slack-required
+
+    rm $AUX_TMP 2>/dev/null
+    rm $SLACKDESC_TMP 2>/dev/null
+    rm $SLACKBUILD.test 2>/dev/null
+    rm $DEPENDENCY_LIST 2>/dev/null
+    if [ ! -z $MK_PKGNAME ]; then
+        rm $BASEDIR/*_$MK_PKGNAME.mkbuild 2>/dev/null
+        rm -rf /tmp/$MK_PKGNAME 2>/dev/null
+        rm $CONFIG_HELP 2>/dev/null
+    fi
+}
+
+# Print from file $2, the lines betwen <$1> and </$1> lines
+function print_lines()
+{
+    [ $# -ne 2 ] && mk_exit 1
+    eval "sed -n '/<$1>/,/<\/$1>/ { /<$1>/ b; /<\/$1>/ b; p; }' $2"
+}
+
+# Print from file $2, the lines betwen <$1> and $2 lines
+function print_lines_to()
+{
+    [ $# -ne 3 ] && mk_exit 1
+    eval "sed -n '/<$1>/,/$2/ { /<$1>/ b; /$2/ b; p; }' $3"
+}
+
+# Make slack-desc file
+function mk_slackdesc()
+{
+    print_lines_to "slackdesc" "|-----" $SB_MODEL
+    echo -n $MK_PKGNAME | tr [a-z+\-] " "
+    echo -n "|-----handy-ruler"
+    let N=18+${#MK_PKGNAME}
+    for i in `seq $N $SLACKDESC_LEN`; do
+        echo -n "-"
+    done
+    echo -en "|\n"
+
+    for i in `seq 1 11`; do
+        echo -en "$MK_PKGNAME: \n"
+    done
+    print_lines "slackdesc" $SB_MODEL | sed '1,/\]\]/ d'
+}
+
+# Get label status from SlackBuild model
+function get_status()
+{
+    [ $# -ne 2 ] && mk_exit 1
+    eval "sed -n '/<$1>/ p' $2 | sed 's/.*> \([a-z]\+\)/\1/'"
+}
+
+# Get status from edited SlackBuild
+# input: $1 -> section name
+# output: section status and section number
+function mk_status()
+{
+    for i in `seq 0 $MAXSECTION`;do
+        if [ "${SECTION_NAME[i]}" = "$1" ]; then
+            echo "${SECTION_FLAG[i]} $i"
+            return 0
+        fi
+    done
+    return 1
+}
+
+# Edit file $3, by change string [[$1]] to $2
+function edit_file()
+{
+    local STR_OLD
+    local STR_NEW
+
+    [ $# -ne 3 ] && mk_exit 1
+    STR_OLD=$( echo $1 | sed 's/\//\\\//g' )
+    STR_NEW=$( echo $2 | sed 's/\//\\\//g' )
+    eval "sed 's/\[\[$STR_OLD\]\]/$STR_NEW/' $3 > $AUX_TMP"
+    mv $AUX_TMP $3
+}
+
+# Unpackage source
+function unpkg_source()
+{
+    # FIXME: if MK_DECOMPRESSOR -ne bunzip2 or gunzip...
+    if [ $MK_DECOMPRESSOR = "bunzip2" -o $MK_DECOMPRESSOR = "gunzip" ]; then
+        dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+            --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title "$MK_TITLE" --infobox "Uncompress source in /tmp/$MK_PKGNAME. Wait" 3 45
+        [ $? -ne 0 ] && return 100
+        mkdir /tmp/$MK_PKGNAME/ 2>/dev/null
+        tar xvf $MK_SOURCE -C /tmp/$MK_PKGNAME/ 1>/dev/null
+        [ $? -ne 0 ] && mk_exit 1
+        MK_TMPSRC="/tmp/$MK_PKGNAME/`ls /tmp/$MK_PKGNAME/`"
+
+        DOC_FILES=`find $MK_TMPSRC -type f -maxdepth 1 -name "[A-Z]*" | sed 's/.*\/\(.*\)$/\1/'`
+    else
+        dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+            --title "$MK_TITLE" --msgbox "$MK_DECOMPRESSOR not configurated..." 5 45
+    fi
+}
+
+# Download source
+function download_url()
+{
+    clear
+    mkdir -p $MK_SOURCEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME 2>/dev/null
+    wget --continue --limit-rate=$MK_LIMITRATE $MK_URL -P $MK_SOURCEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME/
+    if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+        echo "URL error"
+        return 0
+    fi
+    MK_SOURCE=$MK_SOURCEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME/$MK_SRCNAME
+}
+
+# Select source file
+function select_source()
+{
+    MK_SOURCE=$BASEDIR
+    while [ ! -f $MK_SOURCE ]; do
+        MK_SOURCE=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+            --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title " Select source file name (use spaces to select): " --fselect "$MK_SOURCE" 10 70`
+        [ $? -ne 0 ] && return 100
+        if [ ! -f $MK_SOURCE ]; then
+            MK_SOURCE="$MK_SOURCE/"
+        fi
+    done
+
+    MK_SRCNAME=`basename $MK_SOURCE`
+    MK_SOURCEDIR=`dirname $MK_SOURCE`
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Edit functions
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Edit authot, Initials and editor
+function edit_author()
+{
+    MK_AUTHOR=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with author complite name:" 8 60 "$MK_AUTHOR"`
+    edit_file "AUTHOR NAME" "$MK_AUTHOR" ~/.mkslackbuild
+
+    MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS=`echo $MK_AUTHOR | sed 's/ /\n/g' | sed 's/^\([A-Z]\).*/\1/' | sed ':i; $!N;  s/\n//; ti' | tr [A-Z] [a-z]`
+    MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with author assignature:" 8 60 "$MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS"`
+    edit_file "AUTHOR INITIALS" "$MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS" ~/.mkslackbuild
+
+    MK_EDITOR=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with editor command:" 8 60 "pico"`
+    edit_file "EDITOR" "$MK_EDITOR" ~/.mkslackbuild
+
+    MK_SOURCEDIR=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with sources directory:" 8 60 "\`pwd\`"`
+    edit_file "SOURCE DIR" "$MK_SOURCEDIR" ~/.mkslackbuild
+
+    if [ "$USER" != "root" ]; then
+        SLACKBUILDRC=`[ -e ~/.slackbuildrc ] && echo ~/.slackbuildrc || echo /etc/slackbuildrc`
+        MK_REPOS=`grep 'REPOS=' $SLACKBUILDRC | sed 's/REPOS=\(.*\)/\1/'`
+    else
+        SLACKBUILDRC=`su -c "[ -e ~/.slackbuildrc ] && echo ~/.slackbuildrc || echo /etc/slackbuildrc" 2>/dev/null`
+        MK_REPOS=`su -c "grep 'REPOS=' $SLACKBUILDRC | sed 's/REPOS=\(.*\)/\1/'" 2>/dev/null`
+    fi
+
+    MK_REPOS=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with binary repository directory:" 8 60 "$MK_REPOS"`
+    edit_file "REPOS DIR" "$MK_REPOS" ~/.mkslackbuild
+
+    MK_SLACKBUILD_DIR=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with binary repository directory:" 8 60 "$MK_SLACKBUILD_DIR"`
+    edit_file "SLACKBUILD DIR" "$MK_SLACKBUILD_DIR" ~/.mkslackbuild
+
+    MK_ARCH=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter default architecture to SlackBuild:" 8 60 "i468"`
+    edit_file "DEFAULT ARCH" "$MK_ARCH" ~/.mkslackbuild
+
+    MK_LIMITRATE=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter wget limit rate:" 8 60 "120k"`
+    edit_file "LIMIT RATE" "$MK_LIMITRATE" ~/.mkslackbuild
+}
+
+# Edit source URL
+function edit_url()
+{
+    MK_URL=${MK_URL:="http://downloads.sourceforge.net/"}
+    MK_URL=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with complite URL from source:" 8 60 "$MK_URL"`
+    [ $? -ne 0 ] && return 100
+}
+
+# Edit source name
+function edit_source_name()
+{
+    # Carrega nome do arquivo
+    MK_SRCNAME=`basename $MK_URL`
+    MK_SRCNAME=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with source file name:" 8 60 "$MK_SRCNAME"`
+    [ $? -ne 0 ] &&  return 100
+}
+
+# Edit MK_PKGNAME, MK_VERSION and MK_EXTENSION
+function edit_pkgname()
+{
+    # Remove nome, vers�o e extens�o do nome da fonte
+    MK_SRC_NAME=`echo $MK_SRCNAME | sed -r 's/(.*)-(.*)\.(.*\..*)$/\1/'`
+    MK_PKGNAME=`echo $MK_SRC_NAME | tr [A-Z_] [a-z\-]`
+    MK_VERSION=`echo $MK_SRCNAME | sed -r 's/(.*)-(.*)\.(.*\..*)$/\2/'`
+    MK_EXTENSION=`echo $MK_SRCNAME | sed -r 's/(.*)-(.*)\.(.*\..*)$/\3/'`
+
+    # Configura nome, vers�o e extens�o do pacote
+    ANS=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+        --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title "$MK_TITLE" \
+        --form "Check information below:" 14 52 7 \
+        "Source name:"  1 1 "$MK_SRC_NAME" 1 15 30 60 \
+        "Package name:" 3 1 "$MK_PKGNAME"  3 15 30 60 \
+        "Version:"      5 1 "$MK_VERSION"   5 15 30 60 \
+        "Extension:"    7 1 "$MK_EXTENSION" 7 15 30 60`
+    [ $? -ne 0 ] && return 100
+
+    MK_SRC_NAME=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $1}'`
+    MK_PKGNAME=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $2}'`
+    MK_VERSION=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $3}'`
+    MK_EXTENSION=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $4}'`
+}
+
+# Edit MK_DECOMPRESSOR and MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG
+function edit_decompress_arg()
+{
+    # Remove nome, vers�o e extens�o do nome da fonte
+    MK_DECOMPRESSOR=""
+    MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG=""
+
+    # Configura nome, vers�o e extens�o do pacote
+    ANS3=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+        --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title "$MK_TITLE" \
+        --form "Check information below:" 10 55 3 \
+        "Uncompress program:" 1 1 "$MK_DECOMPRESSOR"  1 23 25 60 \
+        "Uncompress test flag:" 3 1 "$MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG"   3 23 25 100`
+    [ $? -ne 0 ] && return 100
+
+    MK_DECOMPRESSOR=`echo $ANS3 | awk '{print $1}'`
+    MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG=`echo $ANS3 | awk '{print $2}'`
+}
+
+# Edit configure options
+function edit_configure()
+{
+    CONFIG_HELP=`mktemp -p /tmp/ config_$MK_PKGNAME.XXXXXX`
+
+    $MK_TMPSRC/configure --help > $CONFIG_HELP
+    config_help
+    #[ "$( cat $CONFIG_HELP  | egrep '/usr/local')" != "" ] && MK_PREFIX=/usr || MK_PREFIX=/opt/kde
+    MK_PREFIX="/usr"
+    MK_OPTIONS=""
+    local ANS0=1
+
+    while [ $ANS0 -eq 1 ]; do
+        local ANS1="7"
+        while [ $ANS1 -ne 0 ]; do
+            ANS1=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+                --cancel-label "Continue" --title "$MK_TITLE" \
+                --menu "Select one option" 0 0 0 \
+                1 "View ./configure --help" \
+                2 "View documentations" \
+                3 "PREFIX=$MK_PREFIX" \
+                4 "OPTIONS=$MK_OPTIONS" \
+                0 "Continue"`
+
+            case $ANS1 in
+                '1')
+                    config_help
+                ;;
+                '2')
+                    view_docs
+                ;;
+                '3')
+                    MK_PREFIX=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with prefix for install $MK_PKGNAME" 8 60 "$MK_PREFIX"`
+                ;;
+                '4')
+                    MK_OPTIONS=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with configure options for compile $MK_PKGNAME" 8 60 "$MK_OPTIONS"`
+                ;;
+                *)
+                    ANS1=0
+                ;;
+            esac
+        done
+
+        # Configure
+        dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title " Execute ./configure below? " --yesno "./configure --prefix=$MK_PREFIX $MK_OPTIONS" 6 70
+        if [ $? -eq 0 ]; then
+            (
+            cd $MK_TMPSRC
+            ./configure --prefix=$MK_PREFIX $MK_OPTIONS
+            )
+
+            echo -en "\nPress ENTER to continue"
+            read ANS0
+        fi
+
+        dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title " Configure line is ok? " --yesno "./configure --prefix=$MK_PREFIX $MK_OPTIONS" 6 70
+
+        ANS0=$?
+    done
+}
+
+# Show Documentations files
+function view_docs()
+{
+    local MENU=""
+    local SELECT=""
+    local ANS2=0
+
+    for i in $DOC_FILES; do
+        MENU="$MENU \"$i\" \"\" "
+    done
+
+    while [ $ANS2 -eq 0 ]; do
+        SELECT=`eval "dialog --stdout --backtitle \"Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]\" --cancel-label \"Continue\" --title \"$MK_TITLE\" --menu \"Select doc-file below:\" 20 45 13 $MENU"`
+        ANS2=$?
+        [ $ANS2 -eq 0 ] && view_file "File: $SELECT" $MK_TMPSRC/$SELECT
+    done
+}
+
+# Edit documentations files
+function edit_docfiles()
+{
+    [ -z $MK_TMPSRC ] && return 0
+
+    if [ -e $MK_TMPSRC ]; then
+        LIST=`( cd $MK_TMPSRC; find . -type f -maxdepth 1 | cut -c3- )`
+        DOCMENU=""
+        for i in $LIST; do
+            if [ "`echo NEWS TODO README AUTHORS INSTALL ChangeLog MAINTAINERS COPYING | grep $i`" != "" ]; then
+                DOCMENU="$DOCMENU $i \"\" on"
+            else
+                DOCMENU="$DOCMENU $i \"\" off"
+            fi
+        done
+        SELECTDOCS=`eval "dialog --stdout --separate-output --backtitle \"Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]\" --title \"$MK_TITLE\" --cancel-label \"Continue\" --checklist \"Select documentation files below:\" 20 45 13 $DOCMENU"`
+    fi
+
+    MK_DOCFILES="`echo $SELECTDOCS | sed ':i; N; s/\n/ /; bi'`"
+}
+
+# Edit compiler architecture
+function edit_arch()
+{
+    MK_ARCH=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild documentation files below:"  --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Set an architecture to compiler:" 8 45 $MK_ARCH`
+    [ $? -ne 0 ] && return 100
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Mount files
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Change string $1 to $2 in all files in the current directory
+function change_strings()
+{
+    [ $# -ne 2 ] && mk_exit 1
+    #[ -z "$2" ] && return 0
+    eval "grep -l \"\[\[$1\]\]\" *" | while read FILE; do
+        edit_file "$1" "$2" $FILE
+    done
+}
+
+# Build initial sections
+function start_build()
+{
+    change_strings "SLACKBUILD AUTHOR" "$MK_AUTHOR"
+    change_strings "SLACKBUILD AUTHOR INITIALS" $MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS
+    change_strings "SOURCE NAME" "$MK_SRC_NAME"
+    change_strings "PROGRAM NAME" "$MK_PKGNAME"
+    change_strings "PACKAGE NAME" "$MK_PKGNAME"
+    change_strings "DECOMPRESSOR" "$MK_DECOMPRESSOR"
+    change_strings "DECOMPRESSOR TEST FLAG" "$MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG"
+    change_strings "PROGRAM URL" "${MK_URL//$MK_SRCNAME}"
+    change_strings "ARCH" "$MK_ARCH"
+    change_strings "VERSION" $MK_VERSION
+    change_strings "SOURCE EXTENSION" ${MK_EXTENSION#tar.}
+    change_strings "DOWNLOAD FOLDER URL" "`dirname $MK_URL`"
+    if [ -z $MK_OPTIONS ]; then
+        change_strings "OTHER CONFIGURE ARGS" "\"\""
+    else
+        change_strings "OTHER CONFIGURE ARGS" "$MK_OPTIONS"
+    fi
+    change_strings "DOCUMENTATION FILES" "$MK_DOCFILES"
+    change_strings "PREFIX" "$MK_PREFIX"
+}
+
+# Mount final SlackBuild
+function mount_slackbuild()
+{
+    dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --infobox "SlackBuild save in $SLACKBUILD" 5 45
+
+    rm $SLACKBUILD 2>/dev/null
+#    [ ! -e `dirname $SLACKBUILD` ] && mkdir `dirname $SLACKBUILD`
+    for i in `seq 0 $MAXSECTION`; do
+        if [ "${SECTION_FLAG[i]}" = "all" -o "${SECTION_FLAG[i]}" = "on" ]; then
+            cat ${SECTION_NAME[i]}_$MK_PKGNAME.mkbuild >> $SLACKBUILD
+            echo "" >> $SLACKBUILD
+        fi
+    done
+    chmod +x $SLACKBUILD
+}
+
+# Mount SlackBuild to section $1
+function mount_slackbuild_to()
+{
+    if [ $# -eq 1 ]; then
+        END_SECTION=$1
+        dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --infobox "SlackBuild save in $SLACKBUILD.test" 5 45
+
+        rm $SLACKBUILD.test 2>/dev/null
+        let i=0
+        while [ $i -le $END_SECTION ]; do
+            if [ "${SECTION_FLAG[i]}" = "all" -o "${SECTION_FLAG[i]}" = "on" ]; then
+                cat ${SECTION_NAME[i]}_$MK_PKGNAME.mkbuild >> $SLACKBUILD.test
+                echo "" >> $SLACKBUILD
+            fi
+            let i++
+        done
+        echo "" >> $SLACKBUILD
+    fi
+}
+
+# Make files section
+function make_file_sections()
+{
+    THIS_MODEL=$1
+
+    # Create SlackBuilds-sections files
+    rm *_$MK_PKGNAME.mkbuild 2>/dev/null
+
+    # Make files section
+    INDEX=0
+    while read ITEM; do
+        SECTION_NAME[INDEX]="$ITEM"
+
+        AUX=${SB_SECTION[$INDEX,0]}_${MK_PKGNAME}
+        SECTION_FILE=${SECTION_NAME[INDEX]}_${MK_PKGNAME}.mkbuild
+        rm $SECTION_FILE 2>/dev/null
+
+        STRING=$ITEM
+        # Save section status flag
+        SECTION_FLAG[INDEX]=`get_status "$STRING" $THIS_MODEL`
+
+        # Create sections files
+        print_lines "$STRING" $THIS_MODEL  > $SECTION_FILE
+        let INDEX++
+    done < <( cat $THIS_MODEL | grep '^<[a-z_0-9]\+>' | sed 's/<\(.*\)>.*$/\1/' )
+
+    let INDEX--
+    MAXSECTION=$INDEX
+    md5sum *.mkbuild > md5sum
+}
+
+function get_source_dialog()
+{
+    if [ ! -e $MK_SOURCE ]; then
+        dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+            --title "$MK_TITLE" --yesno " Download $MK_SRCNAME? " 5 50
+        if [ $? -eq 0 ]; then
+            download_url
+        else
+            select_source
+            [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+        fi
+    fi
+}
+
+
+function test_source()
+{
+    local TEST=1
+    local ANS=0
+
+    while [ $TEST -ne 0 ]; do
+        dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --infobox "Test source with $MK_DECOMPRESSOR $MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG $MK_SOURCE" 5 50
+        $MK_DECOMPRESSOR $MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG $MK_SOURCE
+        TEST=$?
+        if [ $TEST -ne 0 ]; then
+            dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --yesno "Source uncompress error. Download source again?" 6 50
+            if [ $? -eq 0 ]; then
+                rm $MK_SOURCE
+                get_source_dialog
+                [ $? -eq 100 ] return 100
+            else
+                TEST=0
+            fi
+        fi
+    done
+}
+
+# Configure test source variables
+function set_source_test()
+{
+    MK_SOURCE=$MK_SOURCEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME/$MK_SRCNAME
+    if [ "$MK_EXTENSION" = "tar.gz" -o "$MK_EXTENSION" = "gz" -o "$MK_EXTENSION" = "tgz" ]; then
+        MK_DECOMPRESSOR=gunzip
+        MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG="-t"
+    elif [ "$MK_EXTENSION" = "tar.bz2" -o "$MK_EXTENSION" = "bz2" ]; then
+        MK_DECOMPRESSOR=bunzip2
+        MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG="-t"
+    else
+        edit_decompress_arg
+        [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+    fi
+}
+
+# Enable MD5 or GPG signature check
+function edit_signature()
+{
+    # GPG and MD5 test
+    local ANS=0
+
+    ANS=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+        --title "$MK_TITLE" --menu "Select code validate type:" 0 0 0 \
+        "1" "gpg signature" \
+        "2" "md5sum" \
+        "0" "none"`
+
+    case $ANS in
+        1)
+            edit_gpg
+        ;;
+        2)
+            edit_md5sum
+        ;;
+    esac
+}
+
+# Enable GPG signature check
+function edit_gpg()
+{
+    dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+        --title "$MK_TITLE" --msgbox "Enter with gpg minimized signing key." 5 50
+    $EDITOR $MK_GPGFILEKEY
+}
+
+# Enable MD5SUM signature check
+function edit_md5sum()
+{
+    echo "none"
+}
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Main functions
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Create new SlackBuild
+function create_slackbuild()
+{
+    # Config package URL
+    edit_url
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Source Name
+    edit_source_name
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Package name, version and extension
+    edit_pkgname
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Compile arch
+    edit_arch
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Set source test variables
+    set_source_test
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Get source file
+    MK_SOURCE=$MK_SOURCEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME/$MK_SRCNAME
+    get_source_dialog
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Test source
+    test_source
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Uncompress source
+    unpkg_source
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # GPG and MD5 test
+#    edit_signature
+
+    # Configure compiler options if exist
+    if [ -e $MK_TMPSRC/configure ]; then
+        edit_configure
+    fi
+
+    # Edit documentation list
+    edit_docfiles
+
+    # Create files sections
+    make_file_sections $SB_MODEL
+
+    # SlackBuild script name
+    SLACKBUILD=$BASEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME.SlackBuild
+
+    # mkSlackBuild script name
+    # FIXME: make an MODELDIR???
+    MKSLACKBUILD=$BASEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME.mkslackbuild
+
+    mk_slackdesc > slackdesc_$MK_PKGNAME.mkbuild
+
+    # Edit builds sections
+    start_build
+
+    # Main-Menu
+    edit_menu
+}
+
+# Open mkslackbuild dialog input
+function open_mkslackbuild_dialog()
+{
+    MKSLACKBUILD=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+            --title " Select source file name: " \
+            --fselect "$BASEDIR/" 10 70`
+    [ $? -ne 0 ] && return 100
+
+    open_mkslackbuild
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] || return 100
+}
+
+# Open mkslackbuild
+function open_mkslackbuild()
+{
+    if [ -f $MKSLACKBUILD ]; then
+        # Start defaults variables
+        source $MKSLACKBUILD
+
+        # SlackBuild scrit name
+        SLACKBUILD=$BASEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME.SlackBuild
+
+        # Create files sections
+        make_file_sections $MKSLACKBUILD
+
+        [ -e $BASEDIR/slack-required ] && ( cp $BASEDIR/slack-required $DEPENDENCY_LIST )
+
+    else
+        dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+            --title "$MK_TITLE" --msgbox "$MKSLACKBUILD most be a mkslackbuild file" 6 45
+        return 100
+    fi
+
+    # CHECK:
+    # Set source test vadiables
+    set_source_test
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Get source file
+    get_source_dialog
+    [ $? -eq 100 ] && return 100
+
+    # Test source
+    test_source
+
+    # Uncompress source
+    unpkg_source
+}
+
+# Save mkSlackBuild
+function save_mkslackbuild()
+{
+    dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --infobox "mkSlackBuild save in $MKSLACKBUILD" 5 30
+
+    rm $MKSLACKBUILD 2>/dev/null
+    echo '#!/bin/bash' > $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo -e "# mkSlackBuild version $MK_VERSION\n" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_SRC_NAME=\"$MK_SRC_NAME\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_SRCNAME=\"$MK_SRCNAME\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_PKGNAME=\"$MK_PKGNAME\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_URL=\"$MK_URL\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_AUTHOR=\"$MK_AUTHOR\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS=\"$MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_VERSION=\"$MK_VERSION\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_EXTENSION=\"$MK_EXTENSION\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_DECOMPRESSOR=\"$MK_DECOMPRESSOR\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG=\"$MK_DECOMPRESSOR_TEST_FLAG\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_DOCFILES=\"$MK_DOCFILES\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_OPTIONS=\"$MK_OPTIONS\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_PREFIX=\"$MK_PREFIX\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo "MK_MD5SUM_EXT=\"$MK_MD5SUM_EXT\"" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    echo -e "return 0\n\n" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+
+    for i in `seq 0 $MAXSECTION`; do
+        echo "<${SECTION_NAME[i]}> ${SECTION_FLAG[i]}" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+        cat ${SECTION_NAME[i]}_$MK_PKGNAME.mkbuild >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+        echo "</${SECTION_NAME[i]}>" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+        echo "" >> $MKSLACKBUILD
+    done
+
+    [ -s $DEPENDENCY_LIST ] && cp $DEPENDENCY_LIST $BASEDIR/slack-required
+}
+
+# Edit Menu
+function edit_menu()
+{
+    ANSE=0
+    while [ $ANSE -ne 1 ]; do
+        # Create main-menu string
+        EDITMENU=""
+        for i in `seq 0 $MAXSECTION`; do
+            #echo "${SECTION_NAME[i]} ${SECTION_FLAG[i]} ${SECTION_FILE[i]}"
+            EDITMENU="$EDITMENU ${SECTION_NAME[i]} ${SECTION_FLAG[i]}"
+        done
+
+       SELECT=`eval "dialog --stdout --backtitle \"Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]\" --ok-label \"Edit\" --cancel-label \"Main Menu\" --title \"$MK_TITLE\" --menu \"Select one section to edit\" 20 40 13 $EDITMENU"`
+        ANSE=$?
+        if [ $ANSE -ne 1 ]; then
+            STATUS=`mk_status $SELECT`
+            if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+                echo "Section name error..."
+                mk_exit 1
+            fi
+            FLAG=`echo $STATUS | awk '{print $1}'`
+            INDEX=`echo $STATUS | awk '{print $2}'`
+            if [ "$FLAG" = "on" ]; then
+                SECTION_FLAG[$INDEX]=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --radiolist "Change $SELECT status?" 0 0 0 "on" "enable section" "on" "off" "desable section" "off"`
+            elif [ "$FLAG" = "off" ]; then
+                SECTION_FLAG[$INDEX]=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --radiolist "Change $SELECT status?" 0 0 0 "on" "enable section" "off" "off" "desable section" "on"`
+            fi
+            if [ $? -eq 0 ]; then
+                if [ "${SECTION_FLAG[$INDEX]}" = "on" -o "${SECTION_FLAG[$INDEX]}" = "all" ]; then
+                    if [ "$SELECT" = "md5sum_download_and_check" ]; then
+                        md5sum_edit ${SELECT}_${MK_PKGNAME}.mkbuild
+#                    elif [ "$SELECT" = "gpg_signature_check" ]; then
+#                        gpg_edit
+                    else
+                        $MK_EDITOR ${SELECT}_${MK_PKGNAME}.mkbuild
+                    fi
+                fi
+            else
+                SECTION_FLAG[$INDEX]=$FLAG
+            fi
+        fi
+    done
+}
+
+# Edit md5sum
+function md5sum_edit()
+{
+    local SELECT=0
+    local FILE=$1
+
+    if ( grep '\[\[MD5SUM EXTENSION\]\]' $FILE &>/dev/null ); then
+        SELECT=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --radiolist "Select one option" 0 0 0 "1" "$MK_SRC_NAME-$MK_VERSION.[[MD5SUM EXT]]" on "2" "$MK_SRCNAME.[[MD5SUM EXT]]" off  "3" "MK5SUM CODE" off`
+
+        case $SELECT in
+            1)
+                MK_MD5SUM_EXT="md5sum"
+                MK_MD5SUM_EXT=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with md5sum extension:" 8 50 $MK_MD5SUM_EXT`
+                edit_file "MD5SUM EXTENSION" "$MK_MD5SUM_EXT" $FILE
+            ;;
+            2)
+                MK_MD5SUM_EXT="md5"
+                MK_MD5SUM_EXT=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with md5sum extension:" 8 50 $MK_MD5SUM_EXT`
+                eval "sed 's/^MD5SUM_FILE.*$/MD5SUM_FILE=\$SRC.$MK_MD5SUM_EXT/' $FILE > $AUX_TMP"
+                cp $AUX_TMP $FILE
+            ;;
+            3)
+                MK_MD5SUM_CODE=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter with md5sum extension:" 8 50 $MK_MD5SUM_CODE`
+                sed '1! d' $FILE > $AUX_TMP
+                sed -n '2, /^fi/ p' $FILE | while read LINE; do echo "#$LINE" >> $AUX_TMP; done
+                sed -n '/^fi/, $ { /^fi/ b; p; }' $FILE >> $AUX_TMP
+                eval "sed 's/^MD5SUM_SRC.*/MD5SUM_SRC=\"$MK_MD5SUM_CODE\"/' $AUX_TMP > $FILE"
+            ;;
+        esac
+    fi
+
+    $MK_EDITOR $FILE
+}
+
+# Test Menu
+function test_menu()
+{
+    local ANST=0
+    local SECTION=0
+    local EDITMENU=""
+
+    # Create main-menu string
+    for i in `seq 0 $MAXSECTION`; do
+        if [ "${SECTION_FLAG[i]}" = "all" -o "${SECTION_FLAG[i]}" = "on" ]; then
+            EDITMENU="$EDITMENU $i ${SECTION_NAME[i]}"
+        fi
+    done
+
+    EDITMENU="all  \"SlackBuild\" $EDITMENU"
+
+    while [ "$ANST" != "1" ]; do
+        SECTION=`eval "dialog --stdout --backtitle \"Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]\" --cancel-label \"Exit\" --title \"$MK_TITLE\" --menu \"Select section to test end\" 20 40 13 $EDITMENU"`
+        ANST=$?
+
+        if [ $ANST -ne 1 ]; then
+            [ "$SECTION" = "all" ] && SECTION=$MAXSECTION
+            mount_slackbuild_to $SECTION
+
+            # FIXME:  -> sintaxe check
+            clear
+            echo "---------------------------------------------------------"
+            echo "                 --= SINTAX CHECK =--"
+            sh -n $SLACKBUILD.test
+            if [ $? -eq 0 ]; then
+                echo "                     --= 0K =--"
+                DEBUG=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+                    --cancel-label "no debug" --title "$MK_TITLE" \
+                    --menu "Select debug level" 10 35 3 \
+                    "-x"    "Simple debug" \
+                    "-xv"   "More information" \
+                    "none"  "No debug"`
+
+                [ $? -ne 0 -o "$DEBUG" = "none" ] && DEBUG=""
+
+                clear
+                echo "---------------------------------------------------------"
+                echo "                 --= START BUILDING =--"
+                if [ "$USER" != "root" ]; then
+                    su -c "( sh $DEBUG $SLACKBUILD.test )"
+                else
+                    ( sh $DEBUG $SLACKBUILD.test )
+                fi
+                echo "---------------------------------------------------------"
+                echo "                      --= END =--"
+
+                echo -n "Enter 1 to end test: "
+                read ANST
+            else
+                echo "Script error..."
+                read ANST
+            fi
+        fi
+    done
+}
+
+# Dependency Menu
+function menu_dependency()
+{
+    local ANSD=11
+    while [ $ANSD -ne 0 ]; do
+        ANSD=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+            --cancel-label "Main Menu" --title "$MK_TITLE" --menu "Main Menu:" 0 0 0 \
+            "1" "Edit dependency list" \
+            "2" "Test dependency list"`
+
+        [ $? -ne 0 ] && ANSD=0
+
+        case $ANSD in
+            1)
+                edit_dependency
+            ;;
+            2)
+                test_dependency
+            ;;
+        esac
+    done
+}
+
+# Dependency list edit
+function edit_dependency()
+{
+    if [ ! -s $DEPENDENCY_LIST ]; then
+        echo -e "# Dependency list to $MK_PKGNAME\n# \n# dependency [condition] [version]]\n" > $DEPENDENCY_LIST
+    fi
+
+    $MK_EDITOR $DEPENDENCY_LIST
+}
+
+# Check dependency and comment not found dependencies
+function test_dependency()
+{
+    local DEP_LIST=""
+
+    if [ -s $DEPENDENCY_LIST ]; then
+        for i in `grep '^[^#]' $DEPENDENCY_LIST  | awk '{print $1}' | sort | uniq`; do
+            if [ `ls /var/log/packages/$i-[0-9]* 2>/dev/null` ]; then
+                DEP_LIST="$DEP_LIST $i \"intalled\" off"
+            else
+                DEP_LIST="$DEP_LIST $i \"unintalled\" on"
+            fi
+        done
+
+        DEP_SELECT=`eval "dialog --stdout --separate-output --backtitle \"Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]\" --title \"$MK_TITLE\" --checklist \"Select packages to remove from dependency list:\" 0 0 0 $DEP_LIST"`
+        # 20 45 13
+
+        for i in $DEP_SELECT; do
+            eval "sed 's/$i$/#$i/' $DEPENDENCY_LIST > $AUX_TMP "
+            eval "sed 's/$i /#$i /' $AUX_TMP > $DEPENDENCY_LIST"
+            eval "sed 's/$i\t/#$i\t/' $DEPENDENCY_LIST > $AUX_TMP"
+            cp $AUX_TMP $DEPENDENCY_LIST
+        done
+    fi
+}
+
+# Add/commit one SlackBuild
+function commit_SlackBuild()
+{
+    # Mount SlackBuild
+    mount_slackbuild
+    MK_TITLE="Commit SlackBuild"
+
+    # Find SlackBuild
+    SB_PATH=`find $MK_SLACKBUILD_DIR -iname $MK_PKGNAME`
+
+    # Change to SlackBuild directory
+    cd $MK_SLACKBUILD_DIR
+
+    # Check for new SlackBuild
+    if [ -z $SB_PATH ]; then
+        # New SlackBuild
+        AUX=""
+        while [ -z $AUX ]; do
+            dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --infobox "lynx -dump http://gentoo-portage.com/Search?search=$MK_PKGNAME. Wait..." 0 0
+            AUX=`lynx -dump http://gentoo-portage.com/Search?search=$MK_PKGNAME | sed -n '/Results:/,+1 { /Results:/ b ; p }' | head --lines=1 | tr -d " "`
+            # Default directory
+            if [ -z $AUX ]; then
+                dialog --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --yesno "Net search error. Try again?" 0 0
+                if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+                    AUX="/others/unclass"
+                    SB_PATH=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter dir-name to SlackBuild from $MK_PKGNAME:" 8 60 "$AUX"`
+                fi
+            else
+                SB_PATH="`dirname $AUX | tr - /`/`basename $AUX`"
+            fi
+        done
+        # Make directory and add SlackBuild to svn
+        svn mkdir $SB_PATH
+        cp $BASEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME.SlackBuild $SB_PATH/
+        svn add $SB_PATH/$MK_PKGNAME.SlackBuild
+        if [ -e $BASEDIR/slack-required ]; then
+            cp $BASEDIR/slack-required $SB_PATH/
+            svn add $SB_PATH/slack-required
+        fi
+    else
+        echo "cp $BASEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME.SlackBuild $SB_PATH/"
+        if [ -e $BASEDIR/slack-required ]; then
+            cp $BASEDIR/slack-required $SB_PATH/
+        fi
+    fi
+
+    # Commit SlackBuild
+    MK_MSG=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" --title "$MK_TITLE" --inputbox "Enter message do commit command:" 8 60`
+    svn commit -m "$MK_PKGNAME: $MK_MSG"
+
+    cd $BASEDIR
+
+    echo -e "\nPress ENTER to continue."
+    read ANS1
+}
+
+# Compile SlackBuild and install
+function compile_install()
+{
+    local ANS=""
+    # Mount SlackBuild
+    mount_slackbuild
+
+    # Clean temporary file
+    echo " " > $AUX_TMP
+
+    if [ "$USER" = "root" ]; then
+        # Root user
+        # Compile pid
+        PID=`exec-slackbuild $SLACKBUILD $AUX_TMP`
+
+        # Tail messages
+        tail -s .1 --pid=$PID -f $AUX_TMP
+
+        # Package name
+        PACKAGE=`tail -10 $AUX_TMP | grep "^Moving $MK_PKGNAME-[0-9].*\.\.\.$" | awk '{ print $2 }' | grep "$MK_PKGNAME-.*\.tgz$"`
+
+        # Install package
+        if [ ! -z $PACKAGE ]; then
+            installpkg $MK_REPOS/$PACKAGE
+        else
+            echo -e "\nBuild error!"
+        fi
+    else
+        # Commum users
+        # Compile pid
+        PID=`su -c "exec-slackbuild $SLACKBUILD $AUX_TMP"`
+
+        # Tail messages
+        tail -s .1 --pid=$PID -f $AUX_TMP
+
+        # Package name
+        PACKAGE=`tail -10 $AUX_TMP | grep "^Moving $MK_PKGNAME-[0-9].*\.\.\.$" | awk '{ print $2 }' | grep "$MK_PKGNAME-.*\.tgz$"`
+
+        # Install package
+        if [ ! -z $PACKAGE ]; then
+            su -c "installpkg $MK_REPOS/$PACKAGE"
+        else
+            echo -e "\nBuild error!"
+        fi
+    fi
+
+    echo -e "\nPress ENTER to continue."
+    read ANS
+}
+
+#
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#                        Start Program
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#
+# Start variables
+LANG=en_US
+BASEDIR=`pwd`
+AUX_TMP=`mktemp -p  /tmp/ aux_tmp.XXXXXX`
+SLACKDESC_TMP=`mktemp -p  /tmp/ slackdesc_tmp.XXXXXX`
+SLACKDESC_LEN=77
+DEPENDENCY_LIST=`mktemp -p  /tmp/ slack-required.XXXXXX`
+if [ -z $SB_MODEL ]; then
+    if [ -e ~/.generic.mkSlackBuild ]; then
+        SB_MODEL=~/.generic.mkSlackBuild
+    elif [ -e /etc/simplepkg/generic.mkSlackBuild ]; then
+        SB_MODEL=/etc/simplepkg/generic.mkSlackBuild
+    else
+        echo "SlackBuild model (generic.mkSlackBuild) not found"
+        mk_exit 0
+    fi
+fi
+[ $# -ne 0 ] && MKSLACKBUILD=${1//.*}.mkslackbuild
+
+# Clear dialog
+dialog --clear
+
+# Load/create personal definitions
+if [ ! -e ~/.mkslackbuild ]; then
+    ( cat << EOF > ~/.mkslackbuild
+#!/bin/bash
+# mkslackbuild definitions
+#
+MK_AUTHOR="[[AUTHOR NAME]]"
+MK_AUTHOR_INITIALS="[[AUTHOR INITIALS]]"
+MK_EDITOR=[[EDITOR]]
+MK_REPOS=[[REPOS DIR]]
+MK_LIMITRATE=[[LIMIT RATE]]
+MK_SOURCEDIR=[[SOURCE DIR]]
+MK_ARCH=[[DEFAULT ARCH]]
+MK_SLACKBUILD_DIR=[[SLACKBUILD DIR]]
+#SB_MODEL="my_model"
+EOF
+)
+fi
+source ~/.mkslackbuild
+MK_SOURCEDIR=${MK_SOURCEDIR:=$BASEDIR}
+MK_ARCH=${MK_ARCH:="i486"}
+
+# Config Author
+if [ "$MK_AUTHOR" = "[[AUTHOR NAME]]" ]; then
+    MK_TITLE=" Personal Config "
+    edit_author
+    MK_TITLE=""
+fi
+
+if [ ! -z $MKSLACKBUILD ]; then
+    MK_TITLE=" Open mkSlackBuild "
+    open_mkslackbuild
+fi
+
+MK_TITLE=""
+
+ANS0=11
+while [ $ANS0 -ne 0 ]; do
+    if [ -z $MK_PKGNAME ]; then
+        ANS0=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+        --cancel-label "Exit" --menu "Main Menu:" 0 0 0 \
+        "1" "Create New SlackBuild" \
+        "2" "Open mkSlackBuild" \
+        "0" "Exit"`
+
+        if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+            ANS0=0
+        fi
+
+        case $ANS0 in
+            1)
+                MK_TITLE=" Create SlackBuild "
+                create_slackbuild
+                [ $? -eq 100 ] && MK_PKGNAME=""
+            ;;
+            2)
+                MK_TITLE=" Open mkSlackBuild "
+                open_mkslackbuild_dialog
+                [ $? -eq 100 ] && MK_PKGNAME=""
+            ;;
+            *)
+                echo "Exit..."
+                ANS0=0
+            ;;
+        esac
+         MK_TITLE=""
+    else
+        ANS0=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "Make SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$MK_PKGNAME]" \
+        --cancel-label "Exit" --menu "Main Menu:" 0 0 0 \
+        "1" "Edit SlackBuild sections" \
+        "2" "Edit dependency list" \
+        "3" "Test SlackBuild script" \
+        "4" "View Doc-Files" \
+        "5" "Save SlackBuild and mkslackbuild" \
+        "6" "Compile/install package" \
+        "7" "Remove package" \
+        "8" "Commit SlackBuild to Sarava"`
+
+        if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+            ANS0=0
+        fi
+        case $ANS0 in
+            1) # Edit Sections
+                MK_TITLE=" Edit Menu "
+                edit_menu
+            ;;
+            2) # Dependency Menu
+                MK_TITLE=" Dependency Menu "
+                menu_dependency
+            ;;
+            3) # Test Script
+                MK_TITLE=" Test Menu "
+                test_menu
+            ;;
+            4) # View Doc-Files
+                MK_TITLE=" View Docs "
+                view_docs
+            ;;
+            5) # Save SlackBuild
+                save_mkslackbuild
+                mount_slackbuild
+            ;;
+            6) # Compile/install package
+                compile_install
+            ;;
+            7) # Remove package
+                if [ "$USER" = "root" ]; then
+                    removepkg $MK_PKGNAME
+                else
+                    su -c "( removepkg $MK_PKGNAME )"
+                fi
+                echo -e "\nPress ENTER to continue."
+                read ANS1
+            ;;
+            8) # Commit SlackBuild to Sarava
+                commit_SlackBuild
+            ;;
+            0) # Exit
+                ANS0=0
+            ;;
+        esac
+        MK_TITLE=""
+    fi
+done
+
+# Check changes
+if [ ! -z $MK_PKGNAME ]; then
+    md5sum -c md5sum
+    if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+        MKSLACKBUILD=$BASEDIR/$MK_PKGNAME.mkslackbuild
+        save_mkslackbuild
+        mount_slackbuild
+    fi
+fi
+
+mk_exit 0
+# _________________________________END_______________________________
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/mkjail b/branches/0.6/src/mkjail
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..f6c935c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/mkjail
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#          
+# mkjail v0.4: chroot jail maker
+#
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | GPL
+#
+#  Mkjail is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Mkjail is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your `basename $0` installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+function usage {
+
+  echo "usage: [ARCH=arch] [VERSION=version] [ROOT=/otherroot] $BASENAME <jail-name> [template]"
+  exit 1
+
+}
+
+function exec_post_install_scripts {
+
+  # exec post installation scripts
+  # usage: exec_post_install_script <jail-root> <jail-name>
+
+  local list
+
+  if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  echo "$BASENAME: executing template scripts..."
+  if [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.s" ]; then
+    for file in $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/*; do
+      if [ -x "$file" ]; then
+        $file $1 $2
+      fi
+   done
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function jailist_update {
+
+  # update the jail list file
+  # usage: jailist_update <jail-path>
+
+  if [ "$ADD_TO_JAIL_LIST" == "1" ]; then
+    touch $JAIL_LIST
+    if ! grep -q -e "^$1\$" $JAIL_LIST; then
+      echo $1 >> $JAIL_LIST
+    fi
+  fi
+
+}
+
+if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+  usage
+else
+  server="$1"
+  eval_config $BASENAME -u
+fi
+
+if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+  search_template $2
+  result="$?"
+else
+  search_default_template
+  result="$?"
+fi
+
+if [ "$result" != "0" ]; then
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+TEMPLATE="$TEMPLATE_BASE.template"
+
+if [ ! -d "$JAIL_ROOT/$server" ]; then
+  mkdir -p $JAIL_ROOT/$server
+else
+  if [ ! -z "`ls $JAIL_ROOT/$server | grep -v 'lost+found'`" ]; then
+    echo $BASENAME: error: folder $JAIL_ROOT/$server already exists and seens to be not empty
+    echo $BASENAME: probably the jail $1 already exists
+    exit 1
+  fi
+fi
+
+echo "$BASENAME: instaling packages into $JAIL_ROOT/$server using $TEMPLATE..."
+
+install_packages
+copy_template_files $JAIL_ROOT/$server
+set_jail_perms $JAIL_ROOT/$server
+jailist_update $JAIL_ROOT/$server
+exec_post_install_scripts $JAIL_ROOT $server
+
+echo $BASENAME: done creating $server jail
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/rebuildpkg b/branches/0.6/src/rebuildpkg
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..6d3d10c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/rebuildpkg
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# rebuildpkg: build a package from a /var/log/packages entry
+#
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | gpl
+#
+#  Rebuildpkg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Rebuildpkg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+TMP="/tmp"
+
+function usage {
+  echo "usage: ROOT=/otherroot `basename $0` <package-name>"
+}
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your `basename $0` installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+  usage
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+pack="$1"
+
+for file in `ls $ROOT/var/log/packages/$pack*`; do
+  if [[ "`package_name $file.tgz`" == "$pack" ]]; then
+    package_file="$file"
+    break
+  fi
+done
+
+if [ -z "$package_file" ]; then
+  echo error: package $pack does not exist
+  exit 1
+fi 
+
+if [ -d "$TMP/package-$pack" ]; then
+  rm -rf $TMP/package-$pack
+fi
+
+mkdir $TMP/package-$pack
+cd $TMP/package-$pack
+
+for file in `grep -v -e "^PACKAGE NAME:" -e "^UNCOMPRESSED PACKAGE SIZE:"    \
+                     -e "^COMPRESSED PACKAGE SIZE:" -e "^PACKAGE LOCATION:"  \
+                     -e "^PACKAGE DESCRIPTION:" -e "^$pack:" -e "^FILE LIST:" $package_file`; do
+
+  if [ "$file" != "install" ] && [ "$file" != "install/slack-desc" ] && [ "$file" != "install/doinst,sh" ]; then
+    if [ -d /$file ]; then
+      mkdir -p $TMP/package-$pack/$file
+    elif [ -f /$file ]; then
+      cp /$file $TMP/package-$pack/$file
+    else
+      echo file /$file was not found, please add it manually, exploding and making the package again
+    fi
+  fi
+
+done
+
+mkdir $TMP/package-$pack/install
+grep "^$pack:" $package_file > $TMP/package-$pack/install/slack-desc
+
+package_name="`grep "PACKAGE NAME:" $package_file | awk '{ print $3 }'`"
+
+if [ -f "$ROOT/var/log/scripts/$package_name" ]; then
+  cp $ROOT/var/log/scripts/$package_name $TMP/package-$pack/install/doinst.sh
+fi
+
+makepkg $package_name.tgz
+mv $package_name.tgz $TMP/
+echo "done: package rebuilt and stored at $TMP/$package_name.tgz"
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/repos b/branches/0.6/src/repos
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..e4a17ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/repos
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# repos script got from
+# http://software.jaos.org/BUILD/slapt-get/FAQ.html#slgFAQ17
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# any later version.
+#
+# Changes by rhatto at riseup.net to fit http://slack.sarava.org needs
+#
+
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+REPOS_CONF="/etc/simplepkg/repos.conf"
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your $BASENAME installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+function usage {
+
+  echo "`basename $0` [pkg [file]|all|new|svnmeta|PACKAGESTXT|FILELIST|MD5]"
+
+}
+
+function do_all {
+
+  for pkg in `find . -type f -name '*.tgz' -print`; do
+    gen_meta $pkg
+  done
+  $0 PACKAGESTXT
+  $0 FILELIST
+  $0 MD5
+
+}
+
+# ---------------------------------
+#              main
+# ---------------------------------
+
+case "$1" in
+  pkg)
+      if [ -n "$2" ]; then
+        gen_meta $2
+      else
+        usage
+      fi
+    ;;
+    all)
+      do_all
+    ;;
+    new)
+      for pkg in `find . -type f -name '*.tgz' -print`; do
+        if [ ! -f ${pkg%tgz}meta ]; then
+          gen_meta $pkg
+        fi
+      done
+    ;;
+    svnmeta)
+      svn_add_meta
+    ;;
+    PACKAGESTXT)
+      gen_packages_txt .
+      gen_packages_txt patches
+    ;;
+    FILELIST)
+      gen_filelist
+      gen_patches_filelist patches
+    ;;
+    MD5)
+      gen_md5_checksums .
+      gen_md5_checksums patches
+    ;;
+    usage)
+      usage
+    ;;
+    *)
+      do_all
+      svn_add_meta
+    ;;
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/simplaret b/branches/0.6/src/simplaret
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..00b0c25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/simplaret
@@ -0,0 +1,1045 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# simplaret v0.2: simplepkg's retrieval tool
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | gpl
+#
+#  Simplaret is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Simplaret is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+REPOS_CONF="/etc/simplepkg/repos.conf"
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your $BASENAME installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+function simplaret_usage {
+
+  echo "usage: [ARCH=otherarch] [VERSION=otherversion] $BASENAME <OPTION> package-name"
+  echo -e "\t OPTIONS: --install, --update, --upgrade, --search, --get, --get-patches, --purge, --remove"
+  exit 1
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_get_index {
+
+  for file in `simplaret_metafiles`; do
+    simplaret_download $1 $file $2 --no-verbose
+  done
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_backup_index {
+
+  for file in `simplaret_metafiles`; do
+    if [ -f "$1/$file" ]; then
+      mv $1/$file $1/$file.old
+    fi
+  done
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_check_index {
+
+  for file in `simplaret_metafiles`; do
+    if [ ! -f "$1/$file" ] && [ -f "$1/$file" ]; then
+      echo restoring old $file to $1...
+      mv $1/$file.old $1/$file
+     else
+      rm -f $1/$file.old
+    fi
+  done
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_download {
+
+  # download a file from a repo to a folder
+  # usage: simplaret <repository_url> <package> <destination-folder> [--no-verbose]
+
+  local protocol file
+  local wget_timeout wget_passive_ftp wget_verbose
+  local curl_timeout curl_passive_ftp curl_verbose
+  local ncftpget_timeout ncftpget_passive_ftp
+
+  protocol="`echo $1 | cut -d : -f 1`"
+  file="`basename $2`"
+
+  if [ ! -d "$3" ]; then
+    mkdir -p $3
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -z "$CONNECT_TIMEOUT" ] || [ "$CONNECT_TIMEOUT" != "0" ]; then
+    wget_timeout="--timeout $CONNECT_TIMEOUT"
+    ncftpget_timeout="-t $CONNECT_TIMEOUT"
+    curl_timeout="--connect-timeout $CONNECT_TIMEOUT"
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$4" == "--no-verbose" ]; then
+    wget_verbose="--no-verbose"
+    curl_verbose="-#"
+    echo ""
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$protocol" == "http" ]; then
+
+    echo Getting $1/$file:
+    if [ "$HTTP_TOOL" == "wget" ]; then
+      wget $wget_timeout $wget_verbose $1/$2 -O $3/$file
+    elif [ "$HTTP_TOOL" == "curl" ]; then
+      curl $curl_timeout $curl_verbose $1/$2 > $3/$file
+    else
+      echo $BASENAME: error: invalid value for config variable HTTP_TOOL: $HTTP_TOOL
+      echo $BASENAME: please check your config file $CONF
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+  elif [ "$protocol" == "ftp" ]; then
+    echo Getting $1/$file:
+
+    if [ "$PASSIVE_FTP" == "1" ]; then
+      wget_passive_ftp="--passive-ftp"
+      ncftpget_passive_ftp="-F"
+      curl_passive_ftp="--ftp-pasv"
+    fi 
+
+    if [ "$FTP_TOOL" == "ncftpget" ]; then
+      ncftpget -c $ncftpget_timeout $ncftpget_passive_ftp $1/$2 > $3/$file
+    elif [ "$FTP_TOOL" == "wget" ]; then
+      wget $wget_timeout $wget_passive_ftp $wget_verbose $1/$2 -O $3/$file
+    elif [ "$FTP_TOOL" == "curl" ]; then
+      curl $curl_timeout $curl_passive_ftp $curl_verbose $1/$2 > $3/$file
+    else
+      echo $BASENAME: error: invalid value for config variable FTP_TOOL: $FTP_TOOL
+      echo $BASENAME: please check your config file $CONF
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+  elif [ "$protocol" == "file" ]; then
+
+    url="`echo $1 | sed -e 's/file:\/\///'`"
+    if [ -f "$3/$file" ]; then
+      rm -f $3/$file
+    fi
+    echo -n "Copying $url/$2..."
+    if [ -f "$url/$2" ]; then
+      cp $url/$2 $3/$file 2> /dev/null
+    fi
+    if [ -f "$3/$file" ]; then
+      echo " done."
+    else
+      echo " failed."
+    fi
+
+  else
+
+    echo $BASENAME error: invalid protocol $protocol
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_repository {
+
+  # return a repository definition from $REPOS_CONF file
+  # usage: simplaret_repository [root|repos|noarch|patches]
+
+  local definition
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+    definition="ROOT"
+  else
+    definition="`echo $1 | tr '[:lower:]' '[:upper:]'`"
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$definition" == "REPOS" ] || [ "$definition" == "PATCHES" ]; then
+    definition="$definition-$ARCH-$VERSION"
+  elif [ "$definition" == "ROOT" ]; then
+    definition="$definition-$ARCH"
+  fi
+
+  grep -e "^$definition=" $REPOS_CONF | cut -d = -f 2 | sed -e 's/"//g' -e "s/'//g" | cut -d "#" -f 1
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_repository_name {
+
+  # return a repository name according the value of $repository
+
+  if [ -z "$repository" ]; then
+    false
+  elif echo $repository | grep -qe %; then
+    repository_name="`echo $repository | cut -d % -f 1`"
+    if [ -z "$repository_name" ]; then
+      echo $BASENAME: you should set a name for the repository $repository
+      echo $BASENAME: please correct your $REPOS_CONF
+      exit 1
+    fi
+  else
+    echo $BASENAME: you should set a name for the repository $repository
+    echo $BASENAME: please correct your $REPOS_CONF
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_repository_url {
+
+  # return a repository url according the value of $repository
+
+  if echo $repository | grep -qe %; then
+    repository_url="`echo $repository | cut -d % -f 2`"
+    if [ -z "$repository_url" ]; then
+      echo $BASENAME: you should set a url for the repository $repository
+      echo $BASENAME: please correct your $REPOS_CONF
+      exit 1
+    fi
+  else
+    echo $BASENAME: you should set a url for the repository $repository
+    echo $BASENAME: please correct your $REPOS_CONF
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$repos_type" == "root" ]; then
+    simplaret_distro_folder
+    repository_url="$repository_url/$DISTRO_FOLDER/$EXTRA_FOLDER" 
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_set_storage_folder {
+
+  storage="$STORAGE/$ARCH/$VERSION/$repos_type"
+  if [ "$repos_type" == "noarch" ]; then
+    storage="$STORAGE/noarch"
+  elif [ "$repos_type" == "patches" ]; then
+    storage="$PATCHES_DIR/$ARCH/$VERSION"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_update {
+
+  local storage
+
+  echo Updating package information for arch $ARCH and version $VERSION... 
+
+  for repos_type in patches root repos noarch; do
+
+    simplaret_set_storage_folder
+
+    for repository in `simplaret_repository $repos_type`; do
+
+      simplaret_repository_name
+      simplaret_repository_url
+
+      if [ ! -d "$storage/$repository_name" ]; then
+        mkdir -p $storage/$repository_name
+      else
+        simplaret_backup_index $storage/$repository_name
+      fi
+
+      simplaret_get_index $repository_url $storage/$repository_name
+      simplaret_check_index $storage/$repository_name
+
+      unset repository_name repository_url repository_protocol
+
+    done
+  done
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_find_package {
+
+  # grep packages in a repository's file list
+  # usage: simplaret_find_package <package-name|-all> <repository-folder>
+
+  if [ "$1" == "-all" ]; then
+    grep -e ".tgz$" $2/`simplaret_filelist` | awk '{ print $8 }'
+  else
+    grep $1 $2/`simplaret_filelist` | awk '{ print $8 }' | grep -e ".tgz$"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_show_package {
+
+  # print a package result
+  # usage: simplaret_show_package <package-file-name> [--basename-only|--filename-only|--formatted]
+
+  if [ "$2" == "--basename-only" ]; then
+    echo `basename $1`
+  elif [ "$2" == "--filename-only" ]; then
+    echo $1
+  elif [ "$2" == "--formatted" ]; then
+    echo $1,$repos_type,$repository
+  else 
+    if echo $1 | grep -q "/patches/"; then
+      patch="(patch)"
+    fi
+    if [ "$repos_type" == "noarch" ]; then
+      echo $name repository $repository_name: `basename $1` $patch
+    else
+      echo $name repository $repository_name, arch: $ARCH, version: $VERSION: `basename $1` $patch
+    fi
+  fi
+  unset patch
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_filelist {
+
+  if [ "$repos_type" == "patches" ]; then
+    echo FILE_LIST
+  else
+    echo FILELIST.TXT
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_metafiles {
+
+  echo `simplaret_filelist` CHECKSUMS.md5
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_search {
+
+  # search packages
+  # usage: simplaret_search [package-name] [-display_mode]
+  # display_mode can be any accepted by simplaret_show_package
+
+  local priority priority_match message pattern mode
+
+  if [ ! -z "$1" ] && ! echo $1 | grep -q -e "^-"; then
+    pattern="$1"
+    mode="$2"
+  else
+    pattern="-all"
+    mode="$1"
+  fi
+
+  for repos_type in patches root repos noarch; do
+
+    name="`echo $repos_type | tr '[:lower:]' '[:upper:]'`"
+    simplaret_set_storage_folder
+
+    for repository in `simplaret_repository $repos_type`; do
+      
+      simplaret_repository_name
+
+      if [ ! -f "$storage/$repository_name/`simplaret_filelist`" ]; then
+        if [ "$WARNING" != "0" ] || [ ! -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+          if [ "$repos_type" == "noarch" ]; then
+            message=""
+          else
+            message="on arch $ARCH version $VERSION"
+          fi
+          echo warning: no file list for $repository_name repository $repository_name $message
+          echo please do a simplaret --update
+        fi
+      else
+
+        if [ "$repos_type" == "root" ]; then
+          # root repositories has ROOT_PRIORITY
+          for priority in $ROOT_PRIORITY; do
+            for file in `simplaret_find_package $pattern $storage/$repository_name | grep "/$priority/"`; do
+              simplaret_show_package $file $mode
+            done
+            priority_match="$priority_match|/$priority/"
+          done
+          # now we should return all matches that are not part of ROOT_PRIORITY
+          priority_match="`echo $priority_match | sed -e 's/^|//'`"
+          for file in `simplaret_find_package $pattern $storage/$repository_name | egrep -v $priority_match`; do
+            simplaret_show_package $file $mode
+          done
+          priority_match=""
+        elif [ "$repos_type" == "repos" ]; then
+          # repos repositories has REPOS_PRIORITY
+          for priority in $REPOS_PRIORITY; do
+            for file in `simplaret_find_package $pattern $storage/$repository_name | grep "/$priority/"`; do
+              simplaret_show_package $file $mode
+            done
+            priority_match="$priority_match|/$priority/"
+          done
+          # now we should return all matches that are not part of REPOS_PRIORITY
+          priority_match="`echo $priority_match | sed -e 's/^|//'`"
+          for file in `simplaret_find_package $pattern $storage/$repository_name | egrep -v $priority_match`; do
+            simplaret_show_package $file $mode
+          done 
+          priority_match=""
+        else
+          for file in `simplaret_find_package $pattern $storage/$repository_name`; do
+            simplaret_show_package $file $mode
+          done
+        fi
+
+      fi
+
+    done
+  done
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_purge {
+
+  # purge simplaret package cache
+  # usage: simplaret_purge [-w N]
+
+  local mtime mtime_message which and_patches
+
+  if [ "$2" == "-w" ] && [ ! -z "$3" ]; then
+    mtime="-mtime +`echo "$3*7" | bc -l`"
+    mtime_message="older than $3 weeks"
+  elif [ "$SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS" != "0" ]; then
+    mtime="-mtime +`echo "$SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS*7" | bc -l`"
+    mtime_message="older than $SIMPLARET_PURGE_WEEKS weeks"
+  else
+    mtime=""
+    mtime_mesage=""
+  fi
+
+  which="root repos noarch"
+  and_patches=""
+
+  if [ "$SIMPLARET_PURGE_PATCHES" == "1" ]; then
+    which="patches $which"
+    and_patches="including patches"
+  fi
+
+  if [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+    echo "$BASENAME: purging all packages $mtime_message for:"
+    echo -e "\t- Arch $ARCH and version $VERSION $and_patches"
+    echo -e "\t- Noarch folder"
+  fi
+
+  for repos_type in $which; do
+
+    simplaret_set_storage_folder
+
+    for file in `find $storage/ $mtime 2> /dev/null`; do
+      for extension in tgz asc meta txt slack-required; do
+        if echo $file | grep -qe ".$extension$"; then
+          rm $file
+        fi
+      done
+    done
+
+  done
+
+  if [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+    echo $BASENAME: done purging simplaret cache
+    echo $BASENAME: please run $BASENAME --update to retrieve new package listings on this arch and version
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_search_and_delete {
+
+  local file candidate place basename
+
+  for file in `find $2/ -name $1*tgz 2> /dev/null`; do
+    candidate="`basename $file`"
+    if [ "`package_name $candidate`" == "$1" ]; then
+      # check if has the same version and build number, otherwise erase the old one
+      for result in `simplaret_search $(package_name $candidate) --basename-only`; do
+        if [ "`package_name $candidate`" == "`package_name $result`" ]; then
+          if [ "`package_version $candidate`" == "`package_version $result`" ] && \
+             [ "`package_build $candidate`" == "`package_build $result`" ]; then
+             LAST_DOWNLOADED_PACKAGE="$file"
+             if [ "$3" != "--silent" ]; then
+               echo Package $candidate already downloaded
+               # echo Package $candidate stored at `dirname $file`
+             else
+               true
+               # echo $file
+             fi
+             return 1
+           else
+             place="`dirname $file`"
+             basename="`basename $file tgz`"
+             rm -f $file
+             rm -f $place/$candidate.slack-required
+             rm -f $file.asc $place/$basename.meta $place/$basename.txt
+             break
+           fi
+        fi
+      done
+    fi
+  done
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_get {
+
+  # get a package
+  # usage: simplaret_get <package-name> [--silent]
+
+  local silent generate_patches search search_results
+
+  # prevent user to stay in $storage
+  cd 
+
+  # first search for an already downloaded package
+  for repos_type in patches root repos noarch; do
+
+    simplaret_set_storage_folder
+    simplaret_search_and_delete $1 $storage $2
+
+    if [ "$?" == "1" ]; then
+      return 0
+    fi
+
+  done
+
+  # then search for the package in the repositories
+  search="`simplaret_search $1 --formatted`"
+  search_results="`echo "$search" | wc -l`"
+
+  for result in $search; do
+
+    # remaining search results
+    let search_results--
+
+    file="`echo $result | cut -d , -f 1`"
+    repos_type="`echo $result | cut -d , -f 2`"
+    repository="`echo $result | cut -d , -f 3`"
+
+    simplaret_set_storage_folder
+    simplaret_repository_name
+
+    candidate="`basename $file`"
+    if [ "`package_name $candidate`" == "$1" ]; then
+      simplaret_repository_url
+
+      # if repos_type == root, the package is a patch and
+      # STORE_ROOT_PATCHES_ON_PATCHES_DIR config parameter is enabled, then
+      # save it on $PATCHES_DIR/root-$repository_name, so all patches
+      # are placed in the same tree
+      if [ "$repos_type" == "root" ] && \
+         [ "$STORE_ROOT_PATCHES_ON_PATCHES_DIR" == "1" ] && echo $file | grep -q "patches"; then
+        folder="$PATCHES_DIR/$ARCH/$VERSION/root-$repository_name"
+        generate_patches="1"
+      else
+        folder="$storage/$repository_name"
+      fi
+
+      # download the package
+      simplaret_download $repository_url $file $folder
+
+      if [ -f "$folder/$candidate.asc" ]; then
+        rm $folder/$candidate.asc
+      fi
+
+      if [ -f "$folder/$1.slack-required" ]; then
+        rm $folder/$1.slack-required
+      fi
+
+      # download the signature, if exist
+      if simplaret_check_url $repository_url/$file.asc; then
+        simplaret_download $repository_url $file.asc $folder
+      fi
+
+      # download slack-required, if exist
+      if simplaret_check_url $repository_url/`dirname $file`/$1.slack-required; then
+        simplaret_download $repository_url `dirname $file`/$1.slack-required $folder
+      fi
+
+      if [ ! -f "$folder/$candidate" ]; then
+        LAST_DOWNLOADED_PACKAGE="0"
+        if [ "$2" != "--silent" ]; then
+          echo Error downloading $candidate from $repos_type repository $repository_url, please check your settings
+        fi
+        # check if there's also more repositories to try
+        if [ "$SIMPLARET_DOWNLOAD_FROM_NEXT_REPO" != "1" ]; then
+          return 1
+        else
+          if [ "$2" != "--silent" ]; then
+            echo Trying to fetch $candidate from the next repository...
+          fi
+          if (($search_results <= 0)); then
+            return 1
+          fi
+        fi
+      else
+        LAST_DOWNLOADED_PACKAGE="$folder/$candidate"
+        if [ "$2" != "--silent" ]; then
+          silent=""
+          echo Package $candidate stored at $folder
+        else
+          # echo $folder/$candidate
+          silent="--silent"
+        fi
+        if [ -f "$folder/$candidate.asc" ] || [ "$SIGNATURE_CHECKING" == "1" ]; then
+          gpg --verify $folder/$candidate.asc $folder/$candidate
+        fi
+        # generate the patches FILE_LIST and PACKAGES.TXT if needed
+        if [ "$generate_patches" == "1" ]; then
+          gen_patches_filelst $folder
+          gen_packages_txt $folder
+          gen_md5_checksums $folder
+        fi
+        simplaret_checksum $storage/$repository_name/CHECKSUMS.md5 $folder/$candidate $silent
+        return $?
+      fi
+
+    fi
+
+  done
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_search_and_process_patch {
+
+  local package_version package_build installed_version
+  local installed_build repos_type get is_patch package_match
+
+  # get the repository type
+  repos_type="`echo $sugested | cut -d , -f 2`"
+
+  # get just the file name
+  sugested="`echo $sugested | cut -d , -f 1`"
+
+  if echo $sugested | grep -q "patches"; then
+    is_patch="yes"
+  else
+    is_patch="no"
+  fi
+
+  # now split the file name into pieces
+  package_version="`package_version $sugested`"
+  package_build="`package_build $sugested`"
+  sugested="`package_name $sugested`"
+
+  # check if the patch was already downloaded
+  if echo "$DOWNLOADED_PATCHES" | grep -q " $ARCH:$VERSION:$sugested "; then
+    if [ "$IS_UPGRADE" != "1" ]; then
+      echo Package $sugested already downloaded
+      # echo "Jail $root needs package $sugested (already downloaded, skipping)"
+      return
+    fi
+  fi
+
+  # search if its installed in the jail
+  installed_packs="`ls /$root/var/log/packages/$sugested* 2> /dev/null`"
+  if [ ! -z "$installed_packs" ]; then
+
+    for installed in $installed_packs; do
+      if [[ "$sugested" == "`package_name $installed.tgz`" ]]; then
+        package_installed="1"
+        installed_version="`package_version $installed.tgz`"
+        installed_build="`package_build $installed.tgz`"
+        break
+      fi
+    done
+
+    get="no"
+
+    # if the package is installed, download the patch
+    if [ "$package_installed" == "1" ]; then
+      if [ "$repos_type" == "patches" ]; then
+
+        if  [ "$package_version" != "$installed_version" ] || [ "$package_build" != "$installed_build" ]; then
+          get="yes"
+          package_match="no"
+        elif [ "$DOWNLOAD_EVEN_APPLIED_PATCHES" == "1" ]; then
+          get="yes"
+        fi
+
+      elif [ "$repos_type" == "root" ] && [ "$is_patch" == "yes" ]; then
+
+        if  [ "$package_version" != "$installed_version" ] || [ "$package_build" != "$installed_build" ]; then
+          get="yes"
+          package_match="no"
+        elif [ "$DOWNLOAD_EVEN_APPLIED_PATCHES" == "1" ]; then
+          get="yes"
+        fi
+
+      else
+        # here, we're dealing with repositories other than ROOT and REPOS,
+        # so we need to check if either version or build number are different,
+        # otherwise all installed packages would be downloaded
+        if [ "$package_version" != "$installed_version" ] || [ "$package_build" != "$installed_build" ]; then
+          get="yes"
+          package_match="no"
+        fi
+      fi
+    fi
+
+    # finally, get the package
+    if [ "$get" == "yes" ]; then
+      if [ "$IS_UPGRADE" == "1" ]; then
+        if [ "$package_match" == "no" ]; then
+          simplaret_install $sugested
+        else
+          simplaret_get $sugested
+        fi
+      else
+        simplaret_get $sugested
+      fi
+      if [ "$?" == "0" ]; then
+        DOWNLOADED_PATCHES="$DOWNLOADED_PATCHES $ARCH:$VERSION:$sugested " # the ending space is important
+      fi
+    fi
+
+  fi
+
+  unset package_installed get
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_get_jail_patches {
+
+  # get patches from a jail
+  # usage: simplaret_get_jail_patches <jail-folder>
+
+  local oldarch oldversion
+
+  if [ ! -z "$1" ]; then
+    root="$1"
+  else
+    root="/"
+  fi
+
+  # save current arch and version
+  oldarch="$ARCH"
+  oldversion="$VERSION"
+
+  ARCH="`default_arch $root`"
+  VERSION="`default_version $root`"
+
+  # in case there's something wrong with the jail, abort
+  if [ -z "$VERSION" ] || [ -z "$ARCH" ]; then
+    return
+  fi
+
+  # we need to do that for each arch/version pairs, but just once for each pair
+  if ! echo "$DISTRO_UPDATED" | grep -q " $ARCH:$VERSION "; then
+    simplaret_update
+    DISTRO_UPDATED="$DISTRO_UPDATED $ARCH:$VERSION " # the ending space is important
+    echo ""
+  fi
+
+  echo Fetching patches for arch $ARCH and version $VERSION for jail $root
+
+  # list all available patches from PATCHES and ROOT repositories
+  for sugested in `simplaret_search --formatted | grep patches | grep -v ",repos," | grep -v ",noarch,"`; do
+    simplaret_search_and_process_patch
+  done
+
+  # grab patches from every other places
+  if [ "$CONSIDER_ALL_PACKAGES_AS_PATCHES" == "1" ]; then
+
+    for sugested in `simplaret_search --formatted | grep patches | grep ",repos," | grep ",noarch,"`; do
+      simplaret_search_and_process_patch
+    done
+
+    for sugested in `simplaret_search --formatted | grep -v patches`; do
+      simplaret_search_and_process_patch
+    done
+
+  fi
+
+  # restore arch and version
+  ARCH="$oldarch"
+  VERSION="$oldversion"
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_get_patches {
+
+  local jailpath
+
+  if [ "$1" == "--upgrade" ]; then
+    IS_UPGRADE="1"
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -z "$ROOT" ]; then
+    simplaret_get_jail_patches $ROOT
+    return $?
+  fi
+
+  # first get patches from the root system
+  simplaret_get_jail_patches
+
+  # then get the needed patches for each installed jail
+  if [ -s "$JAIL_LIST" ]; then
+    for jailpath in `cat $JAIL_LIST`; do
+      if [ -d "$jailpath/var/log/packages" ]; then
+        ROOT="$jailpath"
+        simplaret_get_jail_patches $jailpath
+      fi
+    done
+  fi
+
+  ROOT=""
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_checksum {
+
+  # simplaret_checksum <md5file> <file-name> [--silent]
+
+  if [ ! -f "$1" ] || [ ! -f "$2" ]; then
+    if [ "$3" != "--silent" ]; then
+      echo Checksum error: file not found
+    fi
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  pack="`basename $2`"
+  checksum="`grep -e "$pack\$" $1 | awk '{ print $1 }'`"
+
+  if [ -z "$checksum" ]; then
+    echo file $2 not in checksum $1
+    return 1
+  elif [ "$checksum" != "`md5sum $2 | awk '{ print $1 }'`" ]; then
+    if [ "$3" != "--silent" ]; then
+      echo Checksum mismatch for file `basename $file`
+    fi
+    return 1
+  else
+    if [ "$3" != "--silent" ]; then
+      echo Checksum ok for file `basename $file`
+    fi
+    return 0
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_install {
+
+  # download and install a package
+  # usage: simplaret_install <package-name> [--skip-checks]
+
+  local package root jail_arch jail_version slack_required dep dependency tmp
+
+  root="/$ROOT"
+  mkdir -p $root/var/log/setup/tmp
+
+  if [ "`echo $1 | sed -e 's/\(..\).*/\1/g'`" == "--" ]; then
+    echo $BASENAME: install: syntax error: expected package name
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  # now we check if ARCH and VERSION from the
+  # repository are the same of the jail
+  if [ "$2" != "--skip-checks" ]; then
+    jail_arch="`default_arch $root`"
+    jail_version="`default_version $root`"
+    if [ "$ARCH" != "$jail_arch" ]; then
+      echo "$BASENAME: requested repository arch ($ARCH) doesn't match jail arch ($jail_arch)"
+      echo "$BASENAME: please use \"$BASENAME --get $1 --skip-checks\" to ignore this warning and install anyway"
+      return
+    elif [ "$VERSION" != "$jail_version" ]; then
+      echo "$BASENAME: requested repository version ($VERSION) doesn't match jail version ($jail_version)"
+      echo "$BASENAME: please use \"$BASENAME --get $1 --skip-checks\" to ignore this warning and install anyway"
+      return 1
+    fi
+  fi
+
+  # package="`simplaret_get $1 --silent`"
+  simplaret_get $1 --silent
+  package="$LAST_DOWNLOADED_PACKAGE"
+
+  if [ "$package" != "0" ] && [ ! -z "$package" ]; then
+    slack_required="`dirname $package`/$1.slack-required"
+    if [ -f "$package" ]; then
+
+      if [ -f "$slack_required" ] && [ "$DEPENDENCY_CHECKING" == "1" ]; then
+        # this routine checks for dependencies in package's slack-required
+        # procedure adapted from createpkg script
+        ( cat $slack_required | while read dep; do
+           if [ ! -z "$dep" ]; then
+            dependency="`echo $dep | awk '{ print $1 }'`"
+            simplaret_solve_dep $1 $dependency $root
+           fi
+           true
+         done )
+      fi
+
+      ROOT=$root upgradepkg --install-new $package
+      LAST_DOWNLOADED_PACKAGE="0"
+
+    else
+      echo "Error: could not install package $1: file not found"
+      LAST_DOWNLOADED_PACKAGE="0"
+      return 1
+    fi
+  else
+    echo "Error: could not install package $1"
+    LAST_DOWNLOADED_PACKAGE="0"
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_distro_folder {
+
+  # first we point to the correct arch
+  simplaret_set_arch
+
+  # then we set the distro folder
+  if [ "$ARCH" == "i386" ]; then
+    DISTRO="slackware"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="$DISTRO-$VERSION"
+  elif [ "$ARCH" == "x86_64" ]; then
+    # EXTRA_FOLDER="tree"
+    DISTRO="slamd64"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="$DISTRO-$VERSION"
+  elif [ "$ARCH" == "s390" ]; then
+    DISTRO="slack390"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="$DISTRO-$VERSION"
+  elif [ "$ARCH" == "x86_uclibc" ]; then
+    DISTRO="ucslack"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="$DISTRO-$VERSION"
+  elif [ "$ARCH" == "arm" ]; then
+    DISTRO="armedslack"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="$DISTRO-$VERSION"
+  elif [ "$ARCH" == "powerpc" ]; then
+    DISTRO="slackintosh"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="$VERSION"
+  elif [ "$ARCH" == "sparc" ]; then
+    DISTRO="splack"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="tree-$VERSION"
+  else
+    DISTRO="$ARCH"
+    DISTRO_FOLDER="$DISTRO-$VERSION"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_set_arch {
+
+  # set correct value for ARCH
+
+  local repos_type new_arch
+
+  # any arch defined in ARCH_i386 that hasn't an entry
+  # on $REPOS_CONF will be mapped to i386
+
+  ARCH_i386=" nocona prescott pentium4m pentium4 pentium-m pentium3m pentium3 "
+  ARCH_i386="$ARCH_i386 pentium2 i686 pentium-pro i586 pentium-mmx pentium i486 "
+  ARCH_i386="$ARCH_i386 athlon-mp athlon-xp athlon4 athlon-tbird athlon k6 k6-2 "
+  ARCH_i386="$ARCH_i386 k6-3 winchip-c6 winchip2 c3 c3-2 i386 "
+
+  # any arch defined in ARCH_x86_64 that hasn't an entry
+  # on $REPOS_CONF will be mapped to x86_64
+
+  ARCH_x86_64=" k8 opteron athlon64 athlon-fx x86_64 "
+
+  for repos_type in patches root repos noarch; do
+    if [ -z "`simplaret_repository $repos_type`" ]; then
+      # there's no repository definition for that arch
+      if echo "$ARCH_i386" | grep -q " $ARCH "; then
+        new_arch="i386"
+      elif echo "$ARCH_x86_64" | grep -q " $ARCH "; then
+        new_arch="x86_64"
+      else
+        echo "$BASENAME: error: no repository definition for arch $ARCH"
+        echo "$BASENAME: please check your $CONF and $REPOS_CONF config files"
+        exit 1
+      fi
+    else
+      return
+    fi
+  done
+
+  echo "$BASENAME: changing arch from $ARCH to $new_arch"
+
+  ARCH="$new_arch"
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_check_url {
+
+  # check if a given url exist, use just with small files
+  # usage: simplaret_check_url <url>
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  if [ ! -z "$CONNECT_TIMEOUT" ] || [ "$CONNECT_TIMEOUT" != "0" ]; then
+    curl_timeout="--connect-timeout $CONNECT_TIMEOUT"
+  fi
+
+  if [ "`curl $curl_timeout -I $1 2> /dev/null | head -n 1 | awk '{ print $2 }'`" == "200" ]; then
+    # server gave a 200 response, so the url exist
+    return 0
+  else
+    # the url is missing
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function simplaret_solve_dep {
+
+  # solve dependency for a package
+  # this function was adapted from createpkg script
+  # usage: simplaret_solve_dep <package-name> <package-depencency-name> [root-folder]
+
+  local installed check exit_code
+
+  local package="$1"
+  local pack="$2"
+  local root="/$3"
+
+  pack="`echo $pack| sed -e 's/\+/\\\+/'`"
+  installed=`eval "ls $root/var/log/packages/ | egrep -E '^$pack-[^-]+-[^-]+-[^-]+$'"`
+  check=$?
+
+  if [ -z "$installed" ]; then
+    if [ $check -ne 0 ]; then
+      echo "$BASENAME: processing $1 dependency $pack" 
+      # simplaret_install $pack
+      SIMPLARET_CHILD=$SIMPLARET_CHILD ROOT=$root ARCH=$ARCH VERSION=$VERSION \
+      simplaret --install $pack
+    fi
+  fi
+
+}
+
+if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+  simplaret_usage
+  exit 1
+else
+  eval_config $BASENAME
+fi
+
+# This is used to show how many children process we have
+if [ -z "$SIMPLARET_CHILD" ]; then
+  SIMPLARET_CHILD="1"
+else
+  let SIMPLARET_CHILD++
+fi
+
+BASENAME="`basename $0`[$SIMPLARET_CHILD]"
+
+case $1 in
+  "--update" | "update") simplaret_update ;;
+  "--search" | "search") shift ; simplaret_search $* ;;
+  "--get" | "get") shift ; simplaret_get $* ;;
+  "--get-patches" | "get-patches") simplaret_get_patches ;;
+  "--purge" | "purge") shift ; simplaret_purge $* ;;
+  "--install" | "install") shift ; simplaret_install $* ;;
+  "--upgrade" | "upgrade") simplaret_get_patches --upgrade ;;
+  "--remove" | "remove") ROOT=/$ROOT removepkg $2 ;;
+  *) simplaret_usage ;;
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/src/templatepkg b/branches/0.6/src/templatepkg
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..048ac22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/src/templatepkg
@@ -0,0 +1,959 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# templatepkg v0.3: template maintenance script from simplepkg suite
+#
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | gpl
+# 
+#  Templatepkg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Templatepkg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+  eval_config $BASENAME
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your $BASENAME installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+function usage_summary {
+
+  echo "options are:"
+  echo ""
+  echo "  -c | --create: create a template from a jail or existing template"
+  echo "  -u | --update: update a template from a jail"
+  echo "  -a | --add: add files into a template"
+  echo "  -d | --delete: delete files or folders from a template"
+  echo "  -s | --sync: sync $TEMPLATE_FOLDER working copy"
+  echo "  -e | --export: export $TEMPLATE_FOLDER to a svn repository"
+  echo "  -i | --import: grab $TEMPLATE_FOLDER from a svn repository"   
+  echo "  -r | --remove: remove a template"
+  echo "  -l | --list: list templates"
+  echo "  -b | --batch-edit: add or edit post-installation scripts"
+  echo "  -p | --pack: create a package from a template"
+  echo "  -t | --template-edit: edit template package list"
+  echo "  -h | --help: display this summary"   
+  echo ""   
+
+}
+
+function display_help {
+
+  # display help
+  # usage: help [help-topic]
+
+  local option
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+    echo "type $BASENAME --help <option> for aditional help"
+    usage_summary
+    exit
+  fi
+
+  option="$1"
+
+  if ! echo $option | grep -q -e "^-"; then
+    option="-`echo $option | sed -e 's/--/-/' -e 's/\(.\).*/\1/'`"
+  else
+    option="`echo $option | sed -e 's/--/-/' -e 's/\(..\).*/\1/'`"
+  fi
+
+  usage_summary | grep -e "^  $option"
+
+  echo ""
+  case $option in
+
+    "-c" | "--create")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template> [jail-root|template-name]"
+      ;;
+    "-u" | "--update")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template> [jail-root]"
+      ;;
+    "-a" | "--add")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template> <file-name> [jail-root]"
+      echo ""
+      echo "      file-name: the file or directory to be added"
+      echo "      jail-root: the jail under file-name is located"
+      ;;
+    "-d" | "--delete")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template> <file-name>"
+      ;;
+    "-s" | "--sync")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option"
+      ;;
+    "-e" | "--export")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <svn-repository>"
+      ;;
+    "-i" | "--import")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <svn-repository>"
+      ;;
+    "-r" | "--remove")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template-name>"
+      ;;
+    "-l" | "--list")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option [template-name]"
+      ;;
+    "-b" | "--batch-edit")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template-name> <script-name>"
+      ;;
+    "-p" | "--pack")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template-name> [version] [build] [arch]"
+      ;;
+    "-t" | "--template-edit")
+      echo "      $BASENAME $option <template-name>"
+      ;;
+    "-h" | "--help")
+      echo "  -h | --help: display this help."   
+      ;;
+    *)
+      echo $BASENAME: invalid help option $option
+  esac
+
+  case $option in
+    "-c" | "-u" | "-a")
+      echo ""
+      echo "  if ommited, jail-root defaults to /"
+      ;;
+  esac
+
+  echo ""
+
+}
+
+function usage {
+
+  echo "usage: $BASENAME <option> [<template> [arguments]]"
+  usage_summary
+  exit
+
+}
+
+function check_svn_repo {
+
+  # check a svn repository URL
+  # usage: set_svn_repo <repository>
+
+  if [ ! -z "$1" ]; then
+    if echo $1 | grep -q -v -e "^svn://"; then
+      if echo $1 | grep -q -v -e "^svn+ssh://"; then
+        if echo $1 | grep -q -v -e "^file://"; then
+          echo $BASENAME: invalid repository URL $1
+          return 1
+        fi
+      fi
+    fi
+  else
+    echo $BASENAME: no repository defined
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function import_export_templates {
+
+  # import from or export to $TEMPLATE_FOLDER in a svn repository
+  # usage: template_export <import|export> <repository>
+
+  local templates templates_folder basedir repository mode preposition
+
+  if [ "$?" != 0 ]; then
+    usage
+    exit 1
+  elif ! use_svn; then
+    echo $BASENAME: simplepkg not configured to use svn
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  templates_folder="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER"
+  templates="`basename $TEMPLATE_FOLDER`"
+  basedir="`dirname $templates_folder`"
+  mode="$1"
+  repository="$2"
+  preposition="from"
+
+  check_svn_repo $repository
+
+  if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+
+    if [ ! -d "$templates_folder/.svn" ]; then
+
+      cd $basedir
+
+      if [ "$mode" == "export" ]; then
+        preposition="to"
+        echo Exporting templates to $repository...
+        svn import $templates/ $repository/ -m "initial import"
+        if [ "$?" != "0" ]; then
+          echo $BASENAME: export failed
+          exit 1
+        fi
+      fi
+
+      if [ -d "templates" ]; then
+        mv $templates $templates.old
+      fi
+
+      echo Checking out templates from $repository...
+      svn checkout $repository $templates
+
+      if [ "$?" == "0" ]; then
+        rm -rf $templates.old
+      else
+        rm -rf $templates
+        mv $templates.old $templates
+        echo $BASENAME: $mode failed
+        exit 1
+      fi
+
+    else
+      echo "$BASENAME: $templates_folder seens to be already $mode""ed $preposition $repository"
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_create {
+
+  # create a new template
+
+  local template_base info_commit orig_template list
+
+  if [ ! -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`" ]; then
+
+    echo Creating template `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE`...
+
+    if use_svn && [ -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`/.svn" ]; then
+      cd `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+      svn mkdir `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+    else
+      mkdir -p `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+    fi
+
+  else
+    echo $BASENAME: template `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE` already exists
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  touch $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms
+  touch $TEMPLATE_BASE.template
+
+  if use_svn && [ -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`/.svn" ]; then
+
+    cd `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+
+    if ! svn_check $TEMPLATE_BASE.d; then
+      svn mkdir $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+      info_commit="yes"
+    else
+      mkdir -p $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+    fi
+
+    if ! svn_check $TEMPLATE_BASE.s; then
+      svn mkdir $TEMPLATE_BASE.s
+      info_commit="yes"
+    else
+      mkdir -p $TEMPLATE_BASE.s
+    fi
+
+    if ! svn_check $TEMPLATE_BASE.template; then
+      svn add $TEMPLATE_BASE.template
+      info_commit="yes"
+    fi
+
+    if ! svn_check $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms; then
+      svn add $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms
+      info_commit="yes"
+    fi
+
+  elif use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/.svn" ]; then
+
+    mkdir $TEMPLATE_BASE.{d,s}
+    cd $TEMPLATE_FOLDER
+    svn add `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+    info_commit="yes"
+
+  else
+    mkdir $TEMPLATE_BASE.{d,s}
+  fi
+
+  if [ -d "/$ROOT" ]; then
+    template_update
+  elif [ ! -z "$ROOT" ]; then
+
+    # copy from an existing template
+
+    if [ -d "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$ROOT" ]; then
+      orig_template="$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$ROOT"
+    elif [ -d "$BASE_CONF/templates/$ROOT" ]; then
+      orig_template="$BASE_CONF/templates/$ROOT"
+    elif [ -d "$BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/$ROOT" ]; then
+      orig_template="$BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/$ROOT"
+    else
+      return 1
+    fi
+
+    if [ -f "$orig_template/$ROOT.perms" ]; then
+      cat $orig_template/$ROOT.perms > $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms
+    fi
+
+    if [ -f "$orig_template/$ROOT.template" ]; then
+      cat $orig_template/$ROOT.template > $TEMPLATE_BASE.template
+    fi
+      
+    if use_svn && [ -d "$orig_template/.svn" ]; then
+
+      cd `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+
+      list="`ls $orig_template/$ROOT.d/ 2> /dev/null`"
+      if [ ! -z "$list" ]; then
+        echo Copying files to the new template...
+        rsync -av --exclude=.svn $orig_template/$ROOT.d/ $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/
+        svn add `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE`.d/*
+        info_commit="yes"
+      fi
+
+      list="`ls $orig_template/$ROOT.s/ 2> /dev/null`"
+      if [ ! -z "$list" ]; then
+        echo Copying scripts to the new template...
+        rsync -av --exclude=.svn $orig_template/$ROOT.s/ $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/
+        svn add `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE`.s/*
+        info_commit="yes"
+      fi
+
+    else
+
+      list="`ls $orig_template/$ROOT.d/ 2> /dev/null`"
+      if [ ! -z "$list" ]; then
+        echo Copying files to the new template...
+        rsync -av $orig_template/$ROOT.d/ $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/
+      fi
+
+      list="`ls $orig_template/$ROOT.s/ 2> /dev/null`"
+      if [ ! -z "$list" ]; then
+        echo Copying scripts to the new template...
+        rsync -av $orig_template/$ROOT.s/ $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/
+      fi
+
+    fi
+
+  else
+    echo $BASENAME: warning: no root directory defined
+  fi
+
+  if [ "$info_commit" == "yes" ] && [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+    echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to add files under $file into the svn repository"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_update {
+
+  # update the template package list
+
+  check_template_exist
+
+  if [ ! -d "$ROOT/var/log/packages" ]; then
+    echo $ROOT/var/log/packages: directory not found
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  echo Checking package list for template `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE`...
+
+  for package in `ls -1 $ROOT/var/log/packages/`; do
+    pack=`package_name $package`
+    if [ -f $TEMPLATE ]; then
+      if ! `grep -v -e "^#" $TEMPLATE | cut -d : -f 1 | awk '{ print $1 }' | grep -q -e "^$pack\$"`; then
+        echo $pack >> $TEMPLATE
+        echo Added $pack # on $TEMPLATE
+      fi
+    else
+      echo $pack >> $TEMPLATE
+      echo Added $pack # on $TEMPLATE
+    fi
+  done
+
+  # check if each package from the template is installed
+  grep -v -e "^#" $TEMPLATE | cut -d : -f 1 | awk '{ print $1 }' | while read pack; do
+
+    if [ ! -z "$pack" ]; then
+      unset found
+      for candidate in `ls $ROOT/var/log/packages/$pack* 2> /dev/null`; do
+        candidate="`package_name $candidate`"
+        if [ "$pack" == "$candidate" ]; then
+          found="1"
+          break
+        fi
+      done
+      if [ "$found" != "1" ]; then
+        # remove a non-installed package from the template
+        sed "/^$pack$/d" $TEMPLATE | sed "/^$pack $/d" | sed "/^$pack:*/d" | sed "/^$pack */d" > $TEMPLATE.tmp
+        cat $TEMPLATE.tmp > $TEMPLATE
+        rm -f $TEMPLATE.tmp
+        echo Removed $pack # from $TEMPLATE
+      fi
+    fi
+
+  done
+
+  if ! svn_check $TEMPLATE_BASE.template && [ -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`/.svn" ]; then
+    cd `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+    svn add `basedir $TEMPLATE_BASE`.template
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_add {
+
+  # add a file in a template
+  # usage: template_add <jail-root> <file>
+
+  local info_commit cwd
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ] || [ -z "$2" ]; then
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  check_template_exist
+
+  jail="/$1" 
+  file="$2"
+
+  if [ -a "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$file" ]; then
+    if [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$file" ]; then
+
+      echo $BASENAME: folder `slash $file` already on $TEMPLATE_BASE.d, checking for contents
+
+      cd $jail
+      for candidate in `find $file`; do
+        if [ ! -a "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$candidate" ]; then
+          mkdir -p $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/`dirname $candidate`
+          cp -a $jail/$candidate $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$candidate
+          if use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/.svn" ]; then
+            cwd="`pwd`"
+            cd $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+            svn add ./$candidate
+            if [ "$?" != "0" ]; then
+              echo $BASENAME: error adding `slash $candidate` into the revision system
+            fi
+            cd $cwd
+            info_commit="yes"
+          else
+            echo Added `slash $jail/$candidate` on `slash $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$candidate`
+          fi
+        fi
+      done
+
+      if [ "$info_commit" == "yes" ] && [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+        echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to add files under `slash $file` into the svn repository"
+      fi
+
+    else
+      echo $BASENAME: file `slash $file` already on $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+      exit 1
+    fi
+  else
+
+    if [ -a "$jail/$file" ]; then
+
+      destination="`echo $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$file | sed -e 's/\/$//'`"
+
+      if use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/.svn" ]; then
+
+        if [ ! -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/`dirname $file`/.svn" ]; then
+          mkdir -p $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/`dirname $file`/
+          svn add $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/`dirname $file`/
+        fi
+
+        cp -a $jail/$file $destination
+
+        cwd="`pwd`"
+        cd $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+        svn add ./$file
+
+        if [ "$?" != "0" ]; then
+          echo $BASENAME: error adding `slash $candidate` into the revision system
+        else
+          if [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+            echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to add `slash $file` into the svn repository"
+          fi
+        fi
+
+        cd $cwd
+
+      else
+
+        mkdir -p $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/`dirname $file`/
+        cp -a $jail/$file $destination
+        echo Added `slash $jail/$file` on `slash $destination`
+
+      fi
+
+    else
+      echo $BASENAME: `slash $jail/$file`: file not found
+      exit 1
+    fi
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function check_template_exist {
+
+  # check if a template exists
+  # and create missing components
+
+  local components
+
+  components="template perms d s"
+
+  if [ ! -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`" ]; then
+    echo $BASENAME: template not found
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  for component in $components; do
+
+    if [ ! -e "$TEMPLATE_BASE.$component" ]; then
+
+      echo "$BASENAME: template component not found: $TEMPLATE_BASE.$component; creating..."
+
+      cd `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+
+      if [ "$component" == "perms" ] || [ "$component" == "template" ]; then
+        touch $TEMPLATE_BASE.$component
+      else
+        mkdir $TEMPLATE_BASE.$component
+      fi
+
+      if use_svn && [ -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`/.svn" ]; then
+        svn add $TEMPLATE_BASE.$component
+        info_commit="yes"
+      fi
+
+    elif use_svn && [ -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`/.svn" ] && \
+         ! svn_check $TEMPLATE_BASE.$component; then
+
+      cd `dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`
+      svn add $TEMPLATE_BASE.$component
+      info_commit="yes"
+
+    fi
+
+  done
+
+  if [ "$info_commit" == "yes" ] && [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+    echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to add new files in the svn repository"
+  fi  
+
+}
+
+function template_delete {
+
+  # delete a file from a template
+  # usage: template_delete <file>
+
+  if [ -e "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$1" ]; then
+    if use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/.svn" ]; then
+      cd $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+      svn del --force ./$1 || rm -rf ./$1
+      if [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+        echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to del $1 in the svn repository"
+      fi
+    else
+      rm -rf $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$1
+      echo Removed $1 from $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+    fi
+  elif [ -e "$TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1" ]; then
+    if use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.s/.svn" ]; then
+      cd $TEMPLATE_BASE.s
+      svn del --force ./$1 || rm -rf ./$1
+      if [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+        echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to del $1 in the svn repository"
+      fi
+    else
+      rm -rf $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1
+      echo Removed $1 from $TEMPLATE_BASE.s
+    fi
+  else
+    if [ ! -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d" ]; then
+      echo $BASENAME: template folder $TEMPLATE_BASE.d not found
+    else
+      echo $BASENAME: file $1 not found at $TEMPLATE_BASE.d
+    fi
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_remove {
+
+  # remove a template
+  # usage: template_remove
+
+  local basedir template
+
+  basedir="`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`"
+  template="`basename $basedir`"
+
+  if [ ! -d "$basedir" ]; then
+    echo $BASENAME: template $template does not exist
+    exit 1
+  fi
+
+  if use_svn && [ -d "$basedir/.svn" ]; then
+    cd $TEMPLATE_FOLDER
+    svn update
+    svn del --force $template
+    if [ "$?" != "0" ]; then
+      echo $BASENAME: error deleting template $template
+    else
+      svn commit -m "deleted $template"
+      if [ "$?" != "0" ]; then
+        echo $BASENAME: error commiting to svn repository
+      fi
+    fi
+  else
+    rm -rf $basedir
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_list {
+
+  # list templates
+  # usage: template_list [template_name]
+
+  local list basedir template
+
+  if [ "$TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE" != "own-folder" ]; then
+    echo "$BASENAME: option only available if TEMPLATE_STORAGE_STYLE configured as 'own-folder'"
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  if echo $1 | grep -q "/" || [ ! -z "$1" ]; then
+
+    template="`echo $1 | cut -d "/" -f 1`"
+
+    if [ -e "$BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/$1" ]; then
+      list="`ls $BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/$1 2> /dev/null`"
+      if [ "$?" == "0" ]; then
+        list="`echo $list | xargs`"
+        echo "In the default template $template: $list"
+      fi
+    fi
+
+    if [ -e "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1" ]; then
+      list="`ls $TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1 2> /dev/null`"
+      if [ "$?" == "0" ]; then
+        list="`echo $list | xargs`"
+        echo "In the custom template $template: $list"
+      fi      
+    fi
+
+  else
+
+    list="`ls $BASE_CONF/defaults/templates/$1 2> /dev/null`"
+    if [ "$?" == "0" ]; then
+      list="`echo $list | xargs`"
+      echo "Default templates: $list"
+    fi
+
+    list="`ls $TEMPLATE_FOLDER/$1 2> /dev/null`"
+    if [ "$?" == "0" ]; then
+      list="`echo $list | xargs`"
+      echo "Custom templates: $list"
+    fi
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_post_install_edit {
+
+  # add or edit a post-installation script
+  # usage: template_post_install_edit <script-name>
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+    echo $BASENAME: no template specified
+    exit 1
+  elif echo $1 | grep -q "/"; then
+    echo $BASENAME: error: invalid script name $1
+  fi
+
+  if [ -f "$TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1" ]; then
+    sha1sum="`sha1sum $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1`"
+    if [ ! -z "$EDITOR" ]; then
+      $EDITOR $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1
+    else
+      vi $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1
+    fi
+    if [ "$sha1sum" != "`sha1sum $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1`" ] && \
+       [ -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`/.svn" ] && [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+      echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to send changes to the repository"
+    fi    
+  else
+
+    if [ -e "$TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1" ]; then
+
+      echo $BASENAME: file $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1 not a regular file
+
+    elif [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.s" ]; then
+
+      touch $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1
+      chmod +x $TEMPLATE_BASE.s/$1
+
+      if [ -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.s/.svn" ]; then
+        cd $TEMPLATE_BASE.s
+        svn add $1
+        if [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+          echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to send the script to the repository"
+        fi
+      fi
+
+      echo "$BASENAME: script created; run templatepkg -p `basename $TEMPLATE_BASE` $1 again to edit it"
+
+    else
+      echo $BASENAME: folder not found: $TEMPLATE_BASE.s
+    fi
+
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function template_edit {
+
+  # edit a template package list
+  # usage: template_edit
+
+  if [ -f "$TEMPLATE_BASE.template" ]; then
+    sha1sum="`sha1sum $TEMPLATE_BASE.template`"
+    if [ ! -z "$EDITOR" ]; then
+      $EDITOR $TEMPLATE_BASE.template
+    else
+      vi $TEMPLATE_BASE.template
+    fi
+    if [ "$sha1sum" != "`sha1sum $TEMPLATE_BASE.template`" ] && \
+       [ -d "`dirname $TEMPLATE_BASE`/.svn" ] && [ -z "$SILENT" ]; then
+      echo "$BASENAME: please run 'jail-commit --all' to send changes to the repository"
+    fi
+  elif [ -e "$TEMPLATE_BASE.template" ]; then
+    echo $BASENAME: file $TEMPLATE_BASE.template not a regular file
+  else
+    echo $BASENAME: file not found: $TEMPLATE_BASE.template
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function require {
+
+  # requires a string
+  # usage: require [string]
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+    usage
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function setroot {
+
+  # set ROOT variable
+  # usage: setroot <value1> <value2>
+  
+  if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+    ROOT="/"
+  else
+    ROOT="$1"
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function create_doinst {
+
+  # create a doinst.sh from a template.perms file
+  # usage: create_doinst <doinst-path>
+
+  rm -f $1/doinst.sh
+
+  if [ -s "$TEMPLATE_BASE.perms" ]; then
+    echo Creating doinst.sh...
+    cat $TEMPLATE_BASE.perms | while read entry; do
+      file="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 1`"
+      if [ -e "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d/$file" ]; then
+        owner="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 2`"
+        group="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 3`"
+        perms="`echo $entry | cut -d ";" -f 4`"
+        echo "( chmod $perms /$file )" >> $1/doinst.sh
+        echo "( chown $owner:$group /$file )" >> $1/doinst.sh
+      fi
+    done
+  fi
+
+}
+
+function package_template {
+
+  # make a package from a template
+  # usage: package_template [version] [build] [arch]
+
+  local template version build arch
+
+  template="`basename $TEMPLATE_BASE`"
+
+  if [ ! -d "$TEMPLATE_BASE.d" ]; then
+    $BASENAME: folder not found: $TEMPLATE.base.d
+    return 1
+  fi
+
+  echo Buiding package for template $template...
+
+  if [ -z "$1" ]; then
+    version="1"
+  else
+    version="$1"
+  fi
+
+  if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+    build="1"
+  else
+    build="$2"
+  fi
+
+  if [ -z "$3" ]; then
+    arch="noarch"
+  else
+    arch="$3"
+  fi
+
+  TMP=${TMP:=/tmp}
+  rm -rf $TMP/templatepkg
+  mkdir -p $TMP/templatepkg
+
+  rsync -av --exclude=.svn $TEMPLATE_BASE.d/ $TMP/templatepkg/
+  mkdir $TMP/templatepkg/install
+  create_doinst $TMP/templatepkg/install
+
+  echo "template-$template: template-$template" > $TMP/templatepkg/install/slack-desc
+  echo "template-$template: " >> $TMP/templatepkg/install/slack-desc
+  echo "template-$template: simplepkg template $template" >> $TMP/templatepkg/install/slack-desc
+
+  for ((n=1;n<=8;n++)); do
+    echo "template-$template: " >> $TMP/templatepkg/install/slack-desc
+  done
+
+  cd $TMP/templatepkg
+
+  makepkg -c n -l y $TMP/template-$template-$version-noarch-$build.tgz
+
+  cd $TMP
+  rm -rf templatepkg
+
+}
+
+# -----------------------------------------------------
+#                       main
+# -----------------------------------------------------
+
+if [ ! -z "$2" ]; then
+  search_template $2 --new
+fi
+
+TEMPLATE="$TEMPLATE_BASE.template"
+
+if [ "$1" == "-u" ] || [ "$1" == "--update" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+  setroot $3
+  template_update
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-c" ] || [ "$1" == "--create" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+  setroot $3
+  template_create
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-a" ] || [ "$1" == "--add" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+
+  if [ -z "$3" ]; then
+    usage
+  else
+    setroot $4
+  fi
+
+  template_add $ROOT $3
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-d" ] || [ "$1" == "--delete" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+
+  if [ -z "$3" ]; then
+    usage
+  else
+    template_delete $3
+  fi
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-s" ] || [ "$1" == "--sync" ]; then
+
+  if use_svn && [ -d "$TEMPLATE_FOLDER/.svn" ]; then
+    ( cd $TEMPLATE_FOLDER && svn update )
+    true
+  fi
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-e" ] || [ "$1" == "--export" ]; then
+ 
+  require $2 
+  import_export_templates export $2
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-i" ] || [ "$1" == "--import" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+  import_export_templates import $2
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-r" ] || [ "$1" == "--remove" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+  template_remove
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-l" ] || [ "$1" == "--list" ]; then
+
+  template_list $2
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-b" ] || [ "$1" == "--batch-edit" ]; then
+
+  require $3
+  template_post_install_edit $3
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-t" ] || [ "$1" == "--template-edit" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+  template_edit
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-p" ] || [ "$1" == "--pack" ]; then
+
+  require $2
+  shift ; shift
+  package_template $*
+
+elif [ "$1" == "-h" ] || [ "$1" == "--help" ]; then
+
+  display_help $2 
+
+else
+  usage
+fi
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.csh b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.csh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..94e8a92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.csh
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+#!/bin/csh
+# Set the system locale.  (no, we don't have a menu for this ;-)
+# For a list of locales which are supported by this machine, type:
+#   locale -a
+
+# en_US is the Slackware default locale:
+setenv LANG pt_BR
+
+# 'C' is the old Slackware (and UNIX) default, which is 127-bit
+# ASCII with a charmap setting of ANSI_X3.4-1968.  These days,
+# it's better to use en_US or another modern $LANG setting to
+# support extended character sets.
+#setenv LANG C
+
+# There is also support for UTF-8 locales, but be aware that
+# some programs are not yet able to handle UTF-8 and will fail to
+# run properly.  In those cases, you can set LANG=C before
+# starting them.  Still, I'd avoid UTF unless you actually need it.
+#setenv LANG en_US.UTF-8
+
+# Another option for en_US:
+#setenv LANG en_US.ISO8859-1
+
+# One side effect of the newer locales is that the sort order
+# is no longer according to ASCII values, so the sort order will
+# change in many places.  Since this isn't usually expected and
+# can break scripts, we'll stick with traditional ASCII sorting.
+# If you'd prefer the sort algorithm that goes with your $LANG
+# setting, comment this out.
+setenv LC_COLLATE C
+
+# End of /etc/profile.d/lang.csh
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.sh b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..c9cde20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Set the system locale.  (no, we don't have a menu for this ;-)
+# For a list of locales which are supported by this machine, type:
+#   locale -a
+
+# en_US is the Slackware default locale:
+export LANG=pt_BR
+
+# 'C' is the old Slackware (and UNIX) default, which is 127-bit
+# ASCII with a charmap setting of ANSI_X3.4-1968.  These days,
+# it's better to use en_US or another modern $LANG setting to
+# support extended character sets.
+#export LANG=C
+
+# There is also support for UTF-8 locales, but be aware that
+# some programs are not yet able to handle UTF-8 and will fail to
+# run properly.  In those cases, you can set LANG=C before
+# starting them.  Still, I'd avoid UTF unless you actually need it.
+#export LANG=en_US.UTF-8
+
+# Another option for en_US:
+#export LANG=en_US.ISO8859-1
+
+# One side effect of the newer locales is that the sort order
+# is no longer according to ASCII values, so the sort order will
+# change in many places.  Since this isn't usually expected and
+# can break scripts, we'll stick with traditional ASCII sorting.
+# If you'd prefer the sort algorithm that goes with your $LANG
+# setting, comment this out.
+export LC_COLLATE=C
+
+# End of /etc/profile.d/lang.sh
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/opt/OpenOffice.org b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/opt/OpenOffice.org
new file mode 120000
index 0000000..7146afd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.d/opt/OpenOffice.org
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+../opt2/OpenOffice.org
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.perms b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.perms
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.perms
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.s/post-install.sh b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.s/post-install.sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..086c7a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.s/post-install.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: `basename $0` <jail-root> <jail-name>"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1/$2" ]; then
+  echo "folder $1/$2 does not exist"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+echo running post-installation script for $1/$2 jail...
+
+# copia de arquivos
+cp -p /etc/passwd $1/$2/etc/
+cp -p /etc/group $1/$2/etc/
+cp /etc/localtime $1/$2/etc/
+
+# pos-instalacao
+mount -t proc proc $1/$2/proc
+chroot $1/$2 /sbin/ldconfig
+cd $1/$2 && exec ./var/log/scripts/glibc-zoneinfo-*
+umount $1/$2/proc
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.template b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef3ae52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/openoffice/openoffice.template
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+acpid: REC
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cups: REC
+cxxlibs: ADD
+devs: ADD
+etc: ADD
+a2ps
+bc
+enscript
+espgs
+etc
+findutils
+gawk
+gettext
+getty-ps
+gimp-print
+glibc
+glibc-i18n
+glibc-profile
+glibc-solibs
+glibc-zoneinfo
+grep
+gzip
+hpijs
+infozip
+ispell
+kbd
+kde-i18n-pt_BR
+kdebase
+kdelibs
+koffice-i18n-pt_BR
+less
+libart_lgpl
+libidn
+libmng
+pkgtools
+qt
+sed
+shadow
+sudo
+sysklogd
+sysvinit
+utempter
+util-linux
+x11
+x11-devel
+x11-fonts-100dpi
+x11-fonts-cyrillic
+x11-fonts-misc
+x11-fonts-scale
+x11-xdmx
+x11-xnest
+x11-xvfb
+openoffice-chroot
+openssl
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/slackware/slackware.perms b/branches/0.6/templates/slackware/slackware.perms
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/slackware/slackware.perms
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/slackware/slackware.template b/branches/0.6/templates/slackware/slackware.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3590c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/slackware/slackware.template
@@ -0,0 +1,566 @@
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+# 
+# This one comes from disk: A1 (Base Linux series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+acpid: REC
+apmd: REC
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cpio: ADD
+cups: REC
+cxxlibs: ADD
+dcron: ADD
+devs: ADD
+e2fsprogs: ADD
+elvis: ADD
+etc: ADD
+findutils: ADD
+floppy: ADD
+gawk: ADD
+genpower: OPT
+gettext: REC
+getty-ps: OPT
+glibc-solibs: ADD
+glibc-zoneinfo: ADD
+gpm: REC
+grep: ADD
+gzip: ADD
+hdparm: ADD
+hotplug: ADD
+infozip: ADD
+isapnptools: OPT
+jfsutils: OPT
+kbd: REC
+kernel-ide: REC
+kernel-modules: ADD
+less: ADD
+lilo: ADD
+loadlin: REC
+logrotate: ADD
+minicom: REC
+mkinitrd: REC
+module-init-tools: ADD
+openssl-solibs: ADD
+pciutils: OPT
+pcmcia-cs: REC
+pkgtools: ADD
+procps: ADD
+reiserfsprogs: ADD
+sed: ADD
+shadow: ADD
+slocate: ADD
+smartmontools: ADD
+sysklogd: ADD
+syslinux: ADD
+sysvinit: ADD
+tar: ADD
+tcsh: REC
+udev: ADD
+umsdos-progs: ADD
+usbutils: ADD
+utempter: REC
+util-linux: ADD
+xfsprogs: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: AP1 (Applications series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+a2ps: REC
+acct: OPT
+alsa-utils: REC
+amp: OPT
+ash: OPT
+at: OPT
+aumix: OPT
+bc: OPT
+bpe: OPT
+cdparanoia: OPT
+cdrdao: OPT
+cdrtools: OPT
+diffutils: REC
+dvd+rw-tools: OPT
+enscript: OPT
+espgs: REC
+flac: OPT
+gimp-print: OPT
+groff: ADD
+gnu-gs-fonts: REC
+hpijs: REC
+ispell: OPT
+jed: OPT
+joe: OPT
+jove: OPT
+ksh93: OPT
+lsof: OPT
+lvm: OPT
+madplay: OPT
+man: ADD
+man-pages: REC
+mc: OPT
+mdadm: OPT
+most: OPT
+mpg321: OPT
+mt-st: OPT
+mysql: OPT
+normalize: OPT
+quota: OPT
+raidtools: OPT
+rexima: REC
+rpm: OPT
+rzip: OPT
+sc: OPT
+screen: OPT
+seejpeg: REC
+sgml-tools: REC
+sox: REC
+sudo: OPT
+texinfo: REC
+vim: OPT
+vorbis-tools: OPT
+workbone: OPT
+zsh: OPT
+
+autoconf: OPT
+automake: OPT
+bin86: ADD
+binutils: ADD
+bison: ADD
+byacc: OPT
+ccache: OPT
+clisp: OPT
+cscope: OPT
+cvs: REC
+distcc: OPT
+doxygen: OPT
+flex: ADD
+gcc: ADD
+gcc-g++: REC
+gcc-g77: OPT
+gcc-gnat: OPT
+gcc-java: OPT
+gcc-objc: OPT
+gdb: REC
+gettext-tools: REC
+guile: OPT
+indent: OPT
+kernel-headers: ADD
+libtool: OPT
+m4: REC
+make: ADD
+nasm: OPT
+oprofile: OPT
+p2c: OPT
+perl: REC
+pkgconfig: REC
+pmake: REC
+python: OPT
+python-demo: OPT
+python-tools: OPT
+rcs: OPT
+strace: REC
+subversion: OPT
+# Tagfile for emacs series
+emacs: ADD
+emacs-misc: REC
+emacs-lisp: OPT
+emacs-leim: OPT
+emacs-nox: OPT
+emacs-info: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: F1 (Frequently Asked Questions)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+linux-faqs: ADD
+linux-howtos: ADD
+kernel-source: REC
+aalib: REC
+alsa-driver: ADD
+alsa-lib: ADD
+alsa-oss: OPT
+arts: ADD
+aspell: REC
+aspell-en: REC
+atk: REC
+audiofile: REC
+db3: REC
+db31: REC
+db4: REC
+esound: REC
+expat: REC
+fribidi: REC
+gdbm: REC
+gdk-pixbuf: REC
+glib: REC
+glib2: REC
+glibc: REC
+glibc-i18n: OPT
+glibc-profile: OPT
+glut: REC
+gmp: REC
+gnet: REC
+gtk+: REC
+gtk+2: REC
+imlib: REC
+jre: OPT
+lcms: REC
+lesstif: REC
+libao: REC
+libart_lgpl: REC
+libcaca: OPT
+libexif: REC
+libglade: REC
+libgsf: REC
+libgtkhtml: REC
+libid3tag: REC
+libidl: REC
+libidn: REC
+libieee1284: REC
+libjpeg: REC
+libmad: REC
+libmikmod: REC
+libmng: REC
+libogg: REC
+libpng: REC
+librsvg: REC
+libtermcap: REC
+libtiff: REC
+libungif: REC
+libusb: REC
+libvorbis: REC
+libwmf: REC
+libwmf-docs: OPT
+libwpd: REC
+libxml2: REC
+libxslt: REC
+mhash: REC
+mpeg_lib: OPT
+ncurses: REC
+netpbm: REC
+pango: REC
+pcre: REC
+pilot-link: REC
+popt: REC
+readline: REC
+sdl: REC
+shared-mime-info: REC
+slang: REC
+startup-notification: ADD
+svgalib: REC
+t1lib: REC
+taglib: REC
+wv2: REC
+xaw3d: REC
+zlib: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from the N (Network/UUCP/Mail/News) series.
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# 
+#
+apache: OPT
+autofs: OPT
+bind: REC
+bitchx: OPT
+bootp: OPT
+curl: OPT
+cyrus-sasl: REC
+dhcp: OPT
+dhcpcd: REC
+dnsmasq: OPT
+elm: OPT
+epic4: OPT
+fetchmail: OPT
+getmail: REC
+gnupg: OPT
+htdig: OPT
+imapd: OPT
+inetd: REC
+iproute2: OPT
+iptables: ADD
+iptraf: OPT
+irssi: OPT
+lftp: OPT
+links: OPT
+lynx: OPT
+metamail: REC
+mod_ssl: OPT
+mutt: OPT
+nail: REC
+nc: OPT
+ncftp: OPT
+netatalk: OPT
+netpipes: OPT
+netwatch: OPT
+newspost: OPT
+nfs-utils: OPT
+nmap: OPT
+nn: OPT
+ntp: OPT
+openssh: REC
+openssl: REC
+php: OPT
+pidentd: REC
+pine: OPT
+popa3d: REC
+portmap: REC
+ppp: OPT
+procmail: REC
+proftpd: OPT
+rdist: OPT
+rp-pppoe: OPT
+rsync: OPT
+samba: OPT
+sendmail-cf: OPT
+sendmail: REC
+slrn: OPT
+stunnel: OPT
+tcpdump: REC
+tcpip: REC
+tin: OPT
+traceroute: OPT
+trn: OPT
+uucp: OPT
+vsftpd: REC
+wget: OPT
+whois: OPT
+wireless-tools: OPT
+yptools: OPT
+ytalk: OPT
+tetex: ADD
+tetex-doc: REC
+xfig: OPT
+transfig: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: TCL1 (Tcl/Tk series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+expect: OPT
+hfsutils: OPT
+tcl:  ADD
+tk:   REC
+tclx: REC
+tix: OPT
+x11: ADD
+x11-devel: ADD
+x11-docs: REC
+x11-docs-html: OPT
+x11-fonts-100dpi: OPT
+x11-fonts-cyrillic: OPT
+x11-fonts-misc: ADD
+x11-fonts-scale: ADD
+x11-xdmx: OPT
+x11-xnest: OPT
+x11-xvfb: OPT
+abiword: OPT
+blackbox: OPT
+fluxbox: OPT
+fvwm: REC
+gaim: OPT
+gftp: OPT
+gimp: REC
+gimp-help-2: REC
+gkrellm: OPT
+gnuchess: REC
+gnuplot: OPT
+gucharmap: OPT
+gv: REC
+gxine: OPT
+imagemagick: REC
+mozilla: REC
+mozilla-firefox: REC
+mozilla-thunderbird: REC
+pan: REC
+rxvt: REC
+sane: OPT
+seyon: OPT
+windowmaker: REC
+x3270: OPT
+xchat: OPT
+xfce: OPT
+xfm: OPT
+xfractint: OPT
+xgames: REC
+xine-lib: REC
+xine-ui: REC
+xpaint: OPT
+xpdf: OPT
+xmms: OPT
+xsane: OPT
+xlockmore: REC
+xscreensaver: REC
+xv: REC
+xvim: REC
+xxgdb: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: Y1 (Yaaaaaahhoooo? Games and Amusements).
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+bsd-games: OPT
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b7115d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1046 @@
+##
+## httpd.conf -- Apache HTTP server configuration file
+##
+
+#
+# Based upon the NCSA server configuration files originally by Rob McCool.
+#
+# This is the main Apache server configuration file.  It contains the
+# configuration directives that give the server its instructions.
+# See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/> for detailed information about
+# the directives.
+#
+# Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding
+# what they do.  They're here only as hints or reminders.  If you are unsure
+# consult the online docs. You have been warned.  
+#
+# After this file is processed, the server will look for and process
+# /etc/apache/srm.conf and then /etc/apache/access.conf
+# unless you have overridden these with ResourceConfig and/or
+# AccessConfig directives here.
+#
+# The configuration directives are grouped into three basic sections:
+#  1. Directives that control the operation of the Apache server process as a
+#     whole (the 'global environment').
+#  2. Directives that define the parameters of the 'main' or 'default' server,
+#     which responds to requests that aren't handled by a virtual host.
+#     These directives also provide default values for the settings
+#     of all virtual hosts.
+#  3. Settings for virtual hosts, which allow Web requests to be sent to
+#     different IP addresses or hostnames and have them handled by the
+#     same Apache server process.
+#
+# Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many
+# of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the
+# server will use that explicit path.  If the filenames do *not* begin
+# with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log"
+# with ServerRoot set to "/usr/local/apache" will be interpreted by the
+# server as "/usr/local/apache/logs/foo.log".
+#
+
+### Section 1: Global Environment
+#
+# The directives in this section affect the overall operation of Apache,
+# such as the number of concurrent requests it can handle or where it
+# can find its configuration files.
+#
+
+#
+# ServerType is either inetd, or standalone.  Inetd mode is only supported on
+# Unix platforms.
+#
+ServerType standalone
+
+# ServerTokens directive
+ServerTokens ProductOnly
+
+#
+# ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's
+# configuration, error, and log files are kept.
+#
+# NOTE!  If you intend to place this on an NFS (or otherwise network)
+# mounted filesystem then please read the LockFile documentation
+# (available at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/mod/core.html#lockfile>);
+# you will save yourself a lot of trouble.
+#
+ServerRoot "/usr"
+
+#
+# The LockFile directive sets the path to the lockfile used when Apache
+# is compiled with either USE_FCNTL_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT or
+# USE_FLOCK_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT. This directive should normally be left at
+# its default value. The main reason for changing it is if the logs
+# directory is NFS mounted, since the lockfile MUST BE STORED ON A LOCAL
+# DISK. The PID of the main server process is automatically appended to
+# the filename. 
+#
+#LockFile /var/run/httpd.lock
+
+#
+# PidFile: The file in which the server should record its process
+# identification number when it starts.
+#
+PidFile /var/run/httpd.pid
+
+#
+# ScoreBoardFile: File used to store internal server process information.
+# Not all architectures require this.  But if yours does (you'll know because
+# this file will be  created when you run Apache) then you *must* ensure that
+# no two invocations of Apache share the same scoreboard file.
+#
+ScoreBoardFile /var/run/httpd.scoreboard
+
+#
+# In the standard configuration, the server will process httpd.conf (this 
+# file, specified by the -f command line option), srm.conf, and access.conf 
+# in that order.  The latter two files are now distributed empty, as it is 
+# recommended that all directives be kept in a single file for simplicity.  
+# The commented-out values below are the built-in defaults.  You can have the 
+# server ignore these files altogether by using "/dev/null" (for Unix) or
+# "nul" (for Win32) for the arguments to the directives.
+#
+#ResourceConfig /etc/apache/srm.conf
+#AccessConfig /etc/apache/access.conf
+
+#
+# Timeout: The number of seconds before receives and sends time out.
+#
+Timeout 300
+
+#
+# KeepAlive: Whether or not to allow persistent connections (more than
+# one request per connection). Set to "Off" to deactivate.
+#
+KeepAlive On
+
+#
+# MaxKeepAliveRequests: The maximum number of requests to allow
+# during a persistent connection. Set to 0 to allow an unlimited amount.
+# We recommend you leave this number high, for maximum performance.
+#
+MaxKeepAliveRequests 100
+
+#
+# KeepAliveTimeout: Number of seconds to wait for the next request from the
+# same client on the same connection.
+#
+KeepAliveTimeout 2
+
+#
+# Server-pool size regulation.  Rather than making you guess how many
+# server processes you need, Apache dynamically adapts to the load it
+# sees --- that is, it tries to maintain enough server processes to
+# handle the current load, plus a few spare servers to handle transient
+# load spikes (e.g., multiple simultaneous requests from a single
+# Netscape browser).
+#
+# It does this by periodically checking how many servers are waiting
+# for a request.  If there are fewer than MinSpareServers, it creates
+# a new spare.  If there are more than MaxSpareServers, some of the
+# spares die off.  The default values are probably OK for most sites.
+#
+MinSpareServers 5
+MaxSpareServers 10
+
+#
+# Number of servers to start initially --- should be a reasonable ballpark
+# figure.
+#
+StartServers 5
+
+#
+# Limit on total number of servers running, i.e., limit on the number
+# of clients who can simultaneously connect --- if this limit is ever
+# reached, clients will be LOCKED OUT, so it should NOT BE SET TOO LOW.
+# It is intended mainly as a brake to keep a runaway server from taking
+# the system with it as it spirals down...
+#
+MaxClients 150
+
+#
+# MaxRequestsPerChild: the number of requests each child process is
+# allowed to process before the child dies.  The child will exit so
+# as to avoid problems after prolonged use when Apache (and maybe the
+# libraries it uses) leak memory or other resources.  On most systems, this
+# isn't really needed, but a few (such as Solaris) do have notable leaks
+# in the libraries. For these platforms, set to something like 10000
+# or so; a setting of 0 means unlimited.
+#
+# NOTE: This value does not include keepalive requests after the initial
+#       request per connection. For example, if a child process handles
+#       an initial request and 10 subsequent "keptalive" requests, it
+#       would only count as 1 request towards this limit.
+#
+MaxRequestsPerChild 0
+
+#
+# Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or
+# ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost>
+# directive.
+#
+#Listen 3000
+#Listen 12.34.56.78:80
+
+#
+# BindAddress: You can support virtual hosts with this option. This directive
+# is used to tell the server which IP address to listen to. It can either
+# contain "*", an IP address, or a fully qualified Internet domain name.
+# See also the <VirtualHost> and Listen directives.
+#
+#BindAddress *
+
+#
+# Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support
+#
+# To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you
+# have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the
+# directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used.
+# Please read the file http://httpd.apache.org/docs/dso.html for more
+# details about the DSO mechanism and run `httpd -l' for the list of already
+# built-in (statically linked and thus always available) modules in your httpd
+# binary.
+#
+# Note: The order in which modules are loaded is important.  Don't change
+# the order below without expert advice.
+#
+# Example:
+# LoadModule foo_module libexec/mod_foo.so
+LoadModule vhost_alias_module libexec/apache/mod_vhost_alias.so
+#LoadModule env_module         libexec/apache/mod_env.so
+LoadModule define_module      libexec/apache/mod_define.so
+LoadModule config_log_module  libexec/apache/mod_log_config.so
+LoadModule mime_magic_module  libexec/apache/mod_mime_magic.so
+LoadModule mime_module        libexec/apache/mod_mime.so
+LoadModule negotiation_module libexec/apache/mod_negotiation.so
+#LoadModule status_module      libexec/apache/mod_status.so
+#LoadModule info_module        libexec/apache/mod_info.so
+LoadModule includes_module    libexec/apache/mod_include.so
+LoadModule autoindex_module   libexec/apache/mod_autoindex.so
+LoadModule dir_module         libexec/apache/mod_dir.so
+LoadModule cgi_module         libexec/apache/mod_cgi.so
+#LoadModule asis_module        libexec/apache/mod_asis.so
+#LoadModule imap_module        libexec/apache/mod_imap.so
+#LoadModule action_module      libexec/apache/mod_actions.so
+#LoadModule speling_module     libexec/apache/mod_speling.so
+#LoadModule userdir_module     libexec/apache/mod_userdir.so
+LoadModule alias_module       libexec/apache/mod_alias.so
+LoadModule rewrite_module     libexec/apache/mod_rewrite.so
+LoadModule access_module      libexec/apache/mod_access.so
+LoadModule auth_module        libexec/apache/mod_auth.so
+LoadModule anon_auth_module   libexec/apache/mod_auth_anon.so
+#LoadModule dbm_auth_module    libexec/apache/mod_auth_dbm.so
+#LoadModule digest_module      libexec/apache/mod_digest.so
+LoadModule proxy_module       libexec/apache/libproxy.so
+LoadModule cern_meta_module   libexec/apache/mod_cern_meta.so
+LoadModule expires_module     libexec/apache/mod_expires.so
+LoadModule headers_module     libexec/apache/mod_headers.so
+#LoadModule usertrack_module   libexec/apache/mod_usertrack.so
+#LoadModule log_forensic_module libexec/apache/mod_log_forensic.so
+#LoadModule unique_id_module   libexec/apache/mod_unique_id.so
+LoadModule setenvif_module    libexec/apache/mod_setenvif.so
+
+#  Reconstruction of the complete module list from all available modules
+#  (static and shared ones) to achieve correct module execution order.
+#  [WHENEVER YOU CHANGE THE LOADMODULE SECTION ABOVE UPDATE THIS, TOO]
+ClearModuleList
+AddModule mod_vhost_alias.c
+#AddModule mod_env.c
+AddModule mod_define.c
+AddModule mod_log_config.c
+AddModule mod_mime_magic.c
+AddModule mod_mime.c
+AddModule mod_negotiation.c
+#AddModule mod_status.c
+#AddModule mod_info.c
+AddModule mod_include.c
+AddModule mod_autoindex.c
+AddModule mod_dir.c
+AddModule mod_cgi.c
+#AddModule mod_asis.c
+#AddModule mod_imap.c
+#AddModule mod_actions.c
+#AddModule mod_speling.c
+#AddModule mod_userdir.c
+AddModule mod_alias.c
+AddModule mod_rewrite.c
+AddModule mod_access.c
+AddModule mod_auth.c
+AddModule mod_auth_anon.c
+#AddModule mod_auth_dbm.c
+#AddModule mod_digest.c
+AddModule mod_proxy.c
+AddModule mod_cern_meta.c
+AddModule mod_expires.c
+AddModule mod_headers.c
+#AddModule mod_usertrack.c
+#AddModule mod_log_forensic.c
+#AddModule mod_unique_id.c
+AddModule mod_so.c
+AddModule mod_setenvif.c
+
+#
+# ExtendedStatus controls whether Apache will generate "full" status
+# information (ExtendedStatus On) or just basic information (ExtendedStatus
+# Off) when the "server-status" handler is called. The default is Off.
+#
+#ExtendedStatus On
+
+### Section 2: 'Main' server configuration
+#
+# The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main'
+# server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a
+# <VirtualHost> definition.  These values also provide defaults for
+# any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file.
+#
+# All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers,
+# in which case these default settings will be overridden for the
+# virtual host being defined.
+#
+
+#
+# If your ServerType directive (set earlier in the 'Global Environment'
+# section) is set to "inetd", the next few directives don't have any
+# effect since their settings are defined by the inetd configuration.
+# Skip ahead to the ServerAdmin directive.
+#
+
+#
+# Port: The port to which the standalone server listens. For
+# ports < 1023, you will need httpd to be run as root initially.
+#
+Port 80
+
+#
+# If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run
+# httpd as root initially and it will switch.  
+#
+# User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as.
+#  . On SCO (ODT 3) use "User nouser" and "Group nogroup".
+#  . On HPUX you may not be able to use shared memory as nobody, and the
+#    suggested workaround is to create a user www and use that user.
+#  NOTE that some kernels refuse to setgid(Group) or semctl(IPC_SET)
+#  when the value of (unsigned)Group is above 60000; 
+#  don't use Group "#-1" on these systems!
+#
+User nobody
+Group nobody
+
+#
+# ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be
+# e-mailed.  This address appears on some server-generated pages, such
+# as error documents.
+#
+ServerAdmin root@midas.slackware.lan
+
+#
+# ServerName allows you to set a host name which is sent back to clients for
+# your server if it's different than the one the program would get (i.e., use
+# "www" instead of the host's real name).
+#
+# Note: You cannot just invent host names and hope they work. The name you 
+# define here must be a valid DNS name for your host. If you don't understand
+# this, ask your network administrator.
+# If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here.
+# You will have to access it by its address (e.g., http://123.45.67.89/)
+# anyway, and this will make redirections work in a sensible way.
+#
+# 127.0.0.1 is the TCP/IP local loop-back address, often named localhost. Your 
+# machine always knows itself by this address. If you use Apache strictly for 
+# local testing and development, you may use 127.0.0.1 as the server name.
+#
+#ServerName www.example.com
+
+#
+# DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your
+# documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but
+# symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations.
+#
+DocumentRoot "/var/www/htdocs"
+
+#
+# Each directory to which Apache has access, can be configured with respect
+# to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that
+# directory (and its subdirectories). 
+#
+# First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of 
+# permissions.  
+#
+<Directory />
+    Options FollowSymLinks
+    AllowOverride None
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow
+# particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as
+# you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it
+# below.
+#
+
+#
+# This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to.
+#
+<Directory "/var/www/htdocs">
+
+#
+# This may also be "None", "All", or any combination of "Indexes",
+# "Includes", "FollowSymLinks", "ExecCGI", or "MultiViews".
+#
+# Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All"
+# doesn't give it to you.
+#
+    Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews
+
+#
+# This controls which options the .htaccess files in directories can
+# override. Can also be "All", or any combination of "Options", "FileInfo", 
+# "AuthConfig", and "Limit"
+#
+    AllowOverride None
+
+#
+# Controls who can get stuff from this server.
+#
+    Order allow,deny
+    Allow from all
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# UserDir: The name of the directory which is appended onto a user's home
+# directory if a ~user request is received.
+#
+<IfModule mod_userdir.c>
+    UserDir public_html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# Control access to UserDir directories.  The following is an example
+# for a site where these directories are restricted to read-only.
+#
+#<Directory /home/*/public_html>
+#    AllowOverride FileInfo AuthConfig Limit
+#    Options MultiViews Indexes SymLinksIfOwnerMatch IncludesNoExec
+#    <Limit GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order allow,deny
+#        Allow from all
+#    </Limit>
+#    <LimitExcept GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order deny,allow
+#        Deny from all
+#    </LimitExcept>
+#</Directory>
+
+#
+# DirectoryIndex: Name of the file or files to use as a pre-written HTML
+# directory index.  Separate multiple entries with spaces.
+#
+<IfModule mod_dir.c>
+    DirectoryIndex index.html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# AccessFileName: The name of the file to look for in each directory
+# for access control information.
+#
+AccessFileName .htaccess
+
+#
+# The following lines prevent .htaccess files from being viewed by
+# Web clients.  Since .htaccess files often contain authorization
+# information, access is disallowed for security reasons.  Comment
+# these lines out if you want Web visitors to see the contents of
+# .htaccess files.  If you change the AccessFileName directive above,
+# be sure to make the corresponding changes here.
+#
+# Also, folks tend to use names such as .htpasswd for password
+# files, so this will protect those as well.
+#
+<Files ~ "^\.ht">
+    Order allow,deny
+    Deny from all
+    Satisfy All
+</Files>
+
+#
+# CacheNegotiatedDocs: By default, Apache sends "Pragma: no-cache" with each
+# document that was negotiated on the basis of content. This asks proxy
+# servers not to cache the document. Uncommenting the following line disables
+# this behavior, and proxies will be allowed to cache the documents.
+#
+#CacheNegotiatedDocs
+
+#
+# UseCanonicalName:  (new for 1.3)  With this setting turned on, whenever
+# Apache needs to construct a self-referencing URL (a URL that refers back
+# to the server the response is coming from) it will use ServerName and
+# Port to form a "canonical" name.  With this setting off, Apache will
+# use the hostname:port that the client supplied, when possible.  This
+# also affects SERVER_NAME and SERVER_PORT in CGI scripts.
+#
+UseCanonicalName On
+
+#
+# TypesConfig describes where the mime.types file (or equivalent) is
+# to be found.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+    TypesConfig /etc/apache/mime.types
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# DefaultType is the default MIME type the server will use for a document
+# if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions.
+# If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is
+# a good value.  If most of your content is binary, such as applications
+# or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to
+# keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are
+# text.
+#
+DefaultType text/plain
+
+#
+# The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the
+# contents of the file itself to determine its type.  The MIMEMagicFile
+# directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located.
+# mod_mime_magic is not part of the default server (you have to add
+# it yourself with a LoadModule [see the DSO paragraph in the 'Global
+# Environment' section], or recompile the server and include mod_mime_magic
+# as part of the configuration), so it's enclosed in an <IfModule> container.
+# This means that the MIMEMagicFile directive will only be processed if the
+# module is part of the server.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime_magic.c>
+    MIMEMagicFile /etc/apache/magic
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# HostnameLookups: Log the names of clients or just their IP addresses
+# e.g., www.apache.org (on) or 204.62.129.132 (off).
+# The default is off because it'd be overall better for the net if people
+# had to knowingly turn this feature on, since enabling it means that
+# each client request will result in AT LEAST one lookup request to the
+# nameserver.
+#
+HostnameLookups Off
+
+#
+# ErrorLog: The location of the error log file.
+# If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be
+# logged here.  If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost>
+# container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here.
+#
+ErrorLog "| /usr/bin/error-log.sh /var/log/apache/error_log"
+
+#
+# LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log.
+# Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit,
+# alert, emerg.
+#
+LogLevel warn
+
+#
+# The following directives define some format nicknames for use with
+# a CustomLog directive (see below).
+#
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common
+LogFormat "%{Referer}i -> %U" referer
+LogFormat "%{User-agent}i" agent
+
+#
+# The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format).
+# If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, they will be logged here.  Contrariwise, if you *do*
+# define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be
+# logged therein and *not* in this file.
+#
+CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log common
+
+#
+# If you would like to have agent and referer logfiles, uncomment the
+# following directives.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/referer_log referer
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/agent_log agent
+
+#
+# If you prefer a single logfile with access, agent, and referer information
+# (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log combined
+
+#
+# Optionally add a line containing the server version and virtual host
+# name to server-generated pages (error documents, FTP directory listings,
+# mod_status and mod_info output etc., but not CGI generated documents).
+# Set to "EMail" to also include a mailto: link to the ServerAdmin.
+# Set to one of:  On | Off | EMail
+#
+ServerSignature Off
+
+# EBCDIC configuration:
+# (only for mainframes using the EBCDIC codeset, currently one of:
+# Fujitsu-Siemens' BS2000/OSD, IBM's OS/390 and IBM's TPF)!!
+# The following default configuration assumes that "text files"
+# are stored in EBCDIC (so that you can operate on them using the
+# normal POSIX tools like grep and sort) while "binary files" are
+# stored with identical octets as on an ASCII machine.
+#
+# The directives are evaluated in configuration file order, with
+# the EBCDICConvert directives applied before EBCDICConvertByType.
+#
+# If you want to have ASCII HTML documents and EBCDIC HTML documents
+# at the same time, you can use the file extension to force
+# conversion off for the ASCII documents:
+# > AddType       text/html .ahtml
+# > EBCDICConvert Off=InOut .ahtml
+#
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut text/* message/* multipart/*
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=In    application/x-www-form-urlencoded
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut application/postscript model/vrml
+# EBCDICConvertByType Off=InOut */*
+
+
+#
+# Aliases: Add here as many aliases as you need (with no limit). The format is 
+# Alias fakename realname
+#
+<IfModule mod_alias.c>
+
+    #
+    # Note that if you include a trailing / on fakename then the server will
+    # require it to be present in the URL.  So "/icons" isn't aliased in this
+    # example, only "/icons/".  If the fakename is slash-terminated, then the 
+    # realname must also be slash terminated, and if the fakename omits the 
+    # trailing slash, the realname must also omit it.
+    #
+    Alias /icons/ "/var/www/icons/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/icons">
+        Options Indexes MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    # This Alias will project the on-line documentation tree under /manual/
+    # even if you change the DocumentRoot. Comment it if you don't want to 
+    # provide access to the on-line documentation.
+    #
+    Alias /manual/ "/var/www/htdocs/manual/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/htdocs/manual">
+        Options Indexes FollowSymlinks MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    #
+    # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts.
+    # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that
+    # documents in the realname directory are treated as applications and
+    # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the client.
+    # The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias directives as to
+    # Alias.
+    #
+    ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/var/www/cgi-bin/"
+
+    #
+    # "/var/www/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased
+    # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured.
+    #
+    <Directory "/var/www/cgi-bin">
+        AllowOverride None
+        Options None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of aliases.
+
+#
+# Redirect allows you to tell clients about documents which used to exist in
+# your server's namespace, but do not anymore. This allows you to tell the
+# clients where to look for the relocated document.
+# Format: Redirect old-URI new-URL
+#
+
+#
+# Directives controlling the display of server-generated directory listings.
+#
+<IfModule mod_autoindex.c>
+
+    #
+    # FancyIndexing is whether you want fancy directory indexing or standard
+    #
+    IndexOptions FancyIndexing
+
+    #
+    # AddIcon* directives tell the server which icon to show for different
+    # files or filename extensions.  These are only displayed for
+    # FancyIndexed directories.
+    #
+    AddIconByEncoding (CMP,/icons/compressed.gif) x-compress x-gzip
+
+    AddIconByType (TXT,/icons/text.gif) text/*
+    AddIconByType (IMG,/icons/image2.gif) image/*
+    AddIconByType (SND,/icons/sound2.gif) audio/*
+    AddIconByType (VID,/icons/movie.gif) video/*
+
+    AddIcon /icons/binary.gif .bin .exe
+    AddIcon /icons/binhex.gif .hqx
+    AddIcon /icons/tar.gif .tar
+    AddIcon /icons/world2.gif .wrl .wrl.gz .vrml .vrm .iv
+    AddIcon /icons/compressed.gif .Z .z .tgz .gz .zip
+    AddIcon /icons/a.gif .ps .ai .eps
+    AddIcon /icons/layout.gif .html .shtml .htm .pdf
+    AddIcon /icons/text.gif .txt
+    AddIcon /icons/c.gif .c
+    AddIcon /icons/p.gif .pl .py
+    AddIcon /icons/f.gif .for
+    AddIcon /icons/dvi.gif .dvi
+    AddIcon /icons/uuencoded.gif .uu
+    AddIcon /icons/script.gif .conf .sh .shar .csh .ksh .tcl
+    AddIcon /icons/tex.gif .tex
+    AddIcon /icons/bomb.gif core
+
+    AddIcon /icons/back.gif ..
+    AddIcon /icons/hand.right.gif README
+    AddIcon /icons/folder.gif ^^DIRECTORY^^
+    AddIcon /icons/blank.gif ^^BLANKICON^^
+
+    #
+    # DefaultIcon is which icon to show for files which do not have an icon
+    # explicitly set.
+    #
+    DefaultIcon /icons/unknown.gif
+
+    #
+    # AddDescription allows you to place a short description after a file in
+    # server-generated indexes.  These are only displayed for FancyIndexed
+    # directories.
+    # Format: AddDescription "description" filename
+    #
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed document" .gz
+    #AddDescription "tar archive" .tar
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed tar archive" .tgz
+
+    #
+    # ReadmeName is the name of the README file the server will look for by
+    # default, and append to directory listings.
+    #
+    # HeaderName is the name of a file which should be prepended to
+    # directory indexes. 
+    #
+    ReadmeName README.html
+    HeaderName HEADER.html
+
+    #
+    # IndexIgnore is a set of filenames which directory indexing should ignore
+    # and not include in the listing.  Shell-style wildcarding is permitted.
+    #
+    IndexIgnore .??* *~ *# HEADER* README* RCS CVS *,v *,t
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of indexing directives.
+
+#
+# Document types.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+
+    #
+    # AddLanguage allows you to specify the language of a document. You can
+    # then use content negotiation to give a browser a file in a language
+    # it can understand.  
+    #
+    # Note 1: The suffix does not have to be the same as the language 
+    # keyword --- those with documents in Polish (whose net-standard 
+    # language code is pl) may wish to use "AddLanguage pl .po" to 
+    # avoid the ambiguity with the common suffix for perl scripts.
+    #
+    # Note 2: The example entries below illustrate that in quite
+    # some cases the two character 'Language' abbreviation is not
+    # identical to the two character 'Country' code for its country,
+    # E.g. 'Danmark/dk' versus 'Danish/da'.
+    #
+    # Note 3: In the case of 'ltz' we violate the RFC by using a three char 
+    # specifier. But there is 'work in progress' to fix this and get 
+    # the reference data for rfc1766 cleaned up.
+    #
+    # Danish (da) - Dutch (nl) - English (en) - Estonian (ee)
+    # French (fr) - German (de) - Greek-Modern (el)
+    # Italian (it) - Korean (kr) - Norwegian (no) - Norwegian Nynorsk (nn)
+    # Portugese (pt) - Luxembourgeois* (ltz)
+    # Spanish (es) - Swedish (sv) - Catalan (ca) - Czech(cs)
+    # Polish (pl) - Brazilian Portuguese (pt-br) - Japanese (ja)
+    # Russian (ru)
+    #
+    AddLanguage da .dk
+    AddLanguage nl .nl
+    AddLanguage en .en
+    AddLanguage et .ee
+    AddLanguage fr .fr
+    AddLanguage de .de
+    AddLanguage el .el
+    AddLanguage he .he
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-8 .iso8859-8
+    AddLanguage it .it
+    AddLanguage ja .ja
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-JP .jis
+    AddLanguage kr .kr
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-KR .iso-kr
+    AddLanguage nn .nn
+    AddLanguage no .no
+    AddLanguage pl .po
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-2 .iso-pl
+    AddLanguage pt .pt
+    AddLanguage pt-br .pt-br
+    AddLanguage ltz .lu
+    AddLanguage ca .ca
+    AddLanguage es .es
+    AddLanguage sv .sv
+    AddLanguage cs .cz .cs
+    AddLanguage ru .ru
+    AddLanguage zh-TW .zh-tw
+    AddCharset Big5         .Big5    .big5
+    AddCharset WINDOWS-1251 .cp-1251
+    AddCharset CP866        .cp866
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-5   .iso-ru
+    AddCharset KOI8-R       .koi8-r
+    AddCharset UCS-2        .ucs2
+    AddCharset UCS-4        .ucs4
+    AddCharset UTF-8        .utf8
+
+    # LanguagePriority allows you to give precedence to some languages
+    # in case of a tie during content negotiation.
+    #
+    # Just list the languages in decreasing order of preference. We have
+    # more or less alphabetized them here. You probably want to change this.
+    #
+    <IfModule mod_negotiation.c>
+        LanguagePriority en da nl et fr de el it ja kr no pl pt pt-br ru ltz ca es sv tw
+    </IfModule>
+
+    #
+    # AddType allows you to tweak mime.types without actually editing it, or to
+    # make certain files to be certain types.
+    #
+    AddType application/x-tar .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress
+    # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this.
+    # Despite the name similarity, the following Add* directives have nothing
+    # to do with the FancyIndexing customization directives above.
+    #
+    AddEncoding x-compress .Z
+    AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz
+    #
+    # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you
+    # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types:
+    #
+    #AddType application/x-compress .Z
+    #AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers",
+    # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server
+    # or added with the Action command (see below)
+    #
+    # If you want to use server side includes, or CGI outside
+    # ScriptAliased directories, uncomment the following lines.
+    #
+    # To use CGI scripts:
+    #
+    #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi
+
+    #
+    # To use server-parsed HTML files
+    #
+    #AddType text/html .shtml
+    #AddHandler server-parsed .shtml
+
+    #
+    # Uncomment the following line to enable Apache's send-asis HTTP file
+    # feature
+    #
+    #AddHandler send-as-is asis
+
+    #
+    # If you wish to use server-parsed imagemap files, use
+    #
+    #AddHandler imap-file map
+
+    #
+    # To enable type maps, you might want to use
+    #
+    #AddHandler type-map var
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of document types.
+
+#
+# Action lets you define media types that will execute a script whenever
+# a matching file is called. This eliminates the need for repeated URL
+# pathnames for oft-used CGI file processors.
+# Format: Action media/type /cgi-script/location
+# Format: Action handler-name /cgi-script/location
+#
+
+#
+# MetaDir: specifies the name of the directory in which Apache can find
+# meta information files. These files contain additional HTTP headers
+# to include when sending the document
+#
+#MetaDir .web
+
+#
+# MetaSuffix: specifies the file name suffix for the file containing the
+# meta information.
+#
+#MetaSuffix .meta
+
+#
+# Customizable error response (Apache style)
+#  these come in three flavors
+#
+#    1) plain text
+ErrorDocument 500 /missing.html
+#  n.b.  the single leading (") marks it as text, it does not get output
+#
+#    2) local redirects
+ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html
+#  to redirect to local URL /missing.html
+#ErrorDocument 404 /cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl
+#  N.B.: You can redirect to a script or a document using server-side-includes.
+#
+#    3) external redirects
+ErrorDocument 402 /missing.html
+#  N.B.: Many of the environment variables associated with the original
+#  request will *not* be available to such a script.
+
+#
+# Customize behaviour based on the browser
+#
+<IfModule mod_setenvif.c>
+
+    #
+    # The following directives modify normal HTTP response behavior.
+    # The first directive disables keepalive for Netscape 2.x and browsers that
+    # spoof it. There are known problems with these browser implementations.
+    # The second directive is for Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0b2
+    # which has a broken HTTP/1.1 implementation and does not properly
+    # support keepalive when it is used on 301 or 302 (redirect) responses.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "Mozilla/2" nokeepalive
+    BrowserMatch "MSIE 4\.0b2;" nokeepalive downgrade-1.0 force-response-1.0
+
+    #
+    # The following directive disables HTTP/1.1 responses to browsers which
+    # are in violation of the HTTP/1.0 spec by not being able to grok a
+    # basic 1.1 response.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "RealPlayer 4\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "Java/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "JDK/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of browser customization directives
+
+#
+# Allow server status reports, with the URL of http://servername/server-status
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-status>
+#    SetHandler server-status
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# Allow remote server configuration reports, with the URL of
+# http://servername/server-info (requires that mod_info.c be loaded).
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-info>
+#    SetHandler server-info
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# There have been reports of people trying to abuse an old bug from pre-1.1
+# days.  This bug involved a CGI script distributed as a part of Apache.
+# By uncommenting these lines you can redirect these attacks to a logging 
+# script on phf.apache.org.  Or, you can record them yourself, using the script
+# support/phf_abuse_log.cgi.
+#
+#<Location /cgi-bin/phf*>
+#    Deny from all
+#    ErrorDocument 403 http://phf.apache.org/phf_abuse_log.cgi
+#</Location>
+
+### Section 3: Virtual Hosts
+#
+# VirtualHost: If you want to maintain multiple domains/hostnames on your
+# machine you can setup VirtualHost containers for them. Most configurations
+# use only name-based virtual hosts so the server doesn't need to worry about
+# IP addresses. This is indicated by the asterisks in the directives below.
+#
+# Please see the documentation at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/vhosts/>
+# for further details before you try to setup virtual hosts.
+#
+# You may use the command line option '-S' to verify your virtual host
+# configuration.
+
+#
+# Use name-based virtual hosting.
+#
+#NameVirtualHost *:80
+
+#
+# VirtualHost example:
+# Almost any Apache directive may go into a VirtualHost container.
+# The first VirtualHost section is used for requests without a known
+# server name.
+#
+#<VirtualHost *:80>
+#    ServerAdmin webmaster@dummy-host.example.com
+#    DocumentRoot /www/docs/dummy-host.example.com
+#    ServerName dummy-host.example.com
+#    ErrorLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-error_log
+#    CustomLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-access_log common
+#</VirtualHost>
+
+# By default, all external Apache modules are disabled.  To enable a particular
+# module for Apache, make sure the necessary packages are installed.  Then
+# uncomment the appropriate Include line below, save the file, and restart
+# Apache.  Note that some modules may need additional configuration steps.  For
+# example, mod_ssl requires a site certificate which you may need to generate.
+#
+# Lastly, if you remove a module package, be sure to edit this file and comment
+# out the appropriate Include line.
+
+# ==> mod_php configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  openssl-solibs (A series) and/or openssl (N series),
+#                     mysql (AP series), gmp (L series), mhash (L series),
+#                     and apache (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_php.conf
+
+# ==> mod_ssl configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  apache (N series) and openssl (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_ssl.conf
+
+#NameVirtualHost VSERVER_IP
+
+Include /etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/php.ini b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/php.ini
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6cddef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/php.ini
@@ -0,0 +1,1122 @@
+[PHP]
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; About this file ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; This is the recommended, PHP 4-style version of the php.ini-dist file.  It
+; sets some non standard settings, that make PHP more efficient, more secure,
+; and encourage cleaner coding.
+; The price is that with these settings, PHP may be incompatible with some
+; applications, and sometimes, more difficult to develop with.  Using this
+; file is warmly recommended for production sites.  As all of the changes from
+; the standard settings are thoroughly documented, you can go over each one,
+; and decide whether you want to use it or not.
+;
+; For general information about the php.ini file, please consult the php.ini-dist
+; file, included in your PHP distribution.
+;
+; This file is different from the php.ini-dist file in the fact that it features
+; different values for several directives, in order to improve performance, while
+; possibly breaking compatibility with the standard out-of-the-box behavior of
+; PHP 3.  Please make sure you read what's different, and modify your scripts
+; accordingly, if you decide to use this file instead.
+;
+; - register_globals = Off         [Security, Performance]
+;     Global variables are no longer registered for input data (POST, GET, cookies,
+;     environment and other server variables).  Instead of using $foo, you must use
+;     you can use $_REQUEST["foo"] (includes any variable that arrives through the
+;     request, namely, POST, GET and cookie variables), or use one of the specific
+;     $_GET["foo"], $_POST["foo"], $_COOKIE["foo"] or $_FILES["foo"], depending
+;     on where the input originates.  Also, you can look at the
+;     import_request_variables() function.
+;     Note that register_globals is going to be depracated (i.e., turned off by
+;     default) in the next version of PHP, because it often leads to security bugs.
+;     Read http://php.net/manual/en/security.registerglobals.php for further
+;     information.
+; - display_errors = Off           [Security]
+;     With this directive set to off, errors that occur during the execution of
+;     scripts will no longer be displayed as a part of the script output, and thus,
+;     will no longer be exposed to remote users.  With some errors, the error message
+;     content may expose information about your script, web server, or database
+;     server that may be exploitable for hacking.  Production sites should have this
+;     directive set to off.
+; - log_errors = On                [Security]
+;     This directive complements the above one.  Any errors that occur during the
+;     execution of your script will be logged (typically, to your server's error log,
+;     but can be configured in several ways).  Along with setting display_errors to off,
+;     this setup gives you the ability to fully understand what may have gone wrong,
+;     without exposing any sensitive information to remote users.
+; - output_buffering = 4096        [Performance]
+;     Set a 4KB output buffer.  Enabling output buffering typically results in less
+;     writes, and sometimes less packets sent on the wire, which can often lead to
+;     better performance.  The gain this directive actually yields greatly depends
+;     on which Web server you're working with, and what kind of scripts you're using.
+; - register_argc_argv = Off       [Performance]
+;     Disables registration of the somewhat redundant $argv and $argc global
+;     variables.
+; - magic_quotes_gpc = Off         [Performance]
+;     Input data is no longer escaped with slashes so that it can be sent into
+;     SQL databases without further manipulation.  Instead, you should use the
+;     function addslashes() on each input element you wish to send to a database.
+; - variables_order = "GPCS"       [Performance]
+;     The environment variables are not hashed into the $HTTP_ENV_VARS[].  To access
+;     environment variables, you can use getenv() instead.
+; - error_reporting = E_ALL        [Code Cleanliness, Security(?)]
+;     By default, PHP surpresses errors of type E_NOTICE.  These error messages
+;     are emitted for non-critical errors, but that could be a symptom of a bigger
+;     problem.  Most notably, this will cause error messages about the use
+;     of uninitialized variables to be displayed.
+; - allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off     [Code cleanliness]
+;     It's not possible to decide to force a variable to be passed by reference
+;     when calling a function.  The PHP 4 style to do this is by making the
+;     function require the relevant argument by reference.
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Language Options ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Enable the PHP scripting language engine under Apache.
+engine = On
+
+; Allow the <? tag.  Otherwise, only <?php and <script> tags are recognized.  
+; NOTE: Using short tags should be avoided when developing applications or
+; libraries that are meant for redistribution, or deployment on PHP
+; servers which are not under your control, because short tags may not
+; be supported on the target server. For portable, redistributable code,
+; be sure not to use short tags.
+short_open_tag = On
+
+; Allow ASP-style <% %> tags.
+asp_tags = Off
+
+; The number of significant digits displayed in floating point numbers.
+precision    =  14
+
+; Enforce year 2000 compliance (will cause problems with non-compliant browsers)
+y2k_compliance = On
+
+; Output buffering allows you to send header lines (including cookies) even
+; after you send body content, at the price of slowing PHP's output layer a
+; bit.  You can enable output buffering during runtime by calling the output
+; buffering functions.  You can also enable output buffering for all files by
+; setting this directive to On.  If you wish to limit the size of the buffer
+; to a certain size - you can use a maximum number of bytes instead of 'On', as
+; a value for this directive (e.g., output_buffering=4096).
+output_buffering = 4096
+
+; You can redirect all of the output of your scripts to a function.  For
+; example, if you set output_handler to "mb_output_handler", character
+; encoding will be transparently converted to the specified encoding.
+; Setting any output handler automatically turns on output buffering.
+; Note: People who wrote portable scripts should not depend on this ini
+;       directive. Instead, explicitly set the output handler using ob_start().
+;       Using this ini directive may cause problems unless you know what script 
+;       is doing.
+; Note: You cannot use both "mb_output_handler" with "ob_iconv_handler"
+;       and you cannot use both "ob_gzhandler" and "zlib.output_compression". 
+;output_handler =
+
+; Transparent output compression using the zlib library
+; Valid values for this option are 'off', 'on', or a specific buffer size
+; to be used for compression (default is 4KB)
+; Note: Resulting chunk size may vary due to nature of compression. PHP 
+;       outputs chunks that are few handreds bytes each as a result of compression. 
+;       If you want larger chunk size for better performence, enable output_buffering 
+;       also. 
+; Note: output_handler must be empty if this is set 'On' !!!!
+;       Instead you must use zlib.output_handler.
+zlib.output_compression = Off
+
+; You cannot specify additional output handlers if zlib.output_compression
+; is activated here. This setting does the same as output_handler but in
+; a different order.
+;zlib.output_handler =
+
+; Implicit flush tells PHP to tell the output layer to flush itself
+; automatically after every output block.  This is equivalent to calling the
+; PHP function flush() after each and every call to print() or echo() and each
+; and every HTML block.  Turning this option on has serious performance
+; implications and is generally recommended for debugging purposes only.
+implicit_flush = Off
+
+; The unserialize callback function will be called (with the undefined class'
+; name as parameter), if the unserializer finds an undefined class
+; which should be instanciated.
+; A warning appears if the specified function is not defined, or if the
+; function doesn't include/implement the missing class.
+; So only set this entry, if you really want to implement such a 
+; callback-function.
+unserialize_callback_func=
+
+; When floats & doubles are serialized store serialize_precision significant
+; digits after the floating point. The default value ensures that when floats
+; are decoded with unserialize, the data will remain the same.
+serialize_precision = 100
+
+; Whether to enable the ability to force arguments to be passed by reference
+; at function call time.  This method is deprecated and is likely to be
+; unsupported in future versions of PHP/Zend.  The encouraged method of
+; specifying which arguments should be passed by reference is in the function
+; declaration.  You're encouraged to try and turn this option Off and make
+; sure your scripts work properly with it in order to ensure they will work
+; with future versions of the language (you will receive a warning each time
+; you use this feature, and the argument will be passed by value instead of by
+; reference).
+allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off
+
+;
+; Safe Mode
+;
+safe_mode = Off
+
+; By default, Safe Mode does a UID compare check when
+; opening files. If you want to relax this to a GID compare,
+; then turn on safe_mode_gid.
+safe_mode_gid = Off
+
+; When safe_mode is on, UID/GID checks are bypassed when
+; including files from this directory and its subdirectories.
+; (directory must also be in include_path or full path must
+; be used when including)
+safe_mode_include_dir =								
+
+; When safe_mode is on, only executables located in the safe_mode_exec_dir
+; will be allowed to be executed via the exec family of functions.
+safe_mode_exec_dir =
+
+; Setting certain environment variables may be a potential security breach.
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of prefixes.  In Safe Mode,
+; the user may only alter environment variables whose names begin with the
+; prefixes supplied here.  By default, users will only be able to set
+; environment variables that begin with PHP_ (e.g. PHP_FOO=BAR).
+;
+; Note:  If this directive is empty, PHP will let the user modify ANY
+; environment variable!
+safe_mode_allowed_env_vars = PHP_
+
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of environment variables that
+; the end user won't be able to change using putenv().  These variables will be
+; protected even if safe_mode_allowed_env_vars is set to allow to change them.
+safe_mode_protected_env_vars = LD_LIBRARY_PATH
+
+; open_basedir, if set, limits all file operations to the defined directory
+; and below.  This directive makes most sense if used in a per-directory
+; or per-virtualhost web server configuration file. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+;open_basedir =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain functions for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of function names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_functions =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain classes for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of class names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_classes =
+
+; Colors for Syntax Highlighting mode.  Anything that's acceptable in
+; <font color="??????"> would work.
+;highlight.string  = #DD0000
+;highlight.comment = #FF9900
+;highlight.keyword = #007700
+;highlight.bg      = #FFFFFF
+;highlight.default = #0000BB
+;highlight.html    = #000000
+
+
+;
+; Misc
+;
+; Decides whether PHP may expose the fact that it is installed on the server
+; (e.g. by adding its signature to the Web server header).  It is no security
+; threat in any way, but it makes it possible to determine whether you use PHP
+; on your server or not.
+expose_php = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Resource Limits ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+max_execution_time = 30     ; Maximum execution time of each script, in seconds
+max_input_time = 60	; Maximum amount of time each script may spend parsing request data
+memory_limit = 8M      ; Maximum amount of memory a script may consume (8MB)
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Error handling and logging ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; error_reporting is a bit-field.  Or each number up to get desired error
+; reporting level
+; E_ALL             - All errors and warnings
+; E_ERROR           - fatal run-time errors
+; E_WARNING         - run-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_PARSE           - compile-time parse errors
+; E_NOTICE          - run-time notices (these are warnings which often result
+;                     from a bug in your code, but it's possible that it was
+;                     intentional (e.g., using an uninitialized variable and
+;                     relying on the fact it's automatically initialized to an
+;                     empty string)
+; E_CORE_ERROR      - fatal errors that occur during PHP's initial startup
+; E_CORE_WARNING    - warnings (non-fatal errors) that occur during PHP's
+;                     initial startup
+; E_COMPILE_ERROR   - fatal compile-time errors
+; E_COMPILE_WARNING - compile-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_USER_ERROR      - user-generated error message
+; E_USER_WARNING    - user-generated warning message
+; E_USER_NOTICE     - user-generated notice message
+;
+; Examples:
+;
+;   - Show all errors, except for notices
+;
+;error_reporting = E_ALL & ~E_NOTICE
+;
+;   - Show only errors
+;
+;error_reporting = E_COMPILE_ERROR|E_ERROR|E_CORE_ERROR
+;
+;   - Show all errors
+;
+error_reporting  =  E_ALL
+
+; Print out errors (as a part of the output).  For production web sites,
+; you're strongly encouraged to turn this feature off, and use error logging
+; instead (see below).  Keeping display_errors enabled on a production web site
+; may reveal security information to end users, such as file paths on your Web
+; server, your database schema or other information.
+display_errors = Off
+
+; Even when display_errors is on, errors that occur during PHP's startup
+; sequence are not displayed.  It's strongly recommended to keep
+; display_startup_errors off, except for when debugging.
+display_startup_errors = Off
+
+; Log errors into a log file (server-specific log, stderr, or error_log (below))
+; As stated above, you're strongly advised to use error logging in place of
+; error displaying on production web sites.
+log_errors = On
+
+; Set maximum length of log_errors. In error_log information about the source is
+; added. The default is 1024 and 0 allows to not apply any maximum length at all.
+log_errors_max_len = 1024
+
+; Do not log repeated messages. Repeated errors must occur in same file on same
+; line until ignore_repeated_source is set true.
+ignore_repeated_errors = Off
+
+; Ignore source of message when ignoring repeated messages. When this setting 
+; is On you will not log errors with repeated messages from different files or
+; sourcelines.
+ignore_repeated_source = Off
+
+; If this parameter is set to Off, then memory leaks will not be shown (on
+; stdout or in the log). This has only effect in a debug compile, and if 
+; error reporting includes E_WARNING in the allowed list
+report_memleaks = On
+
+; Store the last error/warning message in $php_errormsg (boolean).
+track_errors = Off
+
+; Disable the inclusion of HTML tags in error messages.
+;html_errors = Off
+
+; If html_errors is set On PHP produces clickable error messages that direct 
+; to a page describing the error or function causing the error in detail.
+; You can download a copy of the PHP manual from http://www.php.net/docs.php 
+; and change docref_root to the base URL of your local copy including the
+; leading '/'. You must also specify the file extension being used including 
+; the dot.
+;docref_root = "/phpmanual/"
+;docref_ext = .html
+  
+; String to output before an error message.
+;error_prepend_string = "<font color=ff0000>"
+
+; String to output after an error message.
+;error_append_string = "</font>"
+
+; Log errors to specified file.
+;error_log = filename
+
+; Log errors to syslog (Event Log on NT, not valid in Windows 95).
+;error_log = syslog
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Data Handling ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; Note - track_vars is ALWAYS enabled as of PHP 4.0.3
+
+; The separator used in PHP generated URLs to separate arguments.
+; Default is "&". 
+;arg_separator.output = "&amp;"
+
+; List of separator(s) used by PHP to parse input URLs into variables.
+; Default is "&". 
+; NOTE: Every character in this directive is considered as separator!
+;arg_separator.input = ";&"
+
+; This directive describes the order in which PHP registers GET, POST, Cookie,
+; Environment and Built-in variables (G, P, C, E & S respectively, often
+; referred to as EGPCS or GPC).  Registration is done from left to right, newer
+; values override older values.
+variables_order = "GPCS"
+
+; Whether or not to register the EGPCS variables as global variables.  You may
+; want to turn this off if you don't want to clutter your scripts' global scope
+; with user data.  This makes most sense when coupled with track_vars - in which
+; case you can access all of the GPC variables through the $HTTP_*_VARS[],
+; variables.
+;
+; You should do your best to write your scripts so that they do not require
+; register_globals to be on;  Using form variables as globals can easily lead
+; to possible security problems, if the code is not very well thought of.
+register_globals = Off
+
+; This directive tells PHP whether to declare the argv&argc variables (that
+; would contain the GET information).  If you don't use these variables, you
+; should turn it off for increased performance.
+register_argc_argv = Off
+
+; Maximum size of POST data that PHP will accept.
+post_max_size = 8M
+
+; This directive is deprecated.  Use variables_order instead.
+gpc_order = "GPC"
+
+; Magic quotes
+;
+
+; Magic quotes for incoming GET/POST/Cookie data.
+magic_quotes_gpc = Off
+
+; Magic quotes for runtime-generated data, e.g. data from SQL, from exec(), etc.
+magic_quotes_runtime = Off    
+
+; Use Sybase-style magic quotes (escape ' with '' instead of \').
+magic_quotes_sybase = Off
+
+; Automatically add files before or after any PHP document.
+auto_prepend_file =
+auto_append_file =
+
+; As of 4.0b4, PHP always outputs a character encoding by default in
+; the Content-type: header.  To disable sending of the charset, simply
+; set it to be empty.
+;
+; PHP's built-in default is text/html
+default_mimetype = "text/html"
+;default_charset = "iso-8859-1"
+
+; Always populate the $HTTP_RAW_POST_DATA variable.                               
+;always_populate_raw_post_data = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Paths and Directories ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; UNIX: "/path1:/path2"  
+;include_path = ".:/php/includes"
+;
+; Windows: "\path1;\path2"
+;include_path = ".;c:\php\includes"
+
+; The root of the PHP pages, used only if nonempty.
+; if PHP was not compiled with FORCE_REDIRECT, you SHOULD set doc_root
+; if you are running php as a CGI under any web server (other than IIS)
+; see documentation for security issues.  The alternate is to use the
+; cgi.force_redirect configuration below
+doc_root =
+
+; The directory under which PHP opens the script using /~usernamem used only
+; if nonempty.
+user_dir =
+
+; Directory in which the loadable extensions (modules) reside.
+; extension_dir = "./"
+extension_dir = "/usr/lib/php/extensions/"
+
+; Whether or not to enable the dl() function.  The dl() function does NOT work
+; properly in multithreaded servers, such as IIS or Zeus, and is automatically
+; disabled on them.
+enable_dl = On
+
+; cgi.force_redirect is necessary to provide security running PHP as a CGI under
+; most web servers.  Left undefined, PHP turns this on by default.  You can
+; turn it off here AT YOUR OWN RISK
+; **You CAN safely turn this off for IIS, in fact, you MUST.**
+; cgi.force_redirect = 1
+
+; if cgi.nph is enabled it will force cgi to always sent Status: 200 with
+; every request.
+; cgi.nph = 1
+
+; if cgi.force_redirect is turned on, and you are not running under Apache or Netscape 
+; (iPlanet) web servers, you MAY need to set an environment variable name that PHP
+; will look for to know it is OK to continue execution.  Setting this variable MAY
+; cause security issues, KNOW WHAT YOU ARE DOING FIRST.
+; cgi.redirect_status_env = ;
+
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo provides *real* PATH_INFO/PATH_TRANSLATED support for CGI.  PHP's
+; previous behaviour was to set PATH_TRANSLATED to SCRIPT_FILENAME, and to not grok
+; what PATH_INFO is.  For more information on PATH_INFO, see the cgi specs.  Setting
+; this to 1 will cause PHP CGI to fix it's paths to conform to the spec.  A setting
+; of zero causes PHP to behave as before.  Default is zero.  You should fix your scripts
+; to use SCRIPT_FILENAME rather than PATH_TRANSLATED.
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo=1
+
+; FastCGI under IIS (on WINNT based OS) supports the ability to impersonate
+; security tokens of the calling client.  This allows IIS to define the
+; security context that the request runs under.  mod_fastcgi under Apache
+; does not currently support this feature (03/17/2002)
+; Set to 1 if running under IIS.  Default is zero.
+; fastcgi.impersonate = 1;
+
+; Disable logging through FastCGI connection
+; fastcgi.log = 0
+
+; cgi.rfc2616_headers configuration option tells PHP what type of headers to
+; use when sending HTTP response code. If it's set 0 PHP sends Status: header that
+; is supported by Apache. When this option is set to 1 PHP will send
+; RFC2616 compliant header.
+; Default is zero.
+;cgi.rfc2616_headers = 0 
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; File Uploads ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow HTTP file uploads.
+file_uploads = On
+
+; Temporary directory for HTTP uploaded files (will use system default if not
+; specified).
+;upload_tmp_dir =
+
+; Maximum allowed size for uploaded files.
+upload_max_filesize = 10M
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Fopen wrappers ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow the treatment of URLs (like http:// or ftp://) as files.
+allow_url_fopen = On
+
+; Define the anonymous ftp password (your email address)
+;from="john@doe.com"
+
+; Define the user agent for php to send
+;user_agent="PHP"
+
+; Default timeout for socket based streams (seconds)
+default_socket_timeout = 60
+
+; If your scripts have to deal with files from Macintosh systems,
+; or you are running on a Mac and need to deal with files from
+; unix or win32 systems, setting this flag will cause PHP to
+; automatically detect the EOL character in those files so that
+; fgets() and file() will work regardless of the source of the file.
+; auto_detect_line_endings = Off
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Dynamic Extensions ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; If you wish to have an extension loaded automatically, use the following
+; syntax:
+;
+;   extension=modulename.extension
+;
+; For example, on Windows:
+;
+;   extension=msql.dll
+;
+; ... or under UNIX:
+;
+;   extension=msql.so
+;
+; Note that it should be the name of the module only; no directory information 
+; needs to go here.  Specify the location of the extension with the
+; extension_dir directive above.
+;
+; Load the MySQL module by default.  Comment this out if you don't use MySQL.
+extension=mysql.so
+
+; Load the gettext extension by default.  Comment this out if you don't have the
+; gettext shared library installed.
+extension=gettext.so
+
+;Windows Extensions
+;Note that MySQL and ODBC support is now built in, so no dll is needed for it.
+;
+;extension=php_mbstring.dll
+;extension=php_bz2.dll
+;extension=php_cpdf.dll
+;extension=php_crack.dll
+;extension=php_curl.dll
+;extension=php_db.dll
+;extension=php_dba.dll
+;extension=php_dbase.dll
+;extension=php_dbx.dll
+;extension=php_domxml.dll
+;extension=php_exif.dll
+;extension=php_fdf.dll
+;extension=php_filepro.dll
+;extension=php_gd2.dll
+;extension=php_gettext.dll
+;extension=php_hyperwave.dll
+;extension=php_iconv.dll
+;extension=php_ifx.dll
+;extension=php_iisfunc.dll
+;extension=php_imap.dll
+;extension=php_interbase.dll
+;extension=php_java.dll
+;extension=php_ldap.dll
+;extension=php_mcrypt.dll
+;extension=php_mhash.dll
+;extension=php_mime_magic.dll
+;extension=php_ming.dll
+;extension=php_mssql.dll
+;extension=php_msql.dll
+;extension=php_oci8.dll
+;extension=php_openssl.dll
+;extension=php_oracle.dll
+;extension=php_pdf.dll
+;extension=php_pgsql.dll
+;extension=php_printer.dll
+;extension=php_shmop.dll
+;extension=php_snmp.dll
+;extension=php_sockets.dll
+;extension=php_sybase_ct.dll
+;extension=php_w32api.dll
+;extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
+;extension=php_xslt.dll
+;extension=php_yaz.dll
+;extension=php_zip.dll
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Module Settings ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+[Syslog]
+; Whether or not to define the various syslog variables (e.g. $LOG_PID,
+; $LOG_CRON, etc.).  Turning it off is a good idea performance-wise.  In
+; runtime, you can define these variables by calling define_syslog_variables().
+define_syslog_variables  = Off
+
+[mail function]
+; For Win32 only.
+SMTP = localhost
+smtp_port = 25
+
+; For Win32 only.
+;sendmail_from = me@example.com
+
+; For Unix only.  You may supply arguments as well (default: "sendmail -t -i").
+;sendmail_path =
+
+[Java]
+;java.class.path = .\php_java.jar
+;java.home = c:\jdk
+;java.library = c:\jdk\jre\bin\hotspot\jvm.dll 
+;java.library.path = .\
+
+[SQL]
+sql.safe_mode = Off
+
+[ODBC]
+;odbc.default_db    =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_user  =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_pw    =  Not yet implemented
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+odbc.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Check that a connection is still valid before reuse.
+odbc.check_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_links = -1  
+
+; Handling of LONG fields.  Returns number of bytes to variables.  0 means
+; passthru.
+odbc.defaultlrl = 4096  
+
+; Handling of binary data.  0 means passthru, 1 return as is, 2 convert to char.
+; See the documentation on odbc_binmode and odbc_longreadlen for an explanation
+; of uodbc.defaultlrl and uodbc.defaultbinmode
+odbc.defaultbinmode = 1  
+
+[MySQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mysql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_links = -1
+
+; Default port number for mysql_connect().  If unset, mysql_connect() will use
+; the $MYSQL_TCP_PORT or the mysql-tcp entry in /etc/services or the
+; compile-time value defined MYSQL_PORT (in that order).  Win32 will only look
+; at MYSQL_PORT.
+mysql.default_port =
+
+; Default socket name for local MySQL connects.  If empty, uses the built-in
+; MySQL defaults.
+mysql.default_socket =
+
+; Default host for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_host =
+
+; Default user for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_user =
+
+; Default password for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+; Note that this is generally a *bad* idea to store passwords in this file.
+; *Any* user with PHP access can run 'echo get_cfg_var("mysql.default_password")
+; and reveal this password!  And of course, any users with read access to this
+; file will be able to reveal the password as well.
+mysql.default_password =
+
+; Maximum time (in seconds) for connect timeout. -1 means no limit
+mysql.connect_timeout = 60
+
+; Trace mode. When trace_mode is active (=On), warnings for table/index scans and
+; SQL-Errors will be displayed.
+mysql.trace_mode = Off
+
+[mSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+msql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_links = -1
+
+[PostgresSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+pgsql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Detect broken persistent links always with pg_pconnect(). 
+; Auto reset feature requires a little overheads.
+pgsql.auto_reset_persistent = Off
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_links = -1
+
+; Ignore PostgreSQL backends Notice message or not.
+; Notice message logging require a little overheads.
+pgsql.ignore_notice = 0
+
+; Log PostgreSQL backends Noitce message or not.
+; Unless pgsql.ignore_notice=0, module cannot log notice message.
+pgsql.log_notice = 0
+
+[Sybase]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybase.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_links = -1
+
+;sybase.interface_file = "/usr/sybase/interfaces"
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+sybase.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+sybase.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+; If on, this will cause PHP to automatically assign types to results according
+; to their Sybase type, instead of treating them all as strings.  This
+; compatibility mode will probably not stay around forever, so try applying
+; whatever necessary changes to your code, and turn it off.
+sybase.compatability_mode = Off
+
+[Sybase-CT]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybct.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum server message severity to display.
+sybct.min_server_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum client message severity to display.
+sybct.min_client_severity = 10
+
+[dbx]
+; returned column names can be converted for compatibility reasons
+; possible values for dbx.colnames_case are
+; "unchanged" (default, if not set)
+; "lowercase"
+; "uppercase"
+; the recommended default is either upper- or lowercase, but
+; unchanged is currently set for backwards compatibility
+dbx.colnames_case = "lowercase"
+
+[bcmath]
+; Number of decimal digits for all bcmath functions.
+bcmath.scale = 0
+
+[browscap]
+;browscap = extra/browscap.ini
+
+[Informix]
+; Default host for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_host =
+
+; Default user for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_user =
+
+; Default password for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_password =
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ifx.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_links = -1
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a text blob instead of its id.
+ifx.textasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a byte blob instead of its id.
+ifx.byteasvarchar = 0
+
+; Trailing blanks are stripped from fixed-length char columns.  May help the
+; life of Informix SE users.
+ifx.charasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, the contents of text and byte blobs are dumped to a file instead of
+; keeping them in memory.
+ifx.blobinfile = 0
+
+; NULL's are returned as empty strings, unless this is set to 1.  In that case,
+; NULL's are returned as string 'NULL'.
+ifx.nullformat = 0
+
+[Session]
+; Handler used to store/retrieve data.
+session.save_handler = files
+
+; Argument passed to save_handler.  In the case of files, this is the path
+; where data files are stored. Note: Windows users have to change this 
+; variable in order to use PHP's session functions.
+;session.save_path = /tmp
+
+; Whether to use cookies.
+session.use_cookies = 1
+
+; This option enables administrators to make their users invulnerable to 
+; attacks which involve passing session ids in URLs; defaults to 0.
+; session.use_only_cookies = 1
+
+; Name of the session (used as cookie name).
+session.name = PHPSESSID
+
+; Initialize session on request startup.
+session.auto_start = 0
+
+; Lifetime in seconds of cookie or, if 0, until browser is restarted.
+session.cookie_lifetime = 0
+
+; The path for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_path = /
+
+; The domain for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_domain =
+
+; Handler used to serialize data.  php is the standard serializer of PHP.
+session.serialize_handler = php
+
+; Define the probability that the 'garbage collection' process is started
+; on every session initialization.
+; The probability is calculated by using gc_probability/gc_divisor,
+; e.g. 1/100 means there is a 1% chance that the GC process starts
+; on each request.
+
+session.gc_probability = 1
+session.gc_divisor     = 1000
+
+; After this number of seconds, stored data will be seen as 'garbage' and
+; cleaned up by the garbage collection process.
+session.gc_maxlifetime = 1440
+
+; PHP 4.2 and less have an undocumented feature/bug that allows you to
+; to initialize a session variable in the global scope, albeit register_globals
+; is disabled.  PHP 4.3 and later will warn you, if this feature is used.
+; You can disable the feature and the warning separately. At this time,
+; the warning is only displayed, if bug_compat_42 is enabled.
+
+session.bug_compat_42 = 0
+session.bug_compat_warn = 1
+
+; Check HTTP Referer to invalidate externally stored URLs containing ids.
+; HTTP_REFERER has to contain this substring for the session to be
+; considered as valid.
+session.referer_check =
+
+; How many bytes to read from the file.
+session.entropy_length = 0
+
+; Specified here to create the session id.
+session.entropy_file =
+
+;session.entropy_length = 16
+
+;session.entropy_file = /dev/urandom
+
+; Set to {nocache,private,public,} to determine HTTP caching aspects.
+; or leave this empty to avoid sending anti-caching headers.
+session.cache_limiter = nocache
+
+; Document expires after n minutes.
+session.cache_expire = 180
+
+; trans sid support is disabled by default.
+; Use of trans sid may risk your users security.
+; Use this option with caution.
+; - User may send URL contains active session ID
+;   to other person via. email/irc/etc.
+; - URL that contains active session ID may be stored
+;   in publically accessible computer. 
+; - User may access your site with the same session ID
+;   always using URL stored in browser's history or bookmarks.
+session.use_trans_sid = 0
+
+; The URL rewriter will look for URLs in a defined set of HTML tags.
+; form/fieldset are special; if you include them here, the rewriter will
+; add a hidden <input> field with the info which is otherwise appended
+; to URLs.  If you want XHTML conformity, remove the form entry.
+; Note that all valid entries require a "=", even if no value follows.
+url_rewriter.tags = "a=href,area=href,frame=src,input=src,form=fakeentry"
+
+[MSSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mssql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+mssql.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+mssql.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+mssql.compatability_mode = Off
+
+; Connect timeout
+;mssql.connect_timeout = 5
+
+; Query timeout
+;mssql.timeout = 60
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textlimit = 4096
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textsize = 4096
+
+; Limits the number of records in each batch.  0 = all records in one batch.
+;mssql.batchsize = 0
+
+; Specify how datetime and datetim4 columns are returned
+; On => Returns data converted to SQL server settings
+; Off => Returns values as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss
+;mssql.datetimeconvert = On
+
+; Use NT authentication when connecting to the server
+mssql.secure_connection = Off
+
+; Specify max number of processes. Default = 25
+;mssql.max_procs = 25
+
+[Assertion]
+; Assert(expr); active by default.
+;assert.active = On
+
+; Issue a PHP warning for each failed assertion.
+;assert.warning = On
+
+; Don't bail out by default.
+;assert.bail = Off
+
+; User-function to be called if an assertion fails.
+;assert.callback = 0
+
+; Eval the expression with current error_reporting().  Set to true if you want
+; error_reporting(0) around the eval().
+;assert.quiet_eval = 0
+
+[Ingres II]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ingres.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links, including persistents.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_links = -1
+
+; Default database (format: [node_id::]dbname[/srv_class]).
+ingres.default_database =
+
+; Default user.
+ingres.default_user =
+
+; Default password.
+ingres.default_password =
+
+[Verisign Payflow Pro]
+; Default Payflow Pro server.
+pfpro.defaulthost = "test-payflow.verisign.com"
+
+; Default port to connect to.
+pfpro.defaultport = 443
+
+; Default timeout in seconds.
+pfpro.defaulttimeout = 30
+
+; Default proxy IP address (if required).
+;pfpro.proxyaddress =
+
+; Default proxy port.
+;pfpro.proxyport =
+
+; Default proxy logon.
+;pfpro.proxylogon =
+
+; Default proxy password.
+;pfpro.proxypassword =
+
+[com]
+; path to a file containing GUIDs, IIDs or filenames of files with TypeLibs
+;com.typelib_file = 
+; allow Distributed-COM calls
+;com.allow_dcom = true
+; autoregister constants of a components typlib on com_load()
+;com.autoregister_typelib = true
+; register constants casesensitive
+;com.autoregister_casesensitive = false
+; show warnings on duplicate constat registrations
+;com.autoregister_verbose = true
+
+[Printer]
+;printer.default_printer = ""
+
+[mbstring]
+; language for internal character representation.
+;mbstring.language = Japanese
+
+; internal/script encoding.
+; Some encoding cannot work as internal encoding.
+; (e.g. SJIS, BIG5, ISO-2022-*)
+;mbstring.internal_encoding = EUC-JP
+
+; http input encoding.
+;mbstring.http_input = auto
+
+; http output encoding. mb_output_handler must be
+; registered as output buffer to function
+;mbstring.http_output = SJIS
+
+; enable automatic encoding translation accoding to 
+; mbstring.internal_encoding setting. Input chars are
+; converted to internal encoding by setting this to On.
+; Note: Do _not_ use automatic encoding translation for
+;       portable libs/applications.
+;mbstring.encoding_translation = Off
+
+; automatic encoding detection order.
+; auto means 
+;mbstring.detect_order = auto
+
+; substitute_character used when character cannot be converted
+; one from another
+;mbstring.substitute_character = none;
+
+; overload(replace) single byte functions by mbstring functions.
+; mail(), ereg(), etc are overloaded by mb_send_mail(), mb_ereg(),
+; etc. Possible values are 0,1,2,4 or combination of them.
+; For example, 7 for overload everything.
+; 0: No overload
+; 1: Overload mail() function
+; 2: Overload str*() functions
+; 4: Overload ereg*() functions
+;mbstring.func_overload = 0
+
+[FrontBase]
+;fbsql.allow_persistent = On
+;fbsql.autocommit = On
+;fbsql.default_database = 
+;fbsql.default_database_password =
+;fbsql.default_host =
+;fbsql.default_password =
+;fbsql.default_user = "_SYSTEM"
+;fbsql.generate_warnings = Off
+;fbsql.max_connections = 128
+;fbsql.max_links = 128
+;fbsql.max_persistent = -1
+;fbsql.max_results = 128
+;fbsql.batchSize = 1000
+
+[Crack]
+; Modify the setting below to match the directory location of the cracklib
+; dictionary files.  Include the base filename, but not the file extension.
+; crack.default_dictionary = "c:\php\lib\cracklib_dict"
+
+[exif]
+; Exif UNICODE user comments are handled as UCS-2BE/UCS-2LE and JIS as JIS. 
+; With mbstring support this will automatically be converted into the encoding
+; given by corresponding encode setting. When empty mbstring.internal_encoding 
+; is used. For the decode settings you can distinguish between motorola and 
+; intel byte order. A decode setting cannot be empty.
+;exif.encode_unicode = ISO-8859-15
+;exif.decode_unicode_motorola = UCS-2BE
+;exif.decode_unicode_intel    = UCS-2LE
+;exif.encode_jis = 
+;exif.decode_jis_motorola = JIS
+;exif.decode_jis_intel    = JIS
+
+; Local Variables:
+; tab-width: 4
+; End:
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/vhosts b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/vhosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/hosts b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/hosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e33147
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/hosts
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#
+# hosts		This file describes a number of hostname-to-address
+#		mappings for the TCP/IP subsystem.  It is mostly
+#		used at boot time, when no name servers are running.
+#		On small systems, this file can be used instead of a
+#		"named" name server.  Just add the names, addresses
+#		and any aliases to this file...
+#
+# By the way, Arnt Gulbrandsen <agulbra@nvg.unit.no> says that 127.0.0.1
+# should NEVER be named with the name of the machine.  It causes problems
+# for some (stupid) programs, irc and reputedly talk. :^)
+#
+
+# For loopbacking.
+127.0.0.1	localhost
+# This next entry is technically wrong, but good enough to get TCP/IP apps
+# to quit complaining that they can't verify the hostname on a loopback-only
+# Linux box.
+127.0.0.1	darkstar.example.net darkstar
+
+# End of hosts.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f31fbe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+/var/log/apache/access_log /var/log/apache/error_log {
+    monthly
+    nomail
+    compress
+    create 0664 root root
+    rotate 12
+    postrotate
+      /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd restart > /dev/null
+    endscript
+}
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/profile b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/profile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..563594a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/profile
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+# /etc/profile: This file contains system-wide defaults used by
+# all Bourne (and related) shells.
+
+# Set the values for some environment variables:
+export MINICOM="-c on"
+export MANPATH=/usr/local/man:/usr/man:/usr/X11R6/man
+export HOSTNAME="`cat /etc/HOSTNAME`"
+export LESSOPEN="|lesspipe.sh %s"
+export LESS="-M"
+
+# If the user doesn't have a .inputrc, use the one in /etc.
+if [ ! -r "$HOME/.inputrc" ]; then
+  export INPUTRC=/etc/inputrc
+fi
+
+# Set the default system $PATH:
+PATH="/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin:/usr/X11R6/bin:/usr/games"
+
+# For root users, ensure that /usr/local/sbin, /usr/sbin, and /sbin are in
+# the $PATH.  Some means of connection don't add these by default (sshd comes
+# to mind).
+if [ "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+  echo $PATH | grep /usr/local/sbin 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+  if [ ! $? = 0 ]; then
+    PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:$PATH
+  fi
+fi
+
+# I had problems using 'eval tset' instead of 'TERM=', but you might want to 
+# try it anyway. I think with the right /etc/termcap it would work great.
+# eval `tset -sQ "$TERM"`
+if [ "$TERM" = "" -o "$TERM" = "unknown" ]; then
+ TERM=linux
+fi
+
+# Set ksh93 visual editing mode:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+  VISUAL=emacs
+#  VISUAL=gmacs
+#  VISUAL=vi
+fi
+
+# Set a default shell prompt:
+#PS1='`hostname`:`pwd`# '
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/pdksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! $ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! ${PWD/#$HOME/~}$ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ PS1='%n@%m:%~%# '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ PS1='$ '
+else
+ PS1='\u@\h:\w\$ '
+fi
+PS2='> '
+export PATH DISPLAY LESS TERM PS1 PS2
+
+# Default umask.  A umask of 022 prevents new files from being created group
+# and world writable.
+umask 022
+
+# Set up the LS_COLORS and LS_OPTIONS environment variables for color ls:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -z`
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -s`
+else
+ eval `dircolors -b`
+fi
+
+# Append any additional sh scripts found in /etc/profile.d/:
+for profile_script in /etc/profile.d/*.sh ; do
+  if [ -x $profile_script ]; then
+    . $profile_script
+  fi
+done
+unset profile_script
+
+# For non-root users, add the current directory to the search path:
+if [ ! "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+ PATH="$PATH:."
+fi
+
+# firewall:
+export FTP_PASSIVE=1
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b972052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links:  /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes:  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..00a1501
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.K 		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		1, which is the administrative state. It kills all
+#		daemons and then puts the system into single user mode.
+#		Note that the file systems are kept mounted.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.K	3.1415 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/sbin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off quota:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaoff ]; then
+    echo "Turning off filesystem quotas."
+    /sbin/quotaoff -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down PCMCIA devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia stop
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  sleep 5
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGHUP signal."
+killall5 -1
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to hang up"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGTERM signal."
+killall5 -15
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to terminate"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGKILL signal."
+killall5 -9
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to exit"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+
+# Now go to the single user level
+echo "Going to single user mode..."
+telinit -t 1 1
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..0cb3343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links: /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes: /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..05c75b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.S:  System initialization script.
+#
+# Mostly written by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+PATH=/sbin:/usr/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# Mount /proc right away:
+/sbin/mount -v proc /proc -n -t proc
+
+# If 'nohotplug' was given at boot, or rc.hotplug has been turned off
+# (is not executable), then shut off hotplugging in the kernel now.
+# Turning off hotplug is *not* recommended, and will break some things.
+if [ -w /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug ]; then
+  if grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  elif [ ! -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug ]; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start devfsd if necessary.  On newer kernels, udev should be used instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd start
+fi
+
+# Mount sysfs next, if the kernel supports it:
+if [ -d /sys ]; then
+  if cat /proc/filesystems | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    if ! cat /proc/mounts | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+      /sbin/mount -v sysfs /sys -n -t sysfs
+    fi
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize udev to manage /dev entries for 2.6.x kernels:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.udev ]; then
+  if ! grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    /etc/rc.d/rc.udev
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Enable swapping:
+/sbin/swapon -a
+
+# Test to see if the root partition is read-only, like it ought to be.
+READWRITE=no
+if touch /fsrwtestfile 2>/dev/null; then
+  rm -f /fsrwtestfile
+  READWRITE=yes
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-only filesystem"
+fi
+
+# See if a forced filesystem check was requested at shutdown:
+if [ -r /etc/forcefsck ]; then
+  FORCEFSCK="-f"
+fi
+
+# Check the root filesystem:
+if [ ! $READWRITE = yes ]; then
+  RETVAL=0
+  if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+    echo "Checking root filesystem:"
+    /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -a /
+    RETVAL=$?
+  fi
+  # An error code of 2 or higher will require a reboot.
+  if [ $RETVAL -ge 2 ]; then
+    # An error code equal to or greater than 4 means that some errors
+    # could not be corrected.  This requires manual attention, so we
+    # offer a chance to try to fix the problem in single-user mode:
+    if [ $RETVAL -ge 4 ]; then
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo "*** An error occurred during the root filesystem check. ***"
+      echo "*** You will now be given a chance to log into the      ***"
+      echo "*** system in single-user mode to fix the problem.      ***"
+      echo "***                                                     ***"
+      echo "*** If you are using the ext2 filesystem, running       ***"
+      echo "*** 'e2fsck -v -y <partition>' might help.              ***"
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo
+      echo "Once you exit the single-user shell, the system will reboot."
+      echo
+      PS1="(Repair filesystem) \#"; export PS1
+      sulogin
+    else # With an error code of 2 or 3, reboot the machine automatically:
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo "*** The filesystem was changed. ***"
+      echo "*** The system will now reboot. ***"
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo
+    fi
+    echo "Unmounting file systems."
+    /sbin/umount -a -r
+    /sbin/mount -n -o remount,ro /
+    echo "Rebooting system."
+    sleep 2
+    reboot -f
+  fi
+  # Remount the root filesystem in read-write mode
+  echo "Remounting root device with read-write enabled."
+  /sbin/mount -w -v -n -o remount /
+  if [ $? -gt 0 ] ; then
+    echo
+    echo "Attempt to remount root device as read-write failed!  This is going to"
+    echo "cause serious problems."
+    echo 
+    echo "If you're using the UMSDOS filesystem, you **MUST** mount the root partition"
+    echo "read-write!  You can make sure the root filesystem is getting mounted "
+    echo "read-write with the 'rw' flag to Loadlin:"
+    echo
+    echo "loadlin vmlinuz root=/dev/hda1 rw   (replace /dev/hda1 with your root device)"
+    echo
+    echo "Normal bootdisks can be made to mount a system read-write with the rdev command:"
+    echo
+    echo "rdev -R /dev/fd0 0"
+    echo
+    echo "You can also get into your system by using a boot disk with a command like this"
+    echo "on the LILO prompt line:  (change the root partition name as needed)"
+    echo 
+    echo "LILO: mount root=/dev/hda1 rw"
+    echo
+    echo "Please press ENTER to continue, then reboot and use one of the above methods to"
+    echo -n "get into your machine and start looking for the problem. " 
+    read junk; 
+  fi
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-write filesystem"
+  if cat /etc/fstab | grep ' / ' | grep umsdos 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    ROOTTYPE="umsdos"
+  fi
+  if [ ! "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # no warn for UMSDOS
+    echo
+    echo "*** ERROR: Root partition has already been mounted read-write. Cannot check!"
+    echo
+    echo "For filesystem checking to work properly, your system must initially mount"
+    echo "the root partition as read only. Please modify your kernel with 'rdev' so that"
+    echo "it does this. If you're booting with LILO, add a line:"
+    echo
+    echo "   read-only"
+    echo
+    echo "to the Linux section in your /etc/lilo.conf and type 'lilo' to reinstall it."
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a kernel on a floppy disk, put it in the drive and type:"
+    echo "   rdev -R /dev/fd0 1"
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a bootdisk, or with Loadlin, you can add the 'ro' flag."
+    echo
+    echo "This will fix the problem *AND* eliminate this annoying message. :^)"
+    echo
+    echo -n "Press ENTER to continue. "
+    read junk;
+  fi
+fi # Done checking root filesystem
+
+# Any /etc/mtab that exists here is old, so we delete it to start over:
+/bin/rm -f /etc/mtab*
+# Remounting the / partition will initialize the new /etc/mtab:
+/sbin/mount -w -o remount /
+
+# Fix /etc/mtab to list sys and proc if they were not yet entered in
+# /etc/mtab because / was still mounted read-only:
+if [ -d /proc/sys ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f proc /proc -t proc
+fi
+if [ -d /sys/bus ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f sysfs /sys -t sysfs
+fi
+
+# Set the system time from the hardware clock using hwclock --hctosys.
+if [ -x /sbin/hwclock ]; then
+  if grep "^UTC" /etc/hardwareclock 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (UTC)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --utc --hctosys
+  else
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (localtime)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --localtime --hctosys
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Configure ISA Plug-and-Play devices:
+if [ -r /etc/isapnp.conf ]; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/isapnp ]; then
+    /sbin/isapnp /etc/isapnp.conf
+  fi
+fi
+
+# This loads any kernel modules that are needed.  These might be required to
+# use your ethernet card, sound card, or other optional hardware.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.modules -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.modules
+fi
+
+# Configure runtime kernel parameters:
+if [ -x /sbin/sysctl -a -r /etc/sysctl.conf ]; then
+  /sbin/sysctl -e -p /etc/sysctl.conf
+fi
+
+# Initialize the Logical Volume Manager.
+# This won't start unless we find /etc/lvmtab (LVM1) or 
+# /etc/lvm/backup/ (LVM2).  This is created by /sbin/vgscan, so to
+# use LVM you must run /sbin/vgscan yourself the first time (and
+# create some VGs and LVs).
+if [ -r /etc/lvmtab -o -d /etc/lvm/backup ]; then
+  echo "Initializing LVM (Logical Volume Manager):"
+  # Check for device-mapper support.
+  if ! cat /proc/devices | grep -w device-mapper 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    # If device-mapper exists as a module, try to load it.
+    if [ -r /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko ]; then
+      insmod /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko
+    fi
+  fi
+  # Scan for new volume groups:
+  /sbin/vgscan 2> /dev/null
+  if [ $? = 0 ]; then
+    # This needs a moment to register.
+    sleep 10
+    # Make volume groups available to the kernel.
+    # This should also make logical volumes available.
+    /sbin/vgchange -ay
+    # Enable swapping again in case any LVs are used for swap.  Ignore previous error.  :-)
+    /sbin/swapon -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Check all the non-root filesystems:
+if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+  echo "Checking non-root filesystems:"
+  /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -R -A -a
+fi
+
+# mount non-root file systems in fstab (but not NFS or SMB 
+# because TCP/IP is not yet configured, and not proc because
+# that has already been mounted):
+/sbin/mount -a -v -t nonfs,nosmbfs,noproc
+
+# Clean up some temporary files:
+( cd /var/log/setup/tmp && rm -rf * )
+/bin/rm -f /var/run/utmp /var/run/*pid /etc/nologin /var/run/lpd* \
+  /var/run/ppp* /etc/dhcpc/*.pid /etc/forcefsck /etc/fastboot
+
+# Attempt to umount and remove any leftover /initrd:
+if [ -d /initrd ]; then
+  /sbin/umount /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  rmdir /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0 2> /dev/null
+fi
+
+# Create a fresh utmp file:
+touch /var/run/utmp
+chown root.utmp /var/run/utmp
+chmod 664 /var/run/utmp
+
+if [ "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # we need to update any files added in DOS:
+  echo "Synchronizing UMSDOS directory structure:"
+  echo "  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /"
+  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /
+fi
+
+# Setup the /etc/motd to reflect the current kernel level:
+# THIS WIPES ANY CHANGES YOU MAKE TO /ETC/MOTD WITH EACH BOOT.
+# COMMENT THIS OUT IF YOU WANT TO MAKE A CUSTOM VERSION.
+echo "$(/bin/uname -sr)." > /etc/motd
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Run serial port setup script:
+# (CAREFUL! This can make some systems hang if the rc.serial script isn't
+# set up correctly. If this happens, you may have to edit the file from a
+# boot disk)
+#
+# . /etc/rc.d/rc.serial
+
+# Carry an entropy pool between reboots to improve randomness.
+if [ -f /etc/random-seed ]; then
+  echo "Using /etc/random-seed to initialize /dev/urandom."
+  cat /etc/random-seed > /dev/urandom
+fi
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00b8837
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+# Start/stop/restart the Apache web server.
+#
+# To make Apache start automatically at boot, make this
+# file executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+
+case "$1" in
+   'start')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl start ;;
+   'stop')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl stop ;;
+   'restart')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl restart ;;
+   *)
+      echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart" ;;
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..db56589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.inet2	This shell script boots up the entire network system.
+#		Note, that when this script is used to also fire
+#		up any important remote NFS disks (like the /usr
+#		directory), care must be taken to actually
+#		have all the needed binaries online _now_ ...
+#
+#               Uncomment or comment out sections depending on which
+#               services your site requires.
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified for Slackware by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+
+
+# At this point, we are ready to talk to The World...
+
+
+# Mount remote (NFS) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w nfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  # Start the RPC portmapper if we find NFS volumes defined in /etc/fstab,
+  # since it will need to be running in order to mount them.  If portmap
+  # is not running, attempting to mount an NFS partition will cause mount
+  # to hang.  Keep this in mind if you plan to mount unlisted partitions...
+  if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+  else
+    # Warn about a possible NFS problem.  It's also possible to mount NFS partitions
+    # without rpc.portmap by using '-o nolock' (not a good idea in most cases).
+    echo "WARNING:  NFS partitions found in /etc/fstab, but /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is"
+    echo "          not executable.  If you do not run portmap, NFS partitions will"
+    echo "          not mount properly.  To start rpc.portmap at boot, change the"
+    echo "          permissions on /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap"
+    sleep 10
+  fi
+  echo "Mounting remote (NFS) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs      	 # This may be our /usr runtime!
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t nfs
+fi
+
+# Load the RPC portmapper if /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# This might be needed to mount NFS partitions that are not listed in /etc/fstab.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+fi
+
+# Mount remote (SMB) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w smbfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  echo "Mounting remote (SMB) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t smbfs
+fi
+
+# Start the system logger if it is not already running (maybe because /usr
+# is on a network partition).
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -d /var/log -a ! -r /var/run/syslogd.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# If there is a firewall script, run it before enabling packet forwarding.
+# See the HOWTOs on http://www.netfilter.org/ for documentation on
+# setting up a firewall or NAT on Linux.  In some cases this might need to
+# be moved past the section below dealing with IP packet forwarding.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall start
+fi
+
+# Turn on IPv4 packet forwarding support.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward start
+fi
+
+# Start the inetd server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd start
+fi
+
+# Start the OpenSSH SSH daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd ]; then
+  echo "Starting OpenSSH SSH daemon: /usr/sbin/sshd"
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd start
+fi
+
+# Start the BIND name server daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.bind ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.bind start
+fi
+
+# Start NIS (the Network Information Service):
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.yp ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.yp start
+fi
+
+# Start the NFS server.   Note that for this to work correctly, you'll
+# need to load the knfsd module for kernel NFS server support.
+# You'll also need to set up some shares in /etc/exports, and be sure
+# that /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# Starting the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd start
+fi
+
+# Stuff you won't need follows.  ;-)
+
+# # Start the network routing daemon:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/routed ]; then
+#   echo "Starting network routing daemon:  /usr/sbin/routed"
+#   /usr/sbin/routed -g -s
+# fi
+
+# # Start the system status server:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/rwhod ]; then
+#   echo "Starting system status server:  /usr/sbin/rwhod"
+#   /usr/sbin/rwhod
+# fi
+
+#  # Fire up the PC-NFS daemon(s).  This is a primarily obsolete system, and may
+#  # not be very secure.  It's not at all needed for normal NFS server support.
+#  # You probably should not run this.
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd ]; then
+#    echo "Starting PC-NFS daemons:  /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd"
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd ]; then
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fe1419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart inetd, the BSD Internet super-daemon.
+
+# Start inetd:
+inetd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/inetd ]; then
+    echo "Starting Internet super-server daemon:  /usr/sbin/inetd"
+    /usr/sbin/inetd
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop inetd:
+inetd_stop() {
+  killall inetd
+}
+
+# Restart inetd:
+inetd_restart() {
+  inetd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  inetd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  inetd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  inetd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  inetd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52bd2fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward:  start/stop IP packet forwarding
+#
+# If you intend to run your Linux box as a router, i.e. as a
+# computer that forwards and redistributes network packets, you
+# will need to enable IP packet forwarding in your kernel.
+#
+# To activate IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+#
+# To disable IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script non-executable:  chmod 644 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+
+# Start IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_start() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Activating IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+  # When using IPv4 packet forwarding, you will also get the
+  # rp_filter, which automatically rejects incoming packets if the
+  # routing table entry for their source address doesn't match the
+  # network interface they're arriving on.  This has security
+  # advantages because it prevents the so-called IP spoofing,
+  # however it can pose problems if you use asymmetric routing
+  # (packets from you to a host take a different path than packets
+  # from that host to you) or if you operate a non-routing host
+  # which has several IP addresses on different interfaces.  To
+  # turn rp_filter off, uncomment the lines below:
+  #if [ -r /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter ]; then
+  #  echo "Disabling rp_filter."
+  #  echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter
+  #fi
+}
+
+# Stop IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_stop() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Disabling IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_restart() {
+  ip_forward_stop
+  sleep 1
+  ip_forward_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  ip_forward_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  ip_forward_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  ip_forward_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..3cf2076
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.local:  Local system initialization script.
+#
+# Put any local setup commands in here:
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..239e2e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart mysqld.
+#
+# Copyright 2003 Patrick J. Volkerding, Concord, CA
+# Copyright 2003 Slackware Linux, Inc., Concord, CA
+#
+# This program comes with NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law.
+# You may redistribute copies of this program under the terms of the
+# GNU General Public License.
+
+# To start MySQL automatically at boot, be sure this script is executable:
+# chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
+
+# Before you can run MySQL, you must have a database.  To install an initial
+# database, do this as root:
+#
+#   su - mysql
+#   mysql_install_db
+#
+# Note that step one is becoming the mysql user.  It's important to do this
+# before making any changes to the database, or mysqld won't be able to write
+# to it later (this can be fixed with 'chown -R mysql.mysql /var/lib/mysql').
+
+# To disallow outside connections to the database (if you don't need them, this
+# is recommended to increase security), uncomment the next line:
+#SKIP="--skip-networking"
+
+# Start mysqld:
+mysqld_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/bin/mysqld_safe ]; then
+    # If there is an old PID file (no mysqld running), clean it up:
+    if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+      if ! ps ax | grep mysqld 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+        echo "Cleaning up old /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid."
+        rm -f /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid
+      fi
+    fi
+    /usr/bin/mysqld_safe --datadir=/var/lib/mysql --pid-file=/var/run/mysql/mysql.pid $SKIP &
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop mysqld:
+mysqld_stop() {
+  # If there is no PID file, ignore this request...
+  if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+    killall mysqld
+    # Wait at least one minute for it to exit, as we don't know how big the DB is...
+    for second in 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 \
+      0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 60 ; do
+      if [ ! -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+        break;
+      fi
+      sleep 1
+    done
+    if [ "$second" = "60" ]; then
+      echo "WARNING:  Gave up waiting for mysqld to exit!"
+      sleep 15
+    fi
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart mysqld:
+mysqld_restart() {
+  mysqld_stop
+  mysqld_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  mysqld_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  mysqld_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  mysqld_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc32367
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+## Slackware init script for postfix
+##   20030828 Manolis Tzanidakis
+#
+
+postfix_start() {
+        if [ -x /usr/sbin/postfix ]; then
+                echo -n "Starting postfix MTA:  "
+                echo "/usr/sbin/postfix start"
+                /usr/sbin/postfix start 2>/dev/null
+        fi
+}
+
+postfix_stop() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix stop 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+postfix_restart() {
+        sh $0 stop
+	sleep 1
+        sh $0 start
+}
+
+postfix_reload() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix reload 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+        'start')
+                postfix_start
+                ;;
+        'stop')
+                postfix_stop
+                ;;
+        'restart')
+                postfix_restart
+                ;;
+        'reload')
+                postfix_reload
+                ;;
+        *)
+                echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart|reload"
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a31c52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart sendmail.
+
+# Start sendmail:
+sendmail_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/sendmail ]; then
+    echo "Starting sendmail MTA daemon: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m
+    echo "Starting sendmail MSP queue runner: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop sendmail:
+sendmail_stop() {
+  killall sendmail
+}
+
+# Restart sendmail:
+sendmail_restart() {
+  sendmail_stop
+  sleep 1
+  sendmail_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sendmail_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sendmail_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sendmail_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..5f31c01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+#
+# /etc/rc.serial 
+#	Initializes the serial ports on your system
+#
+# chkconfig: 2345 50 75
+# description: This initializes the settings of the serial port
+#
+# FILE_VERSION: 19981128
+#
+# Distributed with setserial and the serial driver.  We need to use the
+# FILE_VERSION field to assure that we don't overwrite a newer rc.serial 
+# file with a newer one.
+# 
+# XXXX For now, the autosave feature doesn't work if you are
+# using the multiport feature; it doesn't save the multiport configuration
+# (for now).  Autosave also doesn't work for the hayes devices.  
+#
+
+RCLOCKFILE=/var/lock/subsys/serial
+DIRS="/lib/modules/`uname -r`/misc /lib/modules /usr/lib/modules ."
+PATH=/bin:/sbin:/usr/bin
+DRIVER=serial
+DRIVER_NAME=serial
+MODULE_REGEXP="serial\b"
+
+ALLDEVS="/dev/ttyS?"
+if /bin/ls /dev/ttyS?? >& /dev/null ; then
+	ALLDEVS="$ALLDEVS /dev/ttyS??"
+fi
+
+SETSERIAL=""
+if test -x /bin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/bin/setserial
+elif test -x /sbin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/sbin/setserial
+fi
+
+#
+# See if the serial driver is loaded
+#
+LOADED=""
+if test -f /proc/devices; then
+	if grep -q " ttyS$" /proc/devices ; then
+		LOADED="yes"
+	else
+		LOADED="no"
+	fi
+fi
+
+#
+# Find the serial driver
+#
+for i in $DIRS
+do
+	if test -z "$MODULE" -a -f $i/$DRIVER.o ; then
+		MODULE=$i/$DRIVER.o
+	fi
+done
+
+if ! test -f /proc/modules ; then
+	MODULE=""
+fi
+
+#
+# Handle System V init conventions...
+#
+case $1 in
+start)
+	action="start";
+	;;
+stop)
+	action="stop";
+	;;
+*)
+	action="start";
+esac
+
+if test $action  = stop ; then
+	if test -n ${SETSERIAL} -a "$LOADED" != "no" -a \
+           `head -1 /etc/serial.conf`X = "###AUTOSAVE###X" ; then
+		echo -n "Saving state of serial devices... "
+		grep "^#" /etc/serial.conf > /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		${SETSERIAL} -G -g ${ALLDEVS} >> /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		mv /etc/serial.conf /etc/.serial.conf.old
+		mv /etc/.serial.conf.new /etc/serial.conf
+		echo "done."
+	fi
+	if test -n "$MODULE" ; then
+		module=`grep $MODULE_REGEXP /proc/modules | awk '{print $1}'`
+		if test -z "$module" ; then 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver is not loaded."
+			rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+			exit 0
+		fi
+		if rmmod $module ; then :; else 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver could NOT be unloaded."
+			exit 1;
+		fi
+		echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver has been unloaded."
+	fi
+	rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+	exit 0
+fi
+
+#
+# If not stop, it must be a start....
+#
+
+if test -n "$MODULE" -a "$LOADED" != "yes" ; then 
+	if insmod -f $MODULE $DRIVER_ARG ; then
+          true
+	else
+		echo "Couldn't load $DRIVER_NAME driver."
+		exit 1
+	fi
+fi
+
+if test -f /etc/serial.conf ; then
+        if test -n ${SETSERIAL} ; then
+		grep -v ^# < /etc/serial.conf | while read device args
+		do
+                    if [ ! "$device" = "" -a ! "$args" = "" ]; then
+                        ${SETSERIAL} -z $device $args
+                    fi
+		done 
+	fi
+else
+	echo "###AUTOSAVE###" > /etc/serial.conf
+fi
+
+touch ${RCLOCKFILE}
+${SETSERIAL} -bg ${ALLDEVS}
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a3707e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the secure shell server:
+
+sshd_start() {
+  # Create host keys if needed.
+  if [ ! -r /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa1 -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key -N '' 
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t dsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  /usr/sbin/sshd
+}
+
+sshd_stop() {
+  killall sshd
+}
+
+sshd_restart() {
+  if [ -r /var/run/sshd.pid ]; then
+    echo "WARNING: killing listener process only.  To kill every sshd process, you must"
+    echo "         use 'rc.sshd stop'.  'rc.sshd restart' kills only the parent sshd to"
+    echo "         allow an admin logged in through sshd to use 'rc.sshd restart' without"
+    echo "         being cut off.  If sshd has been upgraded, new connections will now"
+    echo "         use the new version, which should be a safe enough approach."
+    kill `cat /var/run/sshd.pid`
+  else
+    killall sshd
+  fi
+  sleep 1
+  sshd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sshd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sshd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sshd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a005fb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the system logging daemons.
+#
+# Written for Slackware Linux by Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>.
+
+syslogd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -x /usr/sbin/klogd ]; then
+    echo -n "Starting sysklogd daemons: "
+    echo -n "/usr/sbin/syslogd "
+    /usr/sbin/syslogd
+    sleep 1 # prevent syslogd/klogd race condition on SMP kernels
+    echo "/usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x"
+    # '-c 3' = display level 'error' or higher messages on console
+    # '-x' = turn off broken EIP translation
+    /usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x
+  fi
+}
+
+syslogd_stop() {
+  killall syslogd 2> /dev/null
+  killall klogd 2> /dev/null
+}
+
+syslogd_restart() {
+  syslogd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  syslogd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  syslogd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  syslogd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  syslogd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..916e59e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.sysvinit   This file provides basic compatibility with SystemV style
+#               startup scripts.  The SystemV style init system places 
+#               start/stop scripts for each runlevel into directories such as
+#               /etc/rc.d/rc3.d/ (for runlevel 3) instead of starting them
+#               from /etc/rc.d/rc.M.  This makes for a lot more init scripts,
+#               and a more complicated execution path to follow through if
+#               something goes wrong.  For this reason, Slackware has always
+#               used the traditional BSD style init script layout.
+#
+#               However, many binary packages exist that install SystemV
+#               init scripts.  With rc.sysvinit in place, most well-written
+#               startup scripts will work.  This is primarily intended to
+#               support commercial software, though, and probably shouldn't
+#               be considered bug free.
+#
+#               Written by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>, 1999
+#               from an example by Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@cistron.nl>.
+
+# Run an init script:
+startup() {
+  case "$1" in
+  *.sh)
+    sh "$@"
+    ;;
+  *)
+    "$@"
+    ;;
+  esac
+}
+
+# Set onlcr to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr 0>&1
+
+if [ "$runlevel" = "" ]; then
+  runlevel=$RUNLEVEL
+  export runlevel
+  prevlevel=$PREVLEVEL
+  export prevlevel
+fi
+
+# Run kill scripts in the previous runlevel if not "none"
+if [ ! "$prevlevel" = "N" ]; then
+  for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$prevlevel.d/K* ; do
+    if [ -x $script ]; then
+      startup $script stop
+    fi
+  done
+fi
+
+# Now do the startup scripts:
+for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$runlevel.d/S* ; do
+  if [ -x $script ]; then
+    startup $script start
+  fi
+done
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rssh.conf b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rssh.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a74acc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rssh.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+# This is the default rssh config file
+
+# set the log facility.  "LOG_USER" and "user" are equivalent.
+logfacility = LOG_USER 
+
+# Leave these all commented out to make the default action for rssh to lock
+# users out completely...
+
+allowscp
+allowsftp
+#allowcvs
+#allowrdist
+#allowrsync
+
+# set the default umask
+umask = 022
+
+# If you want to chroot users, use this to set the directory where the root of
+# the chroot jail will be located.
+#
+# if you DO NOT want to chroot users, LEAVE THIS COMMENTED OUT.
+# You can quote anywhere, but quotes not required unless path contains a
+# space... as in this example.
+
+chrootpath = "/var/users"
+
+##########################################
+# EXAMPLES of configuring per-user options
+
+#user=rudy:077:00010:  # the path can simply be left out to not chroot
+#user=rudy:077:00010   # the ending colon is optional
+
+#spaces in the path must be quoted...
+#user=rudy:011:00001:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # scp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00010:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # sftp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00011:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # both with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00100:  # cvs, with no chroot 
+#user=rudy:011:01000:  # rdist, with no chroot
+#user=rudy:011:10000:  # rsync, with no chroot
+#user="rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # whole user string can be quoted
+#user=rudy:01"1:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # or somewhere in the middle, freak!
+#user=rudy:'011:00001:/usr/local/chroot'  # single quotes too
+
+# Spaces before or after the '=' are fine, but spaces in chrootpath need
+# quotes.
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  # neither do comments at line end
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a161fec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+#	$OpenBSD: sshd_config,v 1.69 2004/05/23 23:59:53 dtucker Exp $
+
+# This is the sshd server system-wide configuration file.  See
+# sshd_config(5) for more information.
+
+# This sshd was compiled with PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin
+
+# The strategy used for options in the default sshd_config shipped with
+# OpenSSH is to specify options with their default value where
+# possible, but leave them commented.  Uncommented options change a
+# default value.
+
+#Port 22
+#Protocol 2,1
+#ListenAddress 0.0.0.0
+#ListenAddress ::
+
+# HostKey for protocol version 1
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key
+# HostKeys for protocol version 2
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key
+
+# Lifetime and size of ephemeral version 1 server key
+#KeyRegenerationInterval 1h
+#ServerKeyBits 768
+
+# Logging
+#obsoletes QuietMode and FascistLogging
+#SyslogFacility AUTH
+#LogLevel INFO
+
+# Authentication:
+
+#LoginGraceTime 2m
+PermitRootLogin no
+#StrictModes yes
+#MaxAuthTries 6
+
+#RSAAuthentication yes
+#PubkeyAuthentication yes
+#AuthorizedKeysFile	.ssh/authorized_keys
+
+# For this to work you will also need host keys in /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
+#RhostsRSAAuthentication no
+# similar for protocol version 2
+#HostbasedAuthentication no
+# Change to yes if you don't trust ~/.ssh/known_hosts for
+# RhostsRSAAuthentication and HostbasedAuthentication
+#IgnoreUserKnownHosts no
+# Don't read the user's ~/.rhosts and ~/.shosts files
+#IgnoreRhosts yes
+
+# To disable tunneled clear text passwords, change to no here!
+#PasswordAuthentication yes
+#PermitEmptyPasswords no
+
+# Change to no to disable s/key passwords
+#ChallengeResponseAuthentication yes
+
+# Kerberos options
+#KerberosAuthentication no
+#KerberosOrLocalPasswd yes
+#KerberosTicketCleanup yes
+#KerberosGetAFSToken no
+
+# GSSAPI options
+#GSSAPIAuthentication no
+#GSSAPICleanupCredentials yes
+
+# Set this to 'yes' to enable PAM authentication, account processing, 
+# and session processing. If this is enabled, PAM authentication will 
+# be allowed through the ChallengeResponseAuthentication mechanism. 
+# Depending on your PAM configuration, this may bypass the setting of 
+# PasswordAuthentication, PermitEmptyPasswords, and 
+# "PermitRootLogin without-password". If you just want the PAM account and 
+# session checks to run without PAM authentication, then enable this but set 
+# ChallengeResponseAuthentication=no
+#UsePAM no
+
+#AllowTcpForwarding yes
+#GatewayPorts no
+#X11Forwarding no
+#X11DisplayOffset 10
+#X11UseLocalhost yes
+#PrintMotd yes
+#PrintLastLog yes
+#TCPKeepAlive yes
+#UseLogin no
+#UsePrivilegeSeparation yes
+#PermitUserEnvironment no
+#Compression yes
+#ClientAliveInterval 0
+#ClientAliveCountMax 3
+#UseDNS yes
+#PidFile /var/run/sshd.pid
+#MaxStartups 10
+
+# no default banner path
+#Banner /some/path
+
+# override default of no subsystems
+Subsystem	sftp	/usr/libexec/sftp-server
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2eec17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  O endere&ccedil;o que voc&ecirc; requisitou n&atilde;o p&ocirc;de ser encontrado :(
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/missing.html b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2eec17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  O endere&ccedil;o que voc&ecirc; requisitou n&atilde;o p&ocirc;de ser encontrado :(
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.perms b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.perms
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a323d6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.perms
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+./etc;0;0;755
+./etc/apache;0;0;755
+./etc/apache/httpd.conf;0;0;644
+./etc/apache/php.ini;0;0;644
+./etc/apache/vhosts;0;0;644
+./etc/logrotate.d;0;0;755
+./etc/logrotate.d/apache;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.httpd;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.0;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.4;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.6;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.K;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.M;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.S;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.inet2;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.inetd;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.local;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.postfix;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.serial;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.sshd;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.syslog;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit;0;0;755
+./etc/ssh;0;0;755
+./etc/ssh/sshd_config;0;0;644
+./etc/rssh.conf;0;0;644
+./etc/hosts;0;0;644
+./etc/profile;0;0;644
+./var;0;0;755
+./var/www;0;0;755
+./var/www/htdocs;0;0;755
+./var/www/htdocs/missing.html;0;0;644
+./var/www/missing.html;0;0;644
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/GPG-KEY b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/GPG-KEY
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd23e95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/GPG-KEY
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+security@slackware.com public key
+
+Type  bits/keyID    Date       User ID
+pub  1024D/40102233 2003-02-26 Slackware Linux Project <security@slackware.com>
+sub  1024g/4E523569 2003-02-26 [expires: 2012-12-21]
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.1 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=H5uu
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+
+slamd64 public key
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.6 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=D1wm
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/devices.tar.gz b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/devices.tar.gz
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..992ba79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/devices.tar.gz
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/skel.conf b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/skel.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73985d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/skel.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+if [ "" = "" ] ; then
+PROFILE=prod
+fi
+# Select the IP number assigned to the virtual server
+# This IP must be one IP of the server, either an interface
+# or an IP alias
+# A vserver may have more than one IP. Separate them with spaces.
+# do not forget double quotes.
+# Some examples:
+# IPROOT="1.2.3.4 2.3.4.5"
+# IPROOT="eth0:1.2.3.4 eth1:2.3.4.5"
+# If the device is not specified, IPROOTDEV is used
+case $PROFILE in
+prod)
+#IPROOT=143.106.35.156
+IPROOT="eth0:192.168.0.1"
+# The netmask and broadcast are computed by default from IPROOTDEV
+#IPROOTMASK=
+#IPROOTBCAST=
+# You can define on which device the IP alias will be done
+# The IP alias will be set when the server is started and unset
+# when the server is stopped
+#IPROOTDEV=eth0
+# You can set a different host name for the vserver
+# If empty, the host name of the main server is used
+S_HOSTNAME=skel
+;;
+backup)
+IPROOT=1.2.3.4
+#IPROOTMASK=
+#IPROOTBCAST=
+#IPROOTDEV=eth0
+S_HOSTNAME=
+;;
+esac
+# Uncomment the onboot line if you want to enable this
+# virtual server at boot time
+#ONBOOT=yes
+# You can set a different NIS domain for the vserver
+# If empty, the current on is kept
+# Set it to "none" to have no NIS domain set
+S_DOMAINNAME=
+# You can set the priority level (nice) of all process in the vserver
+# Even root won't be able to raise it
+S_NICE=
+# You can set various flags for the new security context
+# lock: Prevent the vserver from setting new security context
+# sched: Merge scheduler priority of all processes in the vserver
+#        so that it acts a like a single one.
+# nproc: Limit the number of processes in the vserver according to ulimit
+#        (instead of a per user limit, this becomes a per vserver limit)
+# private: No other process can join this security context. Even root
+# Do not forget the quotes around the flags
+S_FLAGS="lock nproc"
+# You can set various ulimit flags and they will be inherited by the
+# vserver. You enter here various command line argument of ulimit
+# ULIMIT="-HS -u 200"
+# The example above, combined with the nproc S_FLAGS will limit the
+# vserver to a maximum of 200 processes
+ULIMIT="-HS -u 1000"
+# You can set various capabilities. By default, the vserver are run
+# with a limited set, so you can let root run in a vserver and not
+# worry about it. He can't take over the machine. In some cases
+# you can to give a little more capabilities (such as CAP_NET_RAW)
+# S_CAPS="CAP_NET_RAW"
+S_CAPS="CAP_SETGID"
+# Select an unused context (this is optional)
+# The default is to allocate a free context on the fly
+# In general you don't need to force a context
+#S_CONTEXT=
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/vserver-legacy.sh b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/vserver-legacy.sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ce8a4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/vserver-legacy.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# legacy vserver template
+#
+
+BASE="/etc/simplepkg/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.s/"
+DEVICES="$BASE/devices.tar.gz"
+GPGKEY="$BASE/GPG-KEY"
+SKEL="$BASE/skel.conf"
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: `basename $0` <jail-root> <jail-name>"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1/$2" ]; then
+  echo "folder $1/$2 does not exist"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+cp /etc/resolv.conf $1/$2/etc/
+cp /etc/localtime $1/$2/etc/
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 defaults 1 1 > $1/$2/etc/fstab                                                           
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 rw 0 0 > $1/$2/etc/mtab                                                                  
+
+echo "creating devices and dependencies"
+if [ -f "$DEVICES" ]; then
+  cd $1/$2/
+  tar zxvf $DEVICES
+  chroot $1/$2/ sbin/ldconfig
+else
+  echo error: device template $DEVICES not found
+fi
+
+if [ -f "$SKEL" ]; then
+  echo "creating /etc/vservers/$2.conf"
+  mkdir -p /etc/vservers
+  cp $SKEL /etc/vservers/$2.conf
+else
+  echo error: config file template $SKEL not found
+fi
+
+if [ -f "$GPGKEY" ]; then
+  echo "importing slack gpg pubkey"                                                                                  
+  mkdir $1/$2/root/.gnupg                                                                                        
+  gpg --homedir $1/$2/root/.gnupg --import $GPGKEY
+fi
+
+echo "done; now edit /etc/vservers/$2.conf"
+echo "then, set all desired iptables rules and start $server vserver"
+echo "dont forget to change root's password with the command "vserver $2 exec passwd"" 
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.template b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b810e32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver-legacy/vserver-legacy.template
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+# 
+# This one comes from disk: A1 (Base Linux series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cxxlibs: ADD
+dcron: ADD
+elvis: ADD
+etc: ADD
+findutils: ADD
+gawk: ADD
+gettext: REC
+grep: ADD
+gzip: ADD
+infozip: ADD
+less: ADD
+logrotate: ADD
+openssl-solibs: ADD
+pkgtools: ADD
+procps: ADD
+sed: ADD
+shadow: ADD
+slocate: ADD
+sysklogd: ADD
+sysvinit: ADD
+tar: ADD
+util-linux: ADD
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: AP1 (Applications series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+bc: OPT
+diffutils: REC
+jed: OPT
+joe: OPT
+jove: OPT
+lsof: OPT
+mysql: OPT
+sudo: OPT
+vim: OPT
+# Tagfile for emacs series
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: F1 (Frequently Asked Questions)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+libidn: REC
+libxml2: REC
+mhash: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from the N (Network/UUCP/Mail/News) series.
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# 
+#
+apache: OPT
+curl: OPT
+gnupg: OPT
+htdig: OPT
+inetd: REC
+lftp: OPT
+lynx: OPT
+mod_ssl: OPT
+nail: REC
+openssh: REC
+openssl: REC
+php: OPT
+rsync: OPT
+stunnel: OPT
+tcpip: REC
+wget: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: TCL1 (Tcl/Tk series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: Y1 (Yaaaaaahhoooo? Games and Amusements).
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# extra
+libsafe
+# contrib
+simplepkg
+ssmtp
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b7115d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1046 @@
+##
+## httpd.conf -- Apache HTTP server configuration file
+##
+
+#
+# Based upon the NCSA server configuration files originally by Rob McCool.
+#
+# This is the main Apache server configuration file.  It contains the
+# configuration directives that give the server its instructions.
+# See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/> for detailed information about
+# the directives.
+#
+# Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding
+# what they do.  They're here only as hints or reminders.  If you are unsure
+# consult the online docs. You have been warned.  
+#
+# After this file is processed, the server will look for and process
+# /etc/apache/srm.conf and then /etc/apache/access.conf
+# unless you have overridden these with ResourceConfig and/or
+# AccessConfig directives here.
+#
+# The configuration directives are grouped into three basic sections:
+#  1. Directives that control the operation of the Apache server process as a
+#     whole (the 'global environment').
+#  2. Directives that define the parameters of the 'main' or 'default' server,
+#     which responds to requests that aren't handled by a virtual host.
+#     These directives also provide default values for the settings
+#     of all virtual hosts.
+#  3. Settings for virtual hosts, which allow Web requests to be sent to
+#     different IP addresses or hostnames and have them handled by the
+#     same Apache server process.
+#
+# Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many
+# of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the
+# server will use that explicit path.  If the filenames do *not* begin
+# with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log"
+# with ServerRoot set to "/usr/local/apache" will be interpreted by the
+# server as "/usr/local/apache/logs/foo.log".
+#
+
+### Section 1: Global Environment
+#
+# The directives in this section affect the overall operation of Apache,
+# such as the number of concurrent requests it can handle or where it
+# can find its configuration files.
+#
+
+#
+# ServerType is either inetd, or standalone.  Inetd mode is only supported on
+# Unix platforms.
+#
+ServerType standalone
+
+# ServerTokens directive
+ServerTokens ProductOnly
+
+#
+# ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's
+# configuration, error, and log files are kept.
+#
+# NOTE!  If you intend to place this on an NFS (or otherwise network)
+# mounted filesystem then please read the LockFile documentation
+# (available at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/mod/core.html#lockfile>);
+# you will save yourself a lot of trouble.
+#
+ServerRoot "/usr"
+
+#
+# The LockFile directive sets the path to the lockfile used when Apache
+# is compiled with either USE_FCNTL_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT or
+# USE_FLOCK_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT. This directive should normally be left at
+# its default value. The main reason for changing it is if the logs
+# directory is NFS mounted, since the lockfile MUST BE STORED ON A LOCAL
+# DISK. The PID of the main server process is automatically appended to
+# the filename. 
+#
+#LockFile /var/run/httpd.lock
+
+#
+# PidFile: The file in which the server should record its process
+# identification number when it starts.
+#
+PidFile /var/run/httpd.pid
+
+#
+# ScoreBoardFile: File used to store internal server process information.
+# Not all architectures require this.  But if yours does (you'll know because
+# this file will be  created when you run Apache) then you *must* ensure that
+# no two invocations of Apache share the same scoreboard file.
+#
+ScoreBoardFile /var/run/httpd.scoreboard
+
+#
+# In the standard configuration, the server will process httpd.conf (this 
+# file, specified by the -f command line option), srm.conf, and access.conf 
+# in that order.  The latter two files are now distributed empty, as it is 
+# recommended that all directives be kept in a single file for simplicity.  
+# The commented-out values below are the built-in defaults.  You can have the 
+# server ignore these files altogether by using "/dev/null" (for Unix) or
+# "nul" (for Win32) for the arguments to the directives.
+#
+#ResourceConfig /etc/apache/srm.conf
+#AccessConfig /etc/apache/access.conf
+
+#
+# Timeout: The number of seconds before receives and sends time out.
+#
+Timeout 300
+
+#
+# KeepAlive: Whether or not to allow persistent connections (more than
+# one request per connection). Set to "Off" to deactivate.
+#
+KeepAlive On
+
+#
+# MaxKeepAliveRequests: The maximum number of requests to allow
+# during a persistent connection. Set to 0 to allow an unlimited amount.
+# We recommend you leave this number high, for maximum performance.
+#
+MaxKeepAliveRequests 100
+
+#
+# KeepAliveTimeout: Number of seconds to wait for the next request from the
+# same client on the same connection.
+#
+KeepAliveTimeout 2
+
+#
+# Server-pool size regulation.  Rather than making you guess how many
+# server processes you need, Apache dynamically adapts to the load it
+# sees --- that is, it tries to maintain enough server processes to
+# handle the current load, plus a few spare servers to handle transient
+# load spikes (e.g., multiple simultaneous requests from a single
+# Netscape browser).
+#
+# It does this by periodically checking how many servers are waiting
+# for a request.  If there are fewer than MinSpareServers, it creates
+# a new spare.  If there are more than MaxSpareServers, some of the
+# spares die off.  The default values are probably OK for most sites.
+#
+MinSpareServers 5
+MaxSpareServers 10
+
+#
+# Number of servers to start initially --- should be a reasonable ballpark
+# figure.
+#
+StartServers 5
+
+#
+# Limit on total number of servers running, i.e., limit on the number
+# of clients who can simultaneously connect --- if this limit is ever
+# reached, clients will be LOCKED OUT, so it should NOT BE SET TOO LOW.
+# It is intended mainly as a brake to keep a runaway server from taking
+# the system with it as it spirals down...
+#
+MaxClients 150
+
+#
+# MaxRequestsPerChild: the number of requests each child process is
+# allowed to process before the child dies.  The child will exit so
+# as to avoid problems after prolonged use when Apache (and maybe the
+# libraries it uses) leak memory or other resources.  On most systems, this
+# isn't really needed, but a few (such as Solaris) do have notable leaks
+# in the libraries. For these platforms, set to something like 10000
+# or so; a setting of 0 means unlimited.
+#
+# NOTE: This value does not include keepalive requests after the initial
+#       request per connection. For example, if a child process handles
+#       an initial request and 10 subsequent "keptalive" requests, it
+#       would only count as 1 request towards this limit.
+#
+MaxRequestsPerChild 0
+
+#
+# Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or
+# ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost>
+# directive.
+#
+#Listen 3000
+#Listen 12.34.56.78:80
+
+#
+# BindAddress: You can support virtual hosts with this option. This directive
+# is used to tell the server which IP address to listen to. It can either
+# contain "*", an IP address, or a fully qualified Internet domain name.
+# See also the <VirtualHost> and Listen directives.
+#
+#BindAddress *
+
+#
+# Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support
+#
+# To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you
+# have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the
+# directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used.
+# Please read the file http://httpd.apache.org/docs/dso.html for more
+# details about the DSO mechanism and run `httpd -l' for the list of already
+# built-in (statically linked and thus always available) modules in your httpd
+# binary.
+#
+# Note: The order in which modules are loaded is important.  Don't change
+# the order below without expert advice.
+#
+# Example:
+# LoadModule foo_module libexec/mod_foo.so
+LoadModule vhost_alias_module libexec/apache/mod_vhost_alias.so
+#LoadModule env_module         libexec/apache/mod_env.so
+LoadModule define_module      libexec/apache/mod_define.so
+LoadModule config_log_module  libexec/apache/mod_log_config.so
+LoadModule mime_magic_module  libexec/apache/mod_mime_magic.so
+LoadModule mime_module        libexec/apache/mod_mime.so
+LoadModule negotiation_module libexec/apache/mod_negotiation.so
+#LoadModule status_module      libexec/apache/mod_status.so
+#LoadModule info_module        libexec/apache/mod_info.so
+LoadModule includes_module    libexec/apache/mod_include.so
+LoadModule autoindex_module   libexec/apache/mod_autoindex.so
+LoadModule dir_module         libexec/apache/mod_dir.so
+LoadModule cgi_module         libexec/apache/mod_cgi.so
+#LoadModule asis_module        libexec/apache/mod_asis.so
+#LoadModule imap_module        libexec/apache/mod_imap.so
+#LoadModule action_module      libexec/apache/mod_actions.so
+#LoadModule speling_module     libexec/apache/mod_speling.so
+#LoadModule userdir_module     libexec/apache/mod_userdir.so
+LoadModule alias_module       libexec/apache/mod_alias.so
+LoadModule rewrite_module     libexec/apache/mod_rewrite.so
+LoadModule access_module      libexec/apache/mod_access.so
+LoadModule auth_module        libexec/apache/mod_auth.so
+LoadModule anon_auth_module   libexec/apache/mod_auth_anon.so
+#LoadModule dbm_auth_module    libexec/apache/mod_auth_dbm.so
+#LoadModule digest_module      libexec/apache/mod_digest.so
+LoadModule proxy_module       libexec/apache/libproxy.so
+LoadModule cern_meta_module   libexec/apache/mod_cern_meta.so
+LoadModule expires_module     libexec/apache/mod_expires.so
+LoadModule headers_module     libexec/apache/mod_headers.so
+#LoadModule usertrack_module   libexec/apache/mod_usertrack.so
+#LoadModule log_forensic_module libexec/apache/mod_log_forensic.so
+#LoadModule unique_id_module   libexec/apache/mod_unique_id.so
+LoadModule setenvif_module    libexec/apache/mod_setenvif.so
+
+#  Reconstruction of the complete module list from all available modules
+#  (static and shared ones) to achieve correct module execution order.
+#  [WHENEVER YOU CHANGE THE LOADMODULE SECTION ABOVE UPDATE THIS, TOO]
+ClearModuleList
+AddModule mod_vhost_alias.c
+#AddModule mod_env.c
+AddModule mod_define.c
+AddModule mod_log_config.c
+AddModule mod_mime_magic.c
+AddModule mod_mime.c
+AddModule mod_negotiation.c
+#AddModule mod_status.c
+#AddModule mod_info.c
+AddModule mod_include.c
+AddModule mod_autoindex.c
+AddModule mod_dir.c
+AddModule mod_cgi.c
+#AddModule mod_asis.c
+#AddModule mod_imap.c
+#AddModule mod_actions.c
+#AddModule mod_speling.c
+#AddModule mod_userdir.c
+AddModule mod_alias.c
+AddModule mod_rewrite.c
+AddModule mod_access.c
+AddModule mod_auth.c
+AddModule mod_auth_anon.c
+#AddModule mod_auth_dbm.c
+#AddModule mod_digest.c
+AddModule mod_proxy.c
+AddModule mod_cern_meta.c
+AddModule mod_expires.c
+AddModule mod_headers.c
+#AddModule mod_usertrack.c
+#AddModule mod_log_forensic.c
+#AddModule mod_unique_id.c
+AddModule mod_so.c
+AddModule mod_setenvif.c
+
+#
+# ExtendedStatus controls whether Apache will generate "full" status
+# information (ExtendedStatus On) or just basic information (ExtendedStatus
+# Off) when the "server-status" handler is called. The default is Off.
+#
+#ExtendedStatus On
+
+### Section 2: 'Main' server configuration
+#
+# The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main'
+# server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a
+# <VirtualHost> definition.  These values also provide defaults for
+# any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file.
+#
+# All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers,
+# in which case these default settings will be overridden for the
+# virtual host being defined.
+#
+
+#
+# If your ServerType directive (set earlier in the 'Global Environment'
+# section) is set to "inetd", the next few directives don't have any
+# effect since their settings are defined by the inetd configuration.
+# Skip ahead to the ServerAdmin directive.
+#
+
+#
+# Port: The port to which the standalone server listens. For
+# ports < 1023, you will need httpd to be run as root initially.
+#
+Port 80
+
+#
+# If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run
+# httpd as root initially and it will switch.  
+#
+# User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as.
+#  . On SCO (ODT 3) use "User nouser" and "Group nogroup".
+#  . On HPUX you may not be able to use shared memory as nobody, and the
+#    suggested workaround is to create a user www and use that user.
+#  NOTE that some kernels refuse to setgid(Group) or semctl(IPC_SET)
+#  when the value of (unsigned)Group is above 60000; 
+#  don't use Group "#-1" on these systems!
+#
+User nobody
+Group nobody
+
+#
+# ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be
+# e-mailed.  This address appears on some server-generated pages, such
+# as error documents.
+#
+ServerAdmin root@midas.slackware.lan
+
+#
+# ServerName allows you to set a host name which is sent back to clients for
+# your server if it's different than the one the program would get (i.e., use
+# "www" instead of the host's real name).
+#
+# Note: You cannot just invent host names and hope they work. The name you 
+# define here must be a valid DNS name for your host. If you don't understand
+# this, ask your network administrator.
+# If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here.
+# You will have to access it by its address (e.g., http://123.45.67.89/)
+# anyway, and this will make redirections work in a sensible way.
+#
+# 127.0.0.1 is the TCP/IP local loop-back address, often named localhost. Your 
+# machine always knows itself by this address. If you use Apache strictly for 
+# local testing and development, you may use 127.0.0.1 as the server name.
+#
+#ServerName www.example.com
+
+#
+# DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your
+# documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but
+# symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations.
+#
+DocumentRoot "/var/www/htdocs"
+
+#
+# Each directory to which Apache has access, can be configured with respect
+# to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that
+# directory (and its subdirectories). 
+#
+# First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of 
+# permissions.  
+#
+<Directory />
+    Options FollowSymLinks
+    AllowOverride None
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow
+# particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as
+# you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it
+# below.
+#
+
+#
+# This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to.
+#
+<Directory "/var/www/htdocs">
+
+#
+# This may also be "None", "All", or any combination of "Indexes",
+# "Includes", "FollowSymLinks", "ExecCGI", or "MultiViews".
+#
+# Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All"
+# doesn't give it to you.
+#
+    Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews
+
+#
+# This controls which options the .htaccess files in directories can
+# override. Can also be "All", or any combination of "Options", "FileInfo", 
+# "AuthConfig", and "Limit"
+#
+    AllowOverride None
+
+#
+# Controls who can get stuff from this server.
+#
+    Order allow,deny
+    Allow from all
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# UserDir: The name of the directory which is appended onto a user's home
+# directory if a ~user request is received.
+#
+<IfModule mod_userdir.c>
+    UserDir public_html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# Control access to UserDir directories.  The following is an example
+# for a site where these directories are restricted to read-only.
+#
+#<Directory /home/*/public_html>
+#    AllowOverride FileInfo AuthConfig Limit
+#    Options MultiViews Indexes SymLinksIfOwnerMatch IncludesNoExec
+#    <Limit GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order allow,deny
+#        Allow from all
+#    </Limit>
+#    <LimitExcept GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order deny,allow
+#        Deny from all
+#    </LimitExcept>
+#</Directory>
+
+#
+# DirectoryIndex: Name of the file or files to use as a pre-written HTML
+# directory index.  Separate multiple entries with spaces.
+#
+<IfModule mod_dir.c>
+    DirectoryIndex index.html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# AccessFileName: The name of the file to look for in each directory
+# for access control information.
+#
+AccessFileName .htaccess
+
+#
+# The following lines prevent .htaccess files from being viewed by
+# Web clients.  Since .htaccess files often contain authorization
+# information, access is disallowed for security reasons.  Comment
+# these lines out if you want Web visitors to see the contents of
+# .htaccess files.  If you change the AccessFileName directive above,
+# be sure to make the corresponding changes here.
+#
+# Also, folks tend to use names such as .htpasswd for password
+# files, so this will protect those as well.
+#
+<Files ~ "^\.ht">
+    Order allow,deny
+    Deny from all
+    Satisfy All
+</Files>
+
+#
+# CacheNegotiatedDocs: By default, Apache sends "Pragma: no-cache" with each
+# document that was negotiated on the basis of content. This asks proxy
+# servers not to cache the document. Uncommenting the following line disables
+# this behavior, and proxies will be allowed to cache the documents.
+#
+#CacheNegotiatedDocs
+
+#
+# UseCanonicalName:  (new for 1.3)  With this setting turned on, whenever
+# Apache needs to construct a self-referencing URL (a URL that refers back
+# to the server the response is coming from) it will use ServerName and
+# Port to form a "canonical" name.  With this setting off, Apache will
+# use the hostname:port that the client supplied, when possible.  This
+# also affects SERVER_NAME and SERVER_PORT in CGI scripts.
+#
+UseCanonicalName On
+
+#
+# TypesConfig describes where the mime.types file (or equivalent) is
+# to be found.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+    TypesConfig /etc/apache/mime.types
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# DefaultType is the default MIME type the server will use for a document
+# if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions.
+# If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is
+# a good value.  If most of your content is binary, such as applications
+# or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to
+# keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are
+# text.
+#
+DefaultType text/plain
+
+#
+# The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the
+# contents of the file itself to determine its type.  The MIMEMagicFile
+# directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located.
+# mod_mime_magic is not part of the default server (you have to add
+# it yourself with a LoadModule [see the DSO paragraph in the 'Global
+# Environment' section], or recompile the server and include mod_mime_magic
+# as part of the configuration), so it's enclosed in an <IfModule> container.
+# This means that the MIMEMagicFile directive will only be processed if the
+# module is part of the server.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime_magic.c>
+    MIMEMagicFile /etc/apache/magic
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# HostnameLookups: Log the names of clients or just their IP addresses
+# e.g., www.apache.org (on) or 204.62.129.132 (off).
+# The default is off because it'd be overall better for the net if people
+# had to knowingly turn this feature on, since enabling it means that
+# each client request will result in AT LEAST one lookup request to the
+# nameserver.
+#
+HostnameLookups Off
+
+#
+# ErrorLog: The location of the error log file.
+# If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be
+# logged here.  If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost>
+# container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here.
+#
+ErrorLog "| /usr/bin/error-log.sh /var/log/apache/error_log"
+
+#
+# LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log.
+# Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit,
+# alert, emerg.
+#
+LogLevel warn
+
+#
+# The following directives define some format nicknames for use with
+# a CustomLog directive (see below).
+#
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common
+LogFormat "%{Referer}i -> %U" referer
+LogFormat "%{User-agent}i" agent
+
+#
+# The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format).
+# If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, they will be logged here.  Contrariwise, if you *do*
+# define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be
+# logged therein and *not* in this file.
+#
+CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log common
+
+#
+# If you would like to have agent and referer logfiles, uncomment the
+# following directives.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/referer_log referer
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/agent_log agent
+
+#
+# If you prefer a single logfile with access, agent, and referer information
+# (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log combined
+
+#
+# Optionally add a line containing the server version and virtual host
+# name to server-generated pages (error documents, FTP directory listings,
+# mod_status and mod_info output etc., but not CGI generated documents).
+# Set to "EMail" to also include a mailto: link to the ServerAdmin.
+# Set to one of:  On | Off | EMail
+#
+ServerSignature Off
+
+# EBCDIC configuration:
+# (only for mainframes using the EBCDIC codeset, currently one of:
+# Fujitsu-Siemens' BS2000/OSD, IBM's OS/390 and IBM's TPF)!!
+# The following default configuration assumes that "text files"
+# are stored in EBCDIC (so that you can operate on them using the
+# normal POSIX tools like grep and sort) while "binary files" are
+# stored with identical octets as on an ASCII machine.
+#
+# The directives are evaluated in configuration file order, with
+# the EBCDICConvert directives applied before EBCDICConvertByType.
+#
+# If you want to have ASCII HTML documents and EBCDIC HTML documents
+# at the same time, you can use the file extension to force
+# conversion off for the ASCII documents:
+# > AddType       text/html .ahtml
+# > EBCDICConvert Off=InOut .ahtml
+#
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut text/* message/* multipart/*
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=In    application/x-www-form-urlencoded
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut application/postscript model/vrml
+# EBCDICConvertByType Off=InOut */*
+
+
+#
+# Aliases: Add here as many aliases as you need (with no limit). The format is 
+# Alias fakename realname
+#
+<IfModule mod_alias.c>
+
+    #
+    # Note that if you include a trailing / on fakename then the server will
+    # require it to be present in the URL.  So "/icons" isn't aliased in this
+    # example, only "/icons/".  If the fakename is slash-terminated, then the 
+    # realname must also be slash terminated, and if the fakename omits the 
+    # trailing slash, the realname must also omit it.
+    #
+    Alias /icons/ "/var/www/icons/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/icons">
+        Options Indexes MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    # This Alias will project the on-line documentation tree under /manual/
+    # even if you change the DocumentRoot. Comment it if you don't want to 
+    # provide access to the on-line documentation.
+    #
+    Alias /manual/ "/var/www/htdocs/manual/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/htdocs/manual">
+        Options Indexes FollowSymlinks MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    #
+    # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts.
+    # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that
+    # documents in the realname directory are treated as applications and
+    # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the client.
+    # The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias directives as to
+    # Alias.
+    #
+    ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/var/www/cgi-bin/"
+
+    #
+    # "/var/www/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased
+    # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured.
+    #
+    <Directory "/var/www/cgi-bin">
+        AllowOverride None
+        Options None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of aliases.
+
+#
+# Redirect allows you to tell clients about documents which used to exist in
+# your server's namespace, but do not anymore. This allows you to tell the
+# clients where to look for the relocated document.
+# Format: Redirect old-URI new-URL
+#
+
+#
+# Directives controlling the display of server-generated directory listings.
+#
+<IfModule mod_autoindex.c>
+
+    #
+    # FancyIndexing is whether you want fancy directory indexing or standard
+    #
+    IndexOptions FancyIndexing
+
+    #
+    # AddIcon* directives tell the server which icon to show for different
+    # files or filename extensions.  These are only displayed for
+    # FancyIndexed directories.
+    #
+    AddIconByEncoding (CMP,/icons/compressed.gif) x-compress x-gzip
+
+    AddIconByType (TXT,/icons/text.gif) text/*
+    AddIconByType (IMG,/icons/image2.gif) image/*
+    AddIconByType (SND,/icons/sound2.gif) audio/*
+    AddIconByType (VID,/icons/movie.gif) video/*
+
+    AddIcon /icons/binary.gif .bin .exe
+    AddIcon /icons/binhex.gif .hqx
+    AddIcon /icons/tar.gif .tar
+    AddIcon /icons/world2.gif .wrl .wrl.gz .vrml .vrm .iv
+    AddIcon /icons/compressed.gif .Z .z .tgz .gz .zip
+    AddIcon /icons/a.gif .ps .ai .eps
+    AddIcon /icons/layout.gif .html .shtml .htm .pdf
+    AddIcon /icons/text.gif .txt
+    AddIcon /icons/c.gif .c
+    AddIcon /icons/p.gif .pl .py
+    AddIcon /icons/f.gif .for
+    AddIcon /icons/dvi.gif .dvi
+    AddIcon /icons/uuencoded.gif .uu
+    AddIcon /icons/script.gif .conf .sh .shar .csh .ksh .tcl
+    AddIcon /icons/tex.gif .tex
+    AddIcon /icons/bomb.gif core
+
+    AddIcon /icons/back.gif ..
+    AddIcon /icons/hand.right.gif README
+    AddIcon /icons/folder.gif ^^DIRECTORY^^
+    AddIcon /icons/blank.gif ^^BLANKICON^^
+
+    #
+    # DefaultIcon is which icon to show for files which do not have an icon
+    # explicitly set.
+    #
+    DefaultIcon /icons/unknown.gif
+
+    #
+    # AddDescription allows you to place a short description after a file in
+    # server-generated indexes.  These are only displayed for FancyIndexed
+    # directories.
+    # Format: AddDescription "description" filename
+    #
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed document" .gz
+    #AddDescription "tar archive" .tar
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed tar archive" .tgz
+
+    #
+    # ReadmeName is the name of the README file the server will look for by
+    # default, and append to directory listings.
+    #
+    # HeaderName is the name of a file which should be prepended to
+    # directory indexes. 
+    #
+    ReadmeName README.html
+    HeaderName HEADER.html
+
+    #
+    # IndexIgnore is a set of filenames which directory indexing should ignore
+    # and not include in the listing.  Shell-style wildcarding is permitted.
+    #
+    IndexIgnore .??* *~ *# HEADER* README* RCS CVS *,v *,t
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of indexing directives.
+
+#
+# Document types.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+
+    #
+    # AddLanguage allows you to specify the language of a document. You can
+    # then use content negotiation to give a browser a file in a language
+    # it can understand.  
+    #
+    # Note 1: The suffix does not have to be the same as the language 
+    # keyword --- those with documents in Polish (whose net-standard 
+    # language code is pl) may wish to use "AddLanguage pl .po" to 
+    # avoid the ambiguity with the common suffix for perl scripts.
+    #
+    # Note 2: The example entries below illustrate that in quite
+    # some cases the two character 'Language' abbreviation is not
+    # identical to the two character 'Country' code for its country,
+    # E.g. 'Danmark/dk' versus 'Danish/da'.
+    #
+    # Note 3: In the case of 'ltz' we violate the RFC by using a three char 
+    # specifier. But there is 'work in progress' to fix this and get 
+    # the reference data for rfc1766 cleaned up.
+    #
+    # Danish (da) - Dutch (nl) - English (en) - Estonian (ee)
+    # French (fr) - German (de) - Greek-Modern (el)
+    # Italian (it) - Korean (kr) - Norwegian (no) - Norwegian Nynorsk (nn)
+    # Portugese (pt) - Luxembourgeois* (ltz)
+    # Spanish (es) - Swedish (sv) - Catalan (ca) - Czech(cs)
+    # Polish (pl) - Brazilian Portuguese (pt-br) - Japanese (ja)
+    # Russian (ru)
+    #
+    AddLanguage da .dk
+    AddLanguage nl .nl
+    AddLanguage en .en
+    AddLanguage et .ee
+    AddLanguage fr .fr
+    AddLanguage de .de
+    AddLanguage el .el
+    AddLanguage he .he
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-8 .iso8859-8
+    AddLanguage it .it
+    AddLanguage ja .ja
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-JP .jis
+    AddLanguage kr .kr
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-KR .iso-kr
+    AddLanguage nn .nn
+    AddLanguage no .no
+    AddLanguage pl .po
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-2 .iso-pl
+    AddLanguage pt .pt
+    AddLanguage pt-br .pt-br
+    AddLanguage ltz .lu
+    AddLanguage ca .ca
+    AddLanguage es .es
+    AddLanguage sv .sv
+    AddLanguage cs .cz .cs
+    AddLanguage ru .ru
+    AddLanguage zh-TW .zh-tw
+    AddCharset Big5         .Big5    .big5
+    AddCharset WINDOWS-1251 .cp-1251
+    AddCharset CP866        .cp866
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-5   .iso-ru
+    AddCharset KOI8-R       .koi8-r
+    AddCharset UCS-2        .ucs2
+    AddCharset UCS-4        .ucs4
+    AddCharset UTF-8        .utf8
+
+    # LanguagePriority allows you to give precedence to some languages
+    # in case of a tie during content negotiation.
+    #
+    # Just list the languages in decreasing order of preference. We have
+    # more or less alphabetized them here. You probably want to change this.
+    #
+    <IfModule mod_negotiation.c>
+        LanguagePriority en da nl et fr de el it ja kr no pl pt pt-br ru ltz ca es sv tw
+    </IfModule>
+
+    #
+    # AddType allows you to tweak mime.types without actually editing it, or to
+    # make certain files to be certain types.
+    #
+    AddType application/x-tar .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress
+    # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this.
+    # Despite the name similarity, the following Add* directives have nothing
+    # to do with the FancyIndexing customization directives above.
+    #
+    AddEncoding x-compress .Z
+    AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz
+    #
+    # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you
+    # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types:
+    #
+    #AddType application/x-compress .Z
+    #AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers",
+    # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server
+    # or added with the Action command (see below)
+    #
+    # If you want to use server side includes, or CGI outside
+    # ScriptAliased directories, uncomment the following lines.
+    #
+    # To use CGI scripts:
+    #
+    #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi
+
+    #
+    # To use server-parsed HTML files
+    #
+    #AddType text/html .shtml
+    #AddHandler server-parsed .shtml
+
+    #
+    # Uncomment the following line to enable Apache's send-asis HTTP file
+    # feature
+    #
+    #AddHandler send-as-is asis
+
+    #
+    # If you wish to use server-parsed imagemap files, use
+    #
+    #AddHandler imap-file map
+
+    #
+    # To enable type maps, you might want to use
+    #
+    #AddHandler type-map var
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of document types.
+
+#
+# Action lets you define media types that will execute a script whenever
+# a matching file is called. This eliminates the need for repeated URL
+# pathnames for oft-used CGI file processors.
+# Format: Action media/type /cgi-script/location
+# Format: Action handler-name /cgi-script/location
+#
+
+#
+# MetaDir: specifies the name of the directory in which Apache can find
+# meta information files. These files contain additional HTTP headers
+# to include when sending the document
+#
+#MetaDir .web
+
+#
+# MetaSuffix: specifies the file name suffix for the file containing the
+# meta information.
+#
+#MetaSuffix .meta
+
+#
+# Customizable error response (Apache style)
+#  these come in three flavors
+#
+#    1) plain text
+ErrorDocument 500 /missing.html
+#  n.b.  the single leading (") marks it as text, it does not get output
+#
+#    2) local redirects
+ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html
+#  to redirect to local URL /missing.html
+#ErrorDocument 404 /cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl
+#  N.B.: You can redirect to a script or a document using server-side-includes.
+#
+#    3) external redirects
+ErrorDocument 402 /missing.html
+#  N.B.: Many of the environment variables associated with the original
+#  request will *not* be available to such a script.
+
+#
+# Customize behaviour based on the browser
+#
+<IfModule mod_setenvif.c>
+
+    #
+    # The following directives modify normal HTTP response behavior.
+    # The first directive disables keepalive for Netscape 2.x and browsers that
+    # spoof it. There are known problems with these browser implementations.
+    # The second directive is for Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0b2
+    # which has a broken HTTP/1.1 implementation and does not properly
+    # support keepalive when it is used on 301 or 302 (redirect) responses.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "Mozilla/2" nokeepalive
+    BrowserMatch "MSIE 4\.0b2;" nokeepalive downgrade-1.0 force-response-1.0
+
+    #
+    # The following directive disables HTTP/1.1 responses to browsers which
+    # are in violation of the HTTP/1.0 spec by not being able to grok a
+    # basic 1.1 response.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "RealPlayer 4\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "Java/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "JDK/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of browser customization directives
+
+#
+# Allow server status reports, with the URL of http://servername/server-status
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-status>
+#    SetHandler server-status
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# Allow remote server configuration reports, with the URL of
+# http://servername/server-info (requires that mod_info.c be loaded).
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-info>
+#    SetHandler server-info
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# There have been reports of people trying to abuse an old bug from pre-1.1
+# days.  This bug involved a CGI script distributed as a part of Apache.
+# By uncommenting these lines you can redirect these attacks to a logging 
+# script on phf.apache.org.  Or, you can record them yourself, using the script
+# support/phf_abuse_log.cgi.
+#
+#<Location /cgi-bin/phf*>
+#    Deny from all
+#    ErrorDocument 403 http://phf.apache.org/phf_abuse_log.cgi
+#</Location>
+
+### Section 3: Virtual Hosts
+#
+# VirtualHost: If you want to maintain multiple domains/hostnames on your
+# machine you can setup VirtualHost containers for them. Most configurations
+# use only name-based virtual hosts so the server doesn't need to worry about
+# IP addresses. This is indicated by the asterisks in the directives below.
+#
+# Please see the documentation at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/vhosts/>
+# for further details before you try to setup virtual hosts.
+#
+# You may use the command line option '-S' to verify your virtual host
+# configuration.
+
+#
+# Use name-based virtual hosting.
+#
+#NameVirtualHost *:80
+
+#
+# VirtualHost example:
+# Almost any Apache directive may go into a VirtualHost container.
+# The first VirtualHost section is used for requests without a known
+# server name.
+#
+#<VirtualHost *:80>
+#    ServerAdmin webmaster@dummy-host.example.com
+#    DocumentRoot /www/docs/dummy-host.example.com
+#    ServerName dummy-host.example.com
+#    ErrorLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-error_log
+#    CustomLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-access_log common
+#</VirtualHost>
+
+# By default, all external Apache modules are disabled.  To enable a particular
+# module for Apache, make sure the necessary packages are installed.  Then
+# uncomment the appropriate Include line below, save the file, and restart
+# Apache.  Note that some modules may need additional configuration steps.  For
+# example, mod_ssl requires a site certificate which you may need to generate.
+#
+# Lastly, if you remove a module package, be sure to edit this file and comment
+# out the appropriate Include line.
+
+# ==> mod_php configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  openssl-solibs (A series) and/or openssl (N series),
+#                     mysql (AP series), gmp (L series), mhash (L series),
+#                     and apache (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_php.conf
+
+# ==> mod_ssl configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  apache (N series) and openssl (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_ssl.conf
+
+#NameVirtualHost VSERVER_IP
+
+Include /etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/php.ini b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/php.ini
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6cddef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/php.ini
@@ -0,0 +1,1122 @@
+[PHP]
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; About this file ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; This is the recommended, PHP 4-style version of the php.ini-dist file.  It
+; sets some non standard settings, that make PHP more efficient, more secure,
+; and encourage cleaner coding.
+; The price is that with these settings, PHP may be incompatible with some
+; applications, and sometimes, more difficult to develop with.  Using this
+; file is warmly recommended for production sites.  As all of the changes from
+; the standard settings are thoroughly documented, you can go over each one,
+; and decide whether you want to use it or not.
+;
+; For general information about the php.ini file, please consult the php.ini-dist
+; file, included in your PHP distribution.
+;
+; This file is different from the php.ini-dist file in the fact that it features
+; different values for several directives, in order to improve performance, while
+; possibly breaking compatibility with the standard out-of-the-box behavior of
+; PHP 3.  Please make sure you read what's different, and modify your scripts
+; accordingly, if you decide to use this file instead.
+;
+; - register_globals = Off         [Security, Performance]
+;     Global variables are no longer registered for input data (POST, GET, cookies,
+;     environment and other server variables).  Instead of using $foo, you must use
+;     you can use $_REQUEST["foo"] (includes any variable that arrives through the
+;     request, namely, POST, GET and cookie variables), or use one of the specific
+;     $_GET["foo"], $_POST["foo"], $_COOKIE["foo"] or $_FILES["foo"], depending
+;     on where the input originates.  Also, you can look at the
+;     import_request_variables() function.
+;     Note that register_globals is going to be depracated (i.e., turned off by
+;     default) in the next version of PHP, because it often leads to security bugs.
+;     Read http://php.net/manual/en/security.registerglobals.php for further
+;     information.
+; - display_errors = Off           [Security]
+;     With this directive set to off, errors that occur during the execution of
+;     scripts will no longer be displayed as a part of the script output, and thus,
+;     will no longer be exposed to remote users.  With some errors, the error message
+;     content may expose information about your script, web server, or database
+;     server that may be exploitable for hacking.  Production sites should have this
+;     directive set to off.
+; - log_errors = On                [Security]
+;     This directive complements the above one.  Any errors that occur during the
+;     execution of your script will be logged (typically, to your server's error log,
+;     but can be configured in several ways).  Along with setting display_errors to off,
+;     this setup gives you the ability to fully understand what may have gone wrong,
+;     without exposing any sensitive information to remote users.
+; - output_buffering = 4096        [Performance]
+;     Set a 4KB output buffer.  Enabling output buffering typically results in less
+;     writes, and sometimes less packets sent on the wire, which can often lead to
+;     better performance.  The gain this directive actually yields greatly depends
+;     on which Web server you're working with, and what kind of scripts you're using.
+; - register_argc_argv = Off       [Performance]
+;     Disables registration of the somewhat redundant $argv and $argc global
+;     variables.
+; - magic_quotes_gpc = Off         [Performance]
+;     Input data is no longer escaped with slashes so that it can be sent into
+;     SQL databases without further manipulation.  Instead, you should use the
+;     function addslashes() on each input element you wish to send to a database.
+; - variables_order = "GPCS"       [Performance]
+;     The environment variables are not hashed into the $HTTP_ENV_VARS[].  To access
+;     environment variables, you can use getenv() instead.
+; - error_reporting = E_ALL        [Code Cleanliness, Security(?)]
+;     By default, PHP surpresses errors of type E_NOTICE.  These error messages
+;     are emitted for non-critical errors, but that could be a symptom of a bigger
+;     problem.  Most notably, this will cause error messages about the use
+;     of uninitialized variables to be displayed.
+; - allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off     [Code cleanliness]
+;     It's not possible to decide to force a variable to be passed by reference
+;     when calling a function.  The PHP 4 style to do this is by making the
+;     function require the relevant argument by reference.
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Language Options ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Enable the PHP scripting language engine under Apache.
+engine = On
+
+; Allow the <? tag.  Otherwise, only <?php and <script> tags are recognized.  
+; NOTE: Using short tags should be avoided when developing applications or
+; libraries that are meant for redistribution, or deployment on PHP
+; servers which are not under your control, because short tags may not
+; be supported on the target server. For portable, redistributable code,
+; be sure not to use short tags.
+short_open_tag = On
+
+; Allow ASP-style <% %> tags.
+asp_tags = Off
+
+; The number of significant digits displayed in floating point numbers.
+precision    =  14
+
+; Enforce year 2000 compliance (will cause problems with non-compliant browsers)
+y2k_compliance = On
+
+; Output buffering allows you to send header lines (including cookies) even
+; after you send body content, at the price of slowing PHP's output layer a
+; bit.  You can enable output buffering during runtime by calling the output
+; buffering functions.  You can also enable output buffering for all files by
+; setting this directive to On.  If you wish to limit the size of the buffer
+; to a certain size - you can use a maximum number of bytes instead of 'On', as
+; a value for this directive (e.g., output_buffering=4096).
+output_buffering = 4096
+
+; You can redirect all of the output of your scripts to a function.  For
+; example, if you set output_handler to "mb_output_handler", character
+; encoding will be transparently converted to the specified encoding.
+; Setting any output handler automatically turns on output buffering.
+; Note: People who wrote portable scripts should not depend on this ini
+;       directive. Instead, explicitly set the output handler using ob_start().
+;       Using this ini directive may cause problems unless you know what script 
+;       is doing.
+; Note: You cannot use both "mb_output_handler" with "ob_iconv_handler"
+;       and you cannot use both "ob_gzhandler" and "zlib.output_compression". 
+;output_handler =
+
+; Transparent output compression using the zlib library
+; Valid values for this option are 'off', 'on', or a specific buffer size
+; to be used for compression (default is 4KB)
+; Note: Resulting chunk size may vary due to nature of compression. PHP 
+;       outputs chunks that are few handreds bytes each as a result of compression. 
+;       If you want larger chunk size for better performence, enable output_buffering 
+;       also. 
+; Note: output_handler must be empty if this is set 'On' !!!!
+;       Instead you must use zlib.output_handler.
+zlib.output_compression = Off
+
+; You cannot specify additional output handlers if zlib.output_compression
+; is activated here. This setting does the same as output_handler but in
+; a different order.
+;zlib.output_handler =
+
+; Implicit flush tells PHP to tell the output layer to flush itself
+; automatically after every output block.  This is equivalent to calling the
+; PHP function flush() after each and every call to print() or echo() and each
+; and every HTML block.  Turning this option on has serious performance
+; implications and is generally recommended for debugging purposes only.
+implicit_flush = Off
+
+; The unserialize callback function will be called (with the undefined class'
+; name as parameter), if the unserializer finds an undefined class
+; which should be instanciated.
+; A warning appears if the specified function is not defined, or if the
+; function doesn't include/implement the missing class.
+; So only set this entry, if you really want to implement such a 
+; callback-function.
+unserialize_callback_func=
+
+; When floats & doubles are serialized store serialize_precision significant
+; digits after the floating point. The default value ensures that when floats
+; are decoded with unserialize, the data will remain the same.
+serialize_precision = 100
+
+; Whether to enable the ability to force arguments to be passed by reference
+; at function call time.  This method is deprecated and is likely to be
+; unsupported in future versions of PHP/Zend.  The encouraged method of
+; specifying which arguments should be passed by reference is in the function
+; declaration.  You're encouraged to try and turn this option Off and make
+; sure your scripts work properly with it in order to ensure they will work
+; with future versions of the language (you will receive a warning each time
+; you use this feature, and the argument will be passed by value instead of by
+; reference).
+allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off
+
+;
+; Safe Mode
+;
+safe_mode = Off
+
+; By default, Safe Mode does a UID compare check when
+; opening files. If you want to relax this to a GID compare,
+; then turn on safe_mode_gid.
+safe_mode_gid = Off
+
+; When safe_mode is on, UID/GID checks are bypassed when
+; including files from this directory and its subdirectories.
+; (directory must also be in include_path or full path must
+; be used when including)
+safe_mode_include_dir =								
+
+; When safe_mode is on, only executables located in the safe_mode_exec_dir
+; will be allowed to be executed via the exec family of functions.
+safe_mode_exec_dir =
+
+; Setting certain environment variables may be a potential security breach.
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of prefixes.  In Safe Mode,
+; the user may only alter environment variables whose names begin with the
+; prefixes supplied here.  By default, users will only be able to set
+; environment variables that begin with PHP_ (e.g. PHP_FOO=BAR).
+;
+; Note:  If this directive is empty, PHP will let the user modify ANY
+; environment variable!
+safe_mode_allowed_env_vars = PHP_
+
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of environment variables that
+; the end user won't be able to change using putenv().  These variables will be
+; protected even if safe_mode_allowed_env_vars is set to allow to change them.
+safe_mode_protected_env_vars = LD_LIBRARY_PATH
+
+; open_basedir, if set, limits all file operations to the defined directory
+; and below.  This directive makes most sense if used in a per-directory
+; or per-virtualhost web server configuration file. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+;open_basedir =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain functions for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of function names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_functions =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain classes for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of class names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_classes =
+
+; Colors for Syntax Highlighting mode.  Anything that's acceptable in
+; <font color="??????"> would work.
+;highlight.string  = #DD0000
+;highlight.comment = #FF9900
+;highlight.keyword = #007700
+;highlight.bg      = #FFFFFF
+;highlight.default = #0000BB
+;highlight.html    = #000000
+
+
+;
+; Misc
+;
+; Decides whether PHP may expose the fact that it is installed on the server
+; (e.g. by adding its signature to the Web server header).  It is no security
+; threat in any way, but it makes it possible to determine whether you use PHP
+; on your server or not.
+expose_php = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Resource Limits ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+max_execution_time = 30     ; Maximum execution time of each script, in seconds
+max_input_time = 60	; Maximum amount of time each script may spend parsing request data
+memory_limit = 8M      ; Maximum amount of memory a script may consume (8MB)
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Error handling and logging ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; error_reporting is a bit-field.  Or each number up to get desired error
+; reporting level
+; E_ALL             - All errors and warnings
+; E_ERROR           - fatal run-time errors
+; E_WARNING         - run-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_PARSE           - compile-time parse errors
+; E_NOTICE          - run-time notices (these are warnings which often result
+;                     from a bug in your code, but it's possible that it was
+;                     intentional (e.g., using an uninitialized variable and
+;                     relying on the fact it's automatically initialized to an
+;                     empty string)
+; E_CORE_ERROR      - fatal errors that occur during PHP's initial startup
+; E_CORE_WARNING    - warnings (non-fatal errors) that occur during PHP's
+;                     initial startup
+; E_COMPILE_ERROR   - fatal compile-time errors
+; E_COMPILE_WARNING - compile-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_USER_ERROR      - user-generated error message
+; E_USER_WARNING    - user-generated warning message
+; E_USER_NOTICE     - user-generated notice message
+;
+; Examples:
+;
+;   - Show all errors, except for notices
+;
+;error_reporting = E_ALL & ~E_NOTICE
+;
+;   - Show only errors
+;
+;error_reporting = E_COMPILE_ERROR|E_ERROR|E_CORE_ERROR
+;
+;   - Show all errors
+;
+error_reporting  =  E_ALL
+
+; Print out errors (as a part of the output).  For production web sites,
+; you're strongly encouraged to turn this feature off, and use error logging
+; instead (see below).  Keeping display_errors enabled on a production web site
+; may reveal security information to end users, such as file paths on your Web
+; server, your database schema or other information.
+display_errors = Off
+
+; Even when display_errors is on, errors that occur during PHP's startup
+; sequence are not displayed.  It's strongly recommended to keep
+; display_startup_errors off, except for when debugging.
+display_startup_errors = Off
+
+; Log errors into a log file (server-specific log, stderr, or error_log (below))
+; As stated above, you're strongly advised to use error logging in place of
+; error displaying on production web sites.
+log_errors = On
+
+; Set maximum length of log_errors. In error_log information about the source is
+; added. The default is 1024 and 0 allows to not apply any maximum length at all.
+log_errors_max_len = 1024
+
+; Do not log repeated messages. Repeated errors must occur in same file on same
+; line until ignore_repeated_source is set true.
+ignore_repeated_errors = Off
+
+; Ignore source of message when ignoring repeated messages. When this setting 
+; is On you will not log errors with repeated messages from different files or
+; sourcelines.
+ignore_repeated_source = Off
+
+; If this parameter is set to Off, then memory leaks will not be shown (on
+; stdout or in the log). This has only effect in a debug compile, and if 
+; error reporting includes E_WARNING in the allowed list
+report_memleaks = On
+
+; Store the last error/warning message in $php_errormsg (boolean).
+track_errors = Off
+
+; Disable the inclusion of HTML tags in error messages.
+;html_errors = Off
+
+; If html_errors is set On PHP produces clickable error messages that direct 
+; to a page describing the error or function causing the error in detail.
+; You can download a copy of the PHP manual from http://www.php.net/docs.php 
+; and change docref_root to the base URL of your local copy including the
+; leading '/'. You must also specify the file extension being used including 
+; the dot.
+;docref_root = "/phpmanual/"
+;docref_ext = .html
+  
+; String to output before an error message.
+;error_prepend_string = "<font color=ff0000>"
+
+; String to output after an error message.
+;error_append_string = "</font>"
+
+; Log errors to specified file.
+;error_log = filename
+
+; Log errors to syslog (Event Log on NT, not valid in Windows 95).
+;error_log = syslog
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Data Handling ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; Note - track_vars is ALWAYS enabled as of PHP 4.0.3
+
+; The separator used in PHP generated URLs to separate arguments.
+; Default is "&". 
+;arg_separator.output = "&amp;"
+
+; List of separator(s) used by PHP to parse input URLs into variables.
+; Default is "&". 
+; NOTE: Every character in this directive is considered as separator!
+;arg_separator.input = ";&"
+
+; This directive describes the order in which PHP registers GET, POST, Cookie,
+; Environment and Built-in variables (G, P, C, E & S respectively, often
+; referred to as EGPCS or GPC).  Registration is done from left to right, newer
+; values override older values.
+variables_order = "GPCS"
+
+; Whether or not to register the EGPCS variables as global variables.  You may
+; want to turn this off if you don't want to clutter your scripts' global scope
+; with user data.  This makes most sense when coupled with track_vars - in which
+; case you can access all of the GPC variables through the $HTTP_*_VARS[],
+; variables.
+;
+; You should do your best to write your scripts so that they do not require
+; register_globals to be on;  Using form variables as globals can easily lead
+; to possible security problems, if the code is not very well thought of.
+register_globals = Off
+
+; This directive tells PHP whether to declare the argv&argc variables (that
+; would contain the GET information).  If you don't use these variables, you
+; should turn it off for increased performance.
+register_argc_argv = Off
+
+; Maximum size of POST data that PHP will accept.
+post_max_size = 8M
+
+; This directive is deprecated.  Use variables_order instead.
+gpc_order = "GPC"
+
+; Magic quotes
+;
+
+; Magic quotes for incoming GET/POST/Cookie data.
+magic_quotes_gpc = Off
+
+; Magic quotes for runtime-generated data, e.g. data from SQL, from exec(), etc.
+magic_quotes_runtime = Off    
+
+; Use Sybase-style magic quotes (escape ' with '' instead of \').
+magic_quotes_sybase = Off
+
+; Automatically add files before or after any PHP document.
+auto_prepend_file =
+auto_append_file =
+
+; As of 4.0b4, PHP always outputs a character encoding by default in
+; the Content-type: header.  To disable sending of the charset, simply
+; set it to be empty.
+;
+; PHP's built-in default is text/html
+default_mimetype = "text/html"
+;default_charset = "iso-8859-1"
+
+; Always populate the $HTTP_RAW_POST_DATA variable.                               
+;always_populate_raw_post_data = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Paths and Directories ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; UNIX: "/path1:/path2"  
+;include_path = ".:/php/includes"
+;
+; Windows: "\path1;\path2"
+;include_path = ".;c:\php\includes"
+
+; The root of the PHP pages, used only if nonempty.
+; if PHP was not compiled with FORCE_REDIRECT, you SHOULD set doc_root
+; if you are running php as a CGI under any web server (other than IIS)
+; see documentation for security issues.  The alternate is to use the
+; cgi.force_redirect configuration below
+doc_root =
+
+; The directory under which PHP opens the script using /~usernamem used only
+; if nonempty.
+user_dir =
+
+; Directory in which the loadable extensions (modules) reside.
+; extension_dir = "./"
+extension_dir = "/usr/lib/php/extensions/"
+
+; Whether or not to enable the dl() function.  The dl() function does NOT work
+; properly in multithreaded servers, such as IIS or Zeus, and is automatically
+; disabled on them.
+enable_dl = On
+
+; cgi.force_redirect is necessary to provide security running PHP as a CGI under
+; most web servers.  Left undefined, PHP turns this on by default.  You can
+; turn it off here AT YOUR OWN RISK
+; **You CAN safely turn this off for IIS, in fact, you MUST.**
+; cgi.force_redirect = 1
+
+; if cgi.nph is enabled it will force cgi to always sent Status: 200 with
+; every request.
+; cgi.nph = 1
+
+; if cgi.force_redirect is turned on, and you are not running under Apache or Netscape 
+; (iPlanet) web servers, you MAY need to set an environment variable name that PHP
+; will look for to know it is OK to continue execution.  Setting this variable MAY
+; cause security issues, KNOW WHAT YOU ARE DOING FIRST.
+; cgi.redirect_status_env = ;
+
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo provides *real* PATH_INFO/PATH_TRANSLATED support for CGI.  PHP's
+; previous behaviour was to set PATH_TRANSLATED to SCRIPT_FILENAME, and to not grok
+; what PATH_INFO is.  For more information on PATH_INFO, see the cgi specs.  Setting
+; this to 1 will cause PHP CGI to fix it's paths to conform to the spec.  A setting
+; of zero causes PHP to behave as before.  Default is zero.  You should fix your scripts
+; to use SCRIPT_FILENAME rather than PATH_TRANSLATED.
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo=1
+
+; FastCGI under IIS (on WINNT based OS) supports the ability to impersonate
+; security tokens of the calling client.  This allows IIS to define the
+; security context that the request runs under.  mod_fastcgi under Apache
+; does not currently support this feature (03/17/2002)
+; Set to 1 if running under IIS.  Default is zero.
+; fastcgi.impersonate = 1;
+
+; Disable logging through FastCGI connection
+; fastcgi.log = 0
+
+; cgi.rfc2616_headers configuration option tells PHP what type of headers to
+; use when sending HTTP response code. If it's set 0 PHP sends Status: header that
+; is supported by Apache. When this option is set to 1 PHP will send
+; RFC2616 compliant header.
+; Default is zero.
+;cgi.rfc2616_headers = 0 
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; File Uploads ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow HTTP file uploads.
+file_uploads = On
+
+; Temporary directory for HTTP uploaded files (will use system default if not
+; specified).
+;upload_tmp_dir =
+
+; Maximum allowed size for uploaded files.
+upload_max_filesize = 10M
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Fopen wrappers ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow the treatment of URLs (like http:// or ftp://) as files.
+allow_url_fopen = On
+
+; Define the anonymous ftp password (your email address)
+;from="john@doe.com"
+
+; Define the user agent for php to send
+;user_agent="PHP"
+
+; Default timeout for socket based streams (seconds)
+default_socket_timeout = 60
+
+; If your scripts have to deal with files from Macintosh systems,
+; or you are running on a Mac and need to deal with files from
+; unix or win32 systems, setting this flag will cause PHP to
+; automatically detect the EOL character in those files so that
+; fgets() and file() will work regardless of the source of the file.
+; auto_detect_line_endings = Off
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Dynamic Extensions ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; If you wish to have an extension loaded automatically, use the following
+; syntax:
+;
+;   extension=modulename.extension
+;
+; For example, on Windows:
+;
+;   extension=msql.dll
+;
+; ... or under UNIX:
+;
+;   extension=msql.so
+;
+; Note that it should be the name of the module only; no directory information 
+; needs to go here.  Specify the location of the extension with the
+; extension_dir directive above.
+;
+; Load the MySQL module by default.  Comment this out if you don't use MySQL.
+extension=mysql.so
+
+; Load the gettext extension by default.  Comment this out if you don't have the
+; gettext shared library installed.
+extension=gettext.so
+
+;Windows Extensions
+;Note that MySQL and ODBC support is now built in, so no dll is needed for it.
+;
+;extension=php_mbstring.dll
+;extension=php_bz2.dll
+;extension=php_cpdf.dll
+;extension=php_crack.dll
+;extension=php_curl.dll
+;extension=php_db.dll
+;extension=php_dba.dll
+;extension=php_dbase.dll
+;extension=php_dbx.dll
+;extension=php_domxml.dll
+;extension=php_exif.dll
+;extension=php_fdf.dll
+;extension=php_filepro.dll
+;extension=php_gd2.dll
+;extension=php_gettext.dll
+;extension=php_hyperwave.dll
+;extension=php_iconv.dll
+;extension=php_ifx.dll
+;extension=php_iisfunc.dll
+;extension=php_imap.dll
+;extension=php_interbase.dll
+;extension=php_java.dll
+;extension=php_ldap.dll
+;extension=php_mcrypt.dll
+;extension=php_mhash.dll
+;extension=php_mime_magic.dll
+;extension=php_ming.dll
+;extension=php_mssql.dll
+;extension=php_msql.dll
+;extension=php_oci8.dll
+;extension=php_openssl.dll
+;extension=php_oracle.dll
+;extension=php_pdf.dll
+;extension=php_pgsql.dll
+;extension=php_printer.dll
+;extension=php_shmop.dll
+;extension=php_snmp.dll
+;extension=php_sockets.dll
+;extension=php_sybase_ct.dll
+;extension=php_w32api.dll
+;extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
+;extension=php_xslt.dll
+;extension=php_yaz.dll
+;extension=php_zip.dll
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Module Settings ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+[Syslog]
+; Whether or not to define the various syslog variables (e.g. $LOG_PID,
+; $LOG_CRON, etc.).  Turning it off is a good idea performance-wise.  In
+; runtime, you can define these variables by calling define_syslog_variables().
+define_syslog_variables  = Off
+
+[mail function]
+; For Win32 only.
+SMTP = localhost
+smtp_port = 25
+
+; For Win32 only.
+;sendmail_from = me@example.com
+
+; For Unix only.  You may supply arguments as well (default: "sendmail -t -i").
+;sendmail_path =
+
+[Java]
+;java.class.path = .\php_java.jar
+;java.home = c:\jdk
+;java.library = c:\jdk\jre\bin\hotspot\jvm.dll 
+;java.library.path = .\
+
+[SQL]
+sql.safe_mode = Off
+
+[ODBC]
+;odbc.default_db    =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_user  =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_pw    =  Not yet implemented
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+odbc.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Check that a connection is still valid before reuse.
+odbc.check_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_links = -1  
+
+; Handling of LONG fields.  Returns number of bytes to variables.  0 means
+; passthru.
+odbc.defaultlrl = 4096  
+
+; Handling of binary data.  0 means passthru, 1 return as is, 2 convert to char.
+; See the documentation on odbc_binmode and odbc_longreadlen for an explanation
+; of uodbc.defaultlrl and uodbc.defaultbinmode
+odbc.defaultbinmode = 1  
+
+[MySQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mysql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_links = -1
+
+; Default port number for mysql_connect().  If unset, mysql_connect() will use
+; the $MYSQL_TCP_PORT or the mysql-tcp entry in /etc/services or the
+; compile-time value defined MYSQL_PORT (in that order).  Win32 will only look
+; at MYSQL_PORT.
+mysql.default_port =
+
+; Default socket name for local MySQL connects.  If empty, uses the built-in
+; MySQL defaults.
+mysql.default_socket =
+
+; Default host for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_host =
+
+; Default user for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_user =
+
+; Default password for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+; Note that this is generally a *bad* idea to store passwords in this file.
+; *Any* user with PHP access can run 'echo get_cfg_var("mysql.default_password")
+; and reveal this password!  And of course, any users with read access to this
+; file will be able to reveal the password as well.
+mysql.default_password =
+
+; Maximum time (in seconds) for connect timeout. -1 means no limit
+mysql.connect_timeout = 60
+
+; Trace mode. When trace_mode is active (=On), warnings for table/index scans and
+; SQL-Errors will be displayed.
+mysql.trace_mode = Off
+
+[mSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+msql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_links = -1
+
+[PostgresSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+pgsql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Detect broken persistent links always with pg_pconnect(). 
+; Auto reset feature requires a little overheads.
+pgsql.auto_reset_persistent = Off
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_links = -1
+
+; Ignore PostgreSQL backends Notice message or not.
+; Notice message logging require a little overheads.
+pgsql.ignore_notice = 0
+
+; Log PostgreSQL backends Noitce message or not.
+; Unless pgsql.ignore_notice=0, module cannot log notice message.
+pgsql.log_notice = 0
+
+[Sybase]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybase.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_links = -1
+
+;sybase.interface_file = "/usr/sybase/interfaces"
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+sybase.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+sybase.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+; If on, this will cause PHP to automatically assign types to results according
+; to their Sybase type, instead of treating them all as strings.  This
+; compatibility mode will probably not stay around forever, so try applying
+; whatever necessary changes to your code, and turn it off.
+sybase.compatability_mode = Off
+
+[Sybase-CT]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybct.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum server message severity to display.
+sybct.min_server_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum client message severity to display.
+sybct.min_client_severity = 10
+
+[dbx]
+; returned column names can be converted for compatibility reasons
+; possible values for dbx.colnames_case are
+; "unchanged" (default, if not set)
+; "lowercase"
+; "uppercase"
+; the recommended default is either upper- or lowercase, but
+; unchanged is currently set for backwards compatibility
+dbx.colnames_case = "lowercase"
+
+[bcmath]
+; Number of decimal digits for all bcmath functions.
+bcmath.scale = 0
+
+[browscap]
+;browscap = extra/browscap.ini
+
+[Informix]
+; Default host for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_host =
+
+; Default user for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_user =
+
+; Default password for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_password =
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ifx.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_links = -1
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a text blob instead of its id.
+ifx.textasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a byte blob instead of its id.
+ifx.byteasvarchar = 0
+
+; Trailing blanks are stripped from fixed-length char columns.  May help the
+; life of Informix SE users.
+ifx.charasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, the contents of text and byte blobs are dumped to a file instead of
+; keeping them in memory.
+ifx.blobinfile = 0
+
+; NULL's are returned as empty strings, unless this is set to 1.  In that case,
+; NULL's are returned as string 'NULL'.
+ifx.nullformat = 0
+
+[Session]
+; Handler used to store/retrieve data.
+session.save_handler = files
+
+; Argument passed to save_handler.  In the case of files, this is the path
+; where data files are stored. Note: Windows users have to change this 
+; variable in order to use PHP's session functions.
+;session.save_path = /tmp
+
+; Whether to use cookies.
+session.use_cookies = 1
+
+; This option enables administrators to make their users invulnerable to 
+; attacks which involve passing session ids in URLs; defaults to 0.
+; session.use_only_cookies = 1
+
+; Name of the session (used as cookie name).
+session.name = PHPSESSID
+
+; Initialize session on request startup.
+session.auto_start = 0
+
+; Lifetime in seconds of cookie or, if 0, until browser is restarted.
+session.cookie_lifetime = 0
+
+; The path for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_path = /
+
+; The domain for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_domain =
+
+; Handler used to serialize data.  php is the standard serializer of PHP.
+session.serialize_handler = php
+
+; Define the probability that the 'garbage collection' process is started
+; on every session initialization.
+; The probability is calculated by using gc_probability/gc_divisor,
+; e.g. 1/100 means there is a 1% chance that the GC process starts
+; on each request.
+
+session.gc_probability = 1
+session.gc_divisor     = 1000
+
+; After this number of seconds, stored data will be seen as 'garbage' and
+; cleaned up by the garbage collection process.
+session.gc_maxlifetime = 1440
+
+; PHP 4.2 and less have an undocumented feature/bug that allows you to
+; to initialize a session variable in the global scope, albeit register_globals
+; is disabled.  PHP 4.3 and later will warn you, if this feature is used.
+; You can disable the feature and the warning separately. At this time,
+; the warning is only displayed, if bug_compat_42 is enabled.
+
+session.bug_compat_42 = 0
+session.bug_compat_warn = 1
+
+; Check HTTP Referer to invalidate externally stored URLs containing ids.
+; HTTP_REFERER has to contain this substring for the session to be
+; considered as valid.
+session.referer_check =
+
+; How many bytes to read from the file.
+session.entropy_length = 0
+
+; Specified here to create the session id.
+session.entropy_file =
+
+;session.entropy_length = 16
+
+;session.entropy_file = /dev/urandom
+
+; Set to {nocache,private,public,} to determine HTTP caching aspects.
+; or leave this empty to avoid sending anti-caching headers.
+session.cache_limiter = nocache
+
+; Document expires after n minutes.
+session.cache_expire = 180
+
+; trans sid support is disabled by default.
+; Use of trans sid may risk your users security.
+; Use this option with caution.
+; - User may send URL contains active session ID
+;   to other person via. email/irc/etc.
+; - URL that contains active session ID may be stored
+;   in publically accessible computer. 
+; - User may access your site with the same session ID
+;   always using URL stored in browser's history or bookmarks.
+session.use_trans_sid = 0
+
+; The URL rewriter will look for URLs in a defined set of HTML tags.
+; form/fieldset are special; if you include them here, the rewriter will
+; add a hidden <input> field with the info which is otherwise appended
+; to URLs.  If you want XHTML conformity, remove the form entry.
+; Note that all valid entries require a "=", even if no value follows.
+url_rewriter.tags = "a=href,area=href,frame=src,input=src,form=fakeentry"
+
+[MSSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mssql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+mssql.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+mssql.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+mssql.compatability_mode = Off
+
+; Connect timeout
+;mssql.connect_timeout = 5
+
+; Query timeout
+;mssql.timeout = 60
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textlimit = 4096
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textsize = 4096
+
+; Limits the number of records in each batch.  0 = all records in one batch.
+;mssql.batchsize = 0
+
+; Specify how datetime and datetim4 columns are returned
+; On => Returns data converted to SQL server settings
+; Off => Returns values as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss
+;mssql.datetimeconvert = On
+
+; Use NT authentication when connecting to the server
+mssql.secure_connection = Off
+
+; Specify max number of processes. Default = 25
+;mssql.max_procs = 25
+
+[Assertion]
+; Assert(expr); active by default.
+;assert.active = On
+
+; Issue a PHP warning for each failed assertion.
+;assert.warning = On
+
+; Don't bail out by default.
+;assert.bail = Off
+
+; User-function to be called if an assertion fails.
+;assert.callback = 0
+
+; Eval the expression with current error_reporting().  Set to true if you want
+; error_reporting(0) around the eval().
+;assert.quiet_eval = 0
+
+[Ingres II]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ingres.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links, including persistents.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_links = -1
+
+; Default database (format: [node_id::]dbname[/srv_class]).
+ingres.default_database =
+
+; Default user.
+ingres.default_user =
+
+; Default password.
+ingres.default_password =
+
+[Verisign Payflow Pro]
+; Default Payflow Pro server.
+pfpro.defaulthost = "test-payflow.verisign.com"
+
+; Default port to connect to.
+pfpro.defaultport = 443
+
+; Default timeout in seconds.
+pfpro.defaulttimeout = 30
+
+; Default proxy IP address (if required).
+;pfpro.proxyaddress =
+
+; Default proxy port.
+;pfpro.proxyport =
+
+; Default proxy logon.
+;pfpro.proxylogon =
+
+; Default proxy password.
+;pfpro.proxypassword =
+
+[com]
+; path to a file containing GUIDs, IIDs or filenames of files with TypeLibs
+;com.typelib_file = 
+; allow Distributed-COM calls
+;com.allow_dcom = true
+; autoregister constants of a components typlib on com_load()
+;com.autoregister_typelib = true
+; register constants casesensitive
+;com.autoregister_casesensitive = false
+; show warnings on duplicate constat registrations
+;com.autoregister_verbose = true
+
+[Printer]
+;printer.default_printer = ""
+
+[mbstring]
+; language for internal character representation.
+;mbstring.language = Japanese
+
+; internal/script encoding.
+; Some encoding cannot work as internal encoding.
+; (e.g. SJIS, BIG5, ISO-2022-*)
+;mbstring.internal_encoding = EUC-JP
+
+; http input encoding.
+;mbstring.http_input = auto
+
+; http output encoding. mb_output_handler must be
+; registered as output buffer to function
+;mbstring.http_output = SJIS
+
+; enable automatic encoding translation accoding to 
+; mbstring.internal_encoding setting. Input chars are
+; converted to internal encoding by setting this to On.
+; Note: Do _not_ use automatic encoding translation for
+;       portable libs/applications.
+;mbstring.encoding_translation = Off
+
+; automatic encoding detection order.
+; auto means 
+;mbstring.detect_order = auto
+
+; substitute_character used when character cannot be converted
+; one from another
+;mbstring.substitute_character = none;
+
+; overload(replace) single byte functions by mbstring functions.
+; mail(), ereg(), etc are overloaded by mb_send_mail(), mb_ereg(),
+; etc. Possible values are 0,1,2,4 or combination of them.
+; For example, 7 for overload everything.
+; 0: No overload
+; 1: Overload mail() function
+; 2: Overload str*() functions
+; 4: Overload ereg*() functions
+;mbstring.func_overload = 0
+
+[FrontBase]
+;fbsql.allow_persistent = On
+;fbsql.autocommit = On
+;fbsql.default_database = 
+;fbsql.default_database_password =
+;fbsql.default_host =
+;fbsql.default_password =
+;fbsql.default_user = "_SYSTEM"
+;fbsql.generate_warnings = Off
+;fbsql.max_connections = 128
+;fbsql.max_links = 128
+;fbsql.max_persistent = -1
+;fbsql.max_results = 128
+;fbsql.batchSize = 1000
+
+[Crack]
+; Modify the setting below to match the directory location of the cracklib
+; dictionary files.  Include the base filename, but not the file extension.
+; crack.default_dictionary = "c:\php\lib\cracklib_dict"
+
+[exif]
+; Exif UNICODE user comments are handled as UCS-2BE/UCS-2LE and JIS as JIS. 
+; With mbstring support this will automatically be converted into the encoding
+; given by corresponding encode setting. When empty mbstring.internal_encoding 
+; is used. For the decode settings you can distinguish between motorola and 
+; intel byte order. A decode setting cannot be empty.
+;exif.encode_unicode = ISO-8859-15
+;exif.decode_unicode_motorola = UCS-2BE
+;exif.decode_unicode_intel    = UCS-2LE
+;exif.encode_jis = 
+;exif.decode_jis_motorola = JIS
+;exif.decode_jis_intel    = JIS
+
+; Local Variables:
+; tab-width: 4
+; End:
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/vhosts b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/vhosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/hosts b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/hosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e33147
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/hosts
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#
+# hosts		This file describes a number of hostname-to-address
+#		mappings for the TCP/IP subsystem.  It is mostly
+#		used at boot time, when no name servers are running.
+#		On small systems, this file can be used instead of a
+#		"named" name server.  Just add the names, addresses
+#		and any aliases to this file...
+#
+# By the way, Arnt Gulbrandsen <agulbra@nvg.unit.no> says that 127.0.0.1
+# should NEVER be named with the name of the machine.  It causes problems
+# for some (stupid) programs, irc and reputedly talk. :^)
+#
+
+# For loopbacking.
+127.0.0.1	localhost
+# This next entry is technically wrong, but good enough to get TCP/IP apps
+# to quit complaining that they can't verify the hostname on a loopback-only
+# Linux box.
+127.0.0.1	darkstar.example.net darkstar
+
+# End of hosts.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f31fbe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+/var/log/apache/access_log /var/log/apache/error_log {
+    monthly
+    nomail
+    compress
+    create 0664 root root
+    rotate 12
+    postrotate
+      /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd restart > /dev/null
+    endscript
+}
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/profile b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/profile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..563594a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/profile
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+# /etc/profile: This file contains system-wide defaults used by
+# all Bourne (and related) shells.
+
+# Set the values for some environment variables:
+export MINICOM="-c on"
+export MANPATH=/usr/local/man:/usr/man:/usr/X11R6/man
+export HOSTNAME="`cat /etc/HOSTNAME`"
+export LESSOPEN="|lesspipe.sh %s"
+export LESS="-M"
+
+# If the user doesn't have a .inputrc, use the one in /etc.
+if [ ! -r "$HOME/.inputrc" ]; then
+  export INPUTRC=/etc/inputrc
+fi
+
+# Set the default system $PATH:
+PATH="/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin:/usr/X11R6/bin:/usr/games"
+
+# For root users, ensure that /usr/local/sbin, /usr/sbin, and /sbin are in
+# the $PATH.  Some means of connection don't add these by default (sshd comes
+# to mind).
+if [ "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+  echo $PATH | grep /usr/local/sbin 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+  if [ ! $? = 0 ]; then
+    PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:$PATH
+  fi
+fi
+
+# I had problems using 'eval tset' instead of 'TERM=', but you might want to 
+# try it anyway. I think with the right /etc/termcap it would work great.
+# eval `tset -sQ "$TERM"`
+if [ "$TERM" = "" -o "$TERM" = "unknown" ]; then
+ TERM=linux
+fi
+
+# Set ksh93 visual editing mode:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+  VISUAL=emacs
+#  VISUAL=gmacs
+#  VISUAL=vi
+fi
+
+# Set a default shell prompt:
+#PS1='`hostname`:`pwd`# '
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/pdksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! $ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! ${PWD/#$HOME/~}$ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ PS1='%n@%m:%~%# '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ PS1='$ '
+else
+ PS1='\u@\h:\w\$ '
+fi
+PS2='> '
+export PATH DISPLAY LESS TERM PS1 PS2
+
+# Default umask.  A umask of 022 prevents new files from being created group
+# and world writable.
+umask 022
+
+# Set up the LS_COLORS and LS_OPTIONS environment variables for color ls:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -z`
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -s`
+else
+ eval `dircolors -b`
+fi
+
+# Append any additional sh scripts found in /etc/profile.d/:
+for profile_script in /etc/profile.d/*.sh ; do
+  if [ -x $profile_script ]; then
+    . $profile_script
+  fi
+done
+unset profile_script
+
+# For non-root users, add the current directory to the search path:
+if [ ! "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+ PATH="$PATH:."
+fi
+
+# firewall:
+export FTP_PASSIVE=1
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..eefbcc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+
+if [ "$1" == "3" ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.M
+elif [ "$1" == "6" ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.6
+else
+  echo "Invalid level."
+  exit 1
+fi
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b972052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links:  /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes:  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..00a1501
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.K 		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		1, which is the administrative state. It kills all
+#		daemons and then puts the system into single user mode.
+#		Note that the file systems are kept mounted.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.K	3.1415 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/sbin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off quota:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaoff ]; then
+    echo "Turning off filesystem quotas."
+    /sbin/quotaoff -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down PCMCIA devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia stop
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  sleep 5
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGHUP signal."
+killall5 -1
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to hang up"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGTERM signal."
+killall5 -15
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to terminate"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGKILL signal."
+killall5 -9
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to exit"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+
+# Now go to the single user level
+echo "Going to single user mode..."
+telinit -t 1 1
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..0cb3343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links: /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes: /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..05c75b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.S:  System initialization script.
+#
+# Mostly written by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+PATH=/sbin:/usr/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# Mount /proc right away:
+/sbin/mount -v proc /proc -n -t proc
+
+# If 'nohotplug' was given at boot, or rc.hotplug has been turned off
+# (is not executable), then shut off hotplugging in the kernel now.
+# Turning off hotplug is *not* recommended, and will break some things.
+if [ -w /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug ]; then
+  if grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  elif [ ! -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug ]; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start devfsd if necessary.  On newer kernels, udev should be used instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd start
+fi
+
+# Mount sysfs next, if the kernel supports it:
+if [ -d /sys ]; then
+  if cat /proc/filesystems | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    if ! cat /proc/mounts | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+      /sbin/mount -v sysfs /sys -n -t sysfs
+    fi
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize udev to manage /dev entries for 2.6.x kernels:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.udev ]; then
+  if ! grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    /etc/rc.d/rc.udev
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Enable swapping:
+/sbin/swapon -a
+
+# Test to see if the root partition is read-only, like it ought to be.
+READWRITE=no
+if touch /fsrwtestfile 2>/dev/null; then
+  rm -f /fsrwtestfile
+  READWRITE=yes
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-only filesystem"
+fi
+
+# See if a forced filesystem check was requested at shutdown:
+if [ -r /etc/forcefsck ]; then
+  FORCEFSCK="-f"
+fi
+
+# Check the root filesystem:
+if [ ! $READWRITE = yes ]; then
+  RETVAL=0
+  if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+    echo "Checking root filesystem:"
+    /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -a /
+    RETVAL=$?
+  fi
+  # An error code of 2 or higher will require a reboot.
+  if [ $RETVAL -ge 2 ]; then
+    # An error code equal to or greater than 4 means that some errors
+    # could not be corrected.  This requires manual attention, so we
+    # offer a chance to try to fix the problem in single-user mode:
+    if [ $RETVAL -ge 4 ]; then
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo "*** An error occurred during the root filesystem check. ***"
+      echo "*** You will now be given a chance to log into the      ***"
+      echo "*** system in single-user mode to fix the problem.      ***"
+      echo "***                                                     ***"
+      echo "*** If you are using the ext2 filesystem, running       ***"
+      echo "*** 'e2fsck -v -y <partition>' might help.              ***"
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo
+      echo "Once you exit the single-user shell, the system will reboot."
+      echo
+      PS1="(Repair filesystem) \#"; export PS1
+      sulogin
+    else # With an error code of 2 or 3, reboot the machine automatically:
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo "*** The filesystem was changed. ***"
+      echo "*** The system will now reboot. ***"
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo
+    fi
+    echo "Unmounting file systems."
+    /sbin/umount -a -r
+    /sbin/mount -n -o remount,ro /
+    echo "Rebooting system."
+    sleep 2
+    reboot -f
+  fi
+  # Remount the root filesystem in read-write mode
+  echo "Remounting root device with read-write enabled."
+  /sbin/mount -w -v -n -o remount /
+  if [ $? -gt 0 ] ; then
+    echo
+    echo "Attempt to remount root device as read-write failed!  This is going to"
+    echo "cause serious problems."
+    echo 
+    echo "If you're using the UMSDOS filesystem, you **MUST** mount the root partition"
+    echo "read-write!  You can make sure the root filesystem is getting mounted "
+    echo "read-write with the 'rw' flag to Loadlin:"
+    echo
+    echo "loadlin vmlinuz root=/dev/hda1 rw   (replace /dev/hda1 with your root device)"
+    echo
+    echo "Normal bootdisks can be made to mount a system read-write with the rdev command:"
+    echo
+    echo "rdev -R /dev/fd0 0"
+    echo
+    echo "You can also get into your system by using a boot disk with a command like this"
+    echo "on the LILO prompt line:  (change the root partition name as needed)"
+    echo 
+    echo "LILO: mount root=/dev/hda1 rw"
+    echo
+    echo "Please press ENTER to continue, then reboot and use one of the above methods to"
+    echo -n "get into your machine and start looking for the problem. " 
+    read junk; 
+  fi
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-write filesystem"
+  if cat /etc/fstab | grep ' / ' | grep umsdos 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    ROOTTYPE="umsdos"
+  fi
+  if [ ! "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # no warn for UMSDOS
+    echo
+    echo "*** ERROR: Root partition has already been mounted read-write. Cannot check!"
+    echo
+    echo "For filesystem checking to work properly, your system must initially mount"
+    echo "the root partition as read only. Please modify your kernel with 'rdev' so that"
+    echo "it does this. If you're booting with LILO, add a line:"
+    echo
+    echo "   read-only"
+    echo
+    echo "to the Linux section in your /etc/lilo.conf and type 'lilo' to reinstall it."
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a kernel on a floppy disk, put it in the drive and type:"
+    echo "   rdev -R /dev/fd0 1"
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a bootdisk, or with Loadlin, you can add the 'ro' flag."
+    echo
+    echo "This will fix the problem *AND* eliminate this annoying message. :^)"
+    echo
+    echo -n "Press ENTER to continue. "
+    read junk;
+  fi
+fi # Done checking root filesystem
+
+# Any /etc/mtab that exists here is old, so we delete it to start over:
+/bin/rm -f /etc/mtab*
+# Remounting the / partition will initialize the new /etc/mtab:
+/sbin/mount -w -o remount /
+
+# Fix /etc/mtab to list sys and proc if they were not yet entered in
+# /etc/mtab because / was still mounted read-only:
+if [ -d /proc/sys ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f proc /proc -t proc
+fi
+if [ -d /sys/bus ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f sysfs /sys -t sysfs
+fi
+
+# Set the system time from the hardware clock using hwclock --hctosys.
+if [ -x /sbin/hwclock ]; then
+  if grep "^UTC" /etc/hardwareclock 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (UTC)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --utc --hctosys
+  else
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (localtime)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --localtime --hctosys
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Configure ISA Plug-and-Play devices:
+if [ -r /etc/isapnp.conf ]; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/isapnp ]; then
+    /sbin/isapnp /etc/isapnp.conf
+  fi
+fi
+
+# This loads any kernel modules that are needed.  These might be required to
+# use your ethernet card, sound card, or other optional hardware.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.modules -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.modules
+fi
+
+# Configure runtime kernel parameters:
+if [ -x /sbin/sysctl -a -r /etc/sysctl.conf ]; then
+  /sbin/sysctl -e -p /etc/sysctl.conf
+fi
+
+# Initialize the Logical Volume Manager.
+# This won't start unless we find /etc/lvmtab (LVM1) or 
+# /etc/lvm/backup/ (LVM2).  This is created by /sbin/vgscan, so to
+# use LVM you must run /sbin/vgscan yourself the first time (and
+# create some VGs and LVs).
+if [ -r /etc/lvmtab -o -d /etc/lvm/backup ]; then
+  echo "Initializing LVM (Logical Volume Manager):"
+  # Check for device-mapper support.
+  if ! cat /proc/devices | grep -w device-mapper 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    # If device-mapper exists as a module, try to load it.
+    if [ -r /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko ]; then
+      insmod /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko
+    fi
+  fi
+  # Scan for new volume groups:
+  /sbin/vgscan 2> /dev/null
+  if [ $? = 0 ]; then
+    # This needs a moment to register.
+    sleep 10
+    # Make volume groups available to the kernel.
+    # This should also make logical volumes available.
+    /sbin/vgchange -ay
+    # Enable swapping again in case any LVs are used for swap.  Ignore previous error.  :-)
+    /sbin/swapon -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Check all the non-root filesystems:
+if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+  echo "Checking non-root filesystems:"
+  /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -R -A -a
+fi
+
+# mount non-root file systems in fstab (but not NFS or SMB 
+# because TCP/IP is not yet configured, and not proc because
+# that has already been mounted):
+/sbin/mount -a -v -t nonfs,nosmbfs,noproc
+
+# Clean up some temporary files:
+( cd /var/log/setup/tmp && rm -rf * )
+/bin/rm -f /var/run/utmp /var/run/*pid /etc/nologin /var/run/lpd* \
+  /var/run/ppp* /etc/dhcpc/*.pid /etc/forcefsck /etc/fastboot
+
+# Attempt to umount and remove any leftover /initrd:
+if [ -d /initrd ]; then
+  /sbin/umount /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  rmdir /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0 2> /dev/null
+fi
+
+# Create a fresh utmp file:
+touch /var/run/utmp
+chown root.utmp /var/run/utmp
+chmod 664 /var/run/utmp
+
+if [ "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # we need to update any files added in DOS:
+  echo "Synchronizing UMSDOS directory structure:"
+  echo "  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /"
+  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /
+fi
+
+# Setup the /etc/motd to reflect the current kernel level:
+# THIS WIPES ANY CHANGES YOU MAKE TO /ETC/MOTD WITH EACH BOOT.
+# COMMENT THIS OUT IF YOU WANT TO MAKE A CUSTOM VERSION.
+echo "$(/bin/uname -sr)." > /etc/motd
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Run serial port setup script:
+# (CAREFUL! This can make some systems hang if the rc.serial script isn't
+# set up correctly. If this happens, you may have to edit the file from a
+# boot disk)
+#
+# . /etc/rc.d/rc.serial
+
+# Carry an entropy pool between reboots to improve randomness.
+if [ -f /etc/random-seed ]; then
+  echo "Using /etc/random-seed to initialize /dev/urandom."
+  cat /etc/random-seed > /dev/urandom
+fi
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00b8837
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+# Start/stop/restart the Apache web server.
+#
+# To make Apache start automatically at boot, make this
+# file executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+
+case "$1" in
+   'start')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl start ;;
+   'stop')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl stop ;;
+   'restart')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl restart ;;
+   *)
+      echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart" ;;
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..db56589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.inet2	This shell script boots up the entire network system.
+#		Note, that when this script is used to also fire
+#		up any important remote NFS disks (like the /usr
+#		directory), care must be taken to actually
+#		have all the needed binaries online _now_ ...
+#
+#               Uncomment or comment out sections depending on which
+#               services your site requires.
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified for Slackware by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+
+
+# At this point, we are ready to talk to The World...
+
+
+# Mount remote (NFS) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w nfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  # Start the RPC portmapper if we find NFS volumes defined in /etc/fstab,
+  # since it will need to be running in order to mount them.  If portmap
+  # is not running, attempting to mount an NFS partition will cause mount
+  # to hang.  Keep this in mind if you plan to mount unlisted partitions...
+  if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+  else
+    # Warn about a possible NFS problem.  It's also possible to mount NFS partitions
+    # without rpc.portmap by using '-o nolock' (not a good idea in most cases).
+    echo "WARNING:  NFS partitions found in /etc/fstab, but /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is"
+    echo "          not executable.  If you do not run portmap, NFS partitions will"
+    echo "          not mount properly.  To start rpc.portmap at boot, change the"
+    echo "          permissions on /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap"
+    sleep 10
+  fi
+  echo "Mounting remote (NFS) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs      	 # This may be our /usr runtime!
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t nfs
+fi
+
+# Load the RPC portmapper if /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# This might be needed to mount NFS partitions that are not listed in /etc/fstab.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+fi
+
+# Mount remote (SMB) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w smbfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  echo "Mounting remote (SMB) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t smbfs
+fi
+
+# Start the system logger if it is not already running (maybe because /usr
+# is on a network partition).
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -d /var/log -a ! -r /var/run/syslogd.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# If there is a firewall script, run it before enabling packet forwarding.
+# See the HOWTOs on http://www.netfilter.org/ for documentation on
+# setting up a firewall or NAT on Linux.  In some cases this might need to
+# be moved past the section below dealing with IP packet forwarding.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall start
+fi
+
+# Turn on IPv4 packet forwarding support.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward start
+fi
+
+# Start the inetd server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd start
+fi
+
+# Start the OpenSSH SSH daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd ]; then
+  echo "Starting OpenSSH SSH daemon: /usr/sbin/sshd"
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd start
+fi
+
+# Start the BIND name server daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.bind ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.bind start
+fi
+
+# Start NIS (the Network Information Service):
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.yp ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.yp start
+fi
+
+# Start the NFS server.   Note that for this to work correctly, you'll
+# need to load the knfsd module for kernel NFS server support.
+# You'll also need to set up some shares in /etc/exports, and be sure
+# that /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# Starting the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd start
+fi
+
+# Stuff you won't need follows.  ;-)
+
+# # Start the network routing daemon:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/routed ]; then
+#   echo "Starting network routing daemon:  /usr/sbin/routed"
+#   /usr/sbin/routed -g -s
+# fi
+
+# # Start the system status server:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/rwhod ]; then
+#   echo "Starting system status server:  /usr/sbin/rwhod"
+#   /usr/sbin/rwhod
+# fi
+
+#  # Fire up the PC-NFS daemon(s).  This is a primarily obsolete system, and may
+#  # not be very secure.  It's not at all needed for normal NFS server support.
+#  # You probably should not run this.
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd ]; then
+#    echo "Starting PC-NFS daemons:  /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd"
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd ]; then
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fe1419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart inetd, the BSD Internet super-daemon.
+
+# Start inetd:
+inetd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/inetd ]; then
+    echo "Starting Internet super-server daemon:  /usr/sbin/inetd"
+    /usr/sbin/inetd
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop inetd:
+inetd_stop() {
+  killall inetd
+}
+
+# Restart inetd:
+inetd_restart() {
+  inetd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  inetd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  inetd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  inetd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  inetd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52bd2fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward:  start/stop IP packet forwarding
+#
+# If you intend to run your Linux box as a router, i.e. as a
+# computer that forwards and redistributes network packets, you
+# will need to enable IP packet forwarding in your kernel.
+#
+# To activate IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+#
+# To disable IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script non-executable:  chmod 644 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+
+# Start IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_start() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Activating IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+  # When using IPv4 packet forwarding, you will also get the
+  # rp_filter, which automatically rejects incoming packets if the
+  # routing table entry for their source address doesn't match the
+  # network interface they're arriving on.  This has security
+  # advantages because it prevents the so-called IP spoofing,
+  # however it can pose problems if you use asymmetric routing
+  # (packets from you to a host take a different path than packets
+  # from that host to you) or if you operate a non-routing host
+  # which has several IP addresses on different interfaces.  To
+  # turn rp_filter off, uncomment the lines below:
+  #if [ -r /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter ]; then
+  #  echo "Disabling rp_filter."
+  #  echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter
+  #fi
+}
+
+# Stop IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_stop() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Disabling IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_restart() {
+  ip_forward_stop
+  sleep 1
+  ip_forward_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  ip_forward_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  ip_forward_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  ip_forward_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..3cf2076
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.local:  Local system initialization script.
+#
+# Put any local setup commands in here:
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..239e2e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart mysqld.
+#
+# Copyright 2003 Patrick J. Volkerding, Concord, CA
+# Copyright 2003 Slackware Linux, Inc., Concord, CA
+#
+# This program comes with NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law.
+# You may redistribute copies of this program under the terms of the
+# GNU General Public License.
+
+# To start MySQL automatically at boot, be sure this script is executable:
+# chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
+
+# Before you can run MySQL, you must have a database.  To install an initial
+# database, do this as root:
+#
+#   su - mysql
+#   mysql_install_db
+#
+# Note that step one is becoming the mysql user.  It's important to do this
+# before making any changes to the database, or mysqld won't be able to write
+# to it later (this can be fixed with 'chown -R mysql.mysql /var/lib/mysql').
+
+# To disallow outside connections to the database (if you don't need them, this
+# is recommended to increase security), uncomment the next line:
+#SKIP="--skip-networking"
+
+# Start mysqld:
+mysqld_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/bin/mysqld_safe ]; then
+    # If there is an old PID file (no mysqld running), clean it up:
+    if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+      if ! ps ax | grep mysqld 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+        echo "Cleaning up old /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid."
+        rm -f /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid
+      fi
+    fi
+    /usr/bin/mysqld_safe --datadir=/var/lib/mysql --pid-file=/var/run/mysql/mysql.pid $SKIP &
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop mysqld:
+mysqld_stop() {
+  # If there is no PID file, ignore this request...
+  if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+    killall mysqld
+    # Wait at least one minute for it to exit, as we don't know how big the DB is...
+    for second in 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 \
+      0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 60 ; do
+      if [ ! -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+        break;
+      fi
+      sleep 1
+    done
+    if [ "$second" = "60" ]; then
+      echo "WARNING:  Gave up waiting for mysqld to exit!"
+      sleep 15
+    fi
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart mysqld:
+mysqld_restart() {
+  mysqld_stop
+  mysqld_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  mysqld_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  mysqld_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  mysqld_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc32367
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+## Slackware init script for postfix
+##   20030828 Manolis Tzanidakis
+#
+
+postfix_start() {
+        if [ -x /usr/sbin/postfix ]; then
+                echo -n "Starting postfix MTA:  "
+                echo "/usr/sbin/postfix start"
+                /usr/sbin/postfix start 2>/dev/null
+        fi
+}
+
+postfix_stop() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix stop 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+postfix_restart() {
+        sh $0 stop
+	sleep 1
+        sh $0 start
+}
+
+postfix_reload() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix reload 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+        'start')
+                postfix_start
+                ;;
+        'stop')
+                postfix_stop
+                ;;
+        'restart')
+                postfix_restart
+                ;;
+        'reload')
+                postfix_reload
+                ;;
+        *)
+                echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart|reload"
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a31c52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart sendmail.
+
+# Start sendmail:
+sendmail_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/sendmail ]; then
+    echo "Starting sendmail MTA daemon: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m
+    echo "Starting sendmail MSP queue runner: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop sendmail:
+sendmail_stop() {
+  killall sendmail
+}
+
+# Restart sendmail:
+sendmail_restart() {
+  sendmail_stop
+  sleep 1
+  sendmail_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sendmail_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sendmail_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sendmail_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..5f31c01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+#
+# /etc/rc.serial 
+#	Initializes the serial ports on your system
+#
+# chkconfig: 2345 50 75
+# description: This initializes the settings of the serial port
+#
+# FILE_VERSION: 19981128
+#
+# Distributed with setserial and the serial driver.  We need to use the
+# FILE_VERSION field to assure that we don't overwrite a newer rc.serial 
+# file with a newer one.
+# 
+# XXXX For now, the autosave feature doesn't work if you are
+# using the multiport feature; it doesn't save the multiport configuration
+# (for now).  Autosave also doesn't work for the hayes devices.  
+#
+
+RCLOCKFILE=/var/lock/subsys/serial
+DIRS="/lib/modules/`uname -r`/misc /lib/modules /usr/lib/modules ."
+PATH=/bin:/sbin:/usr/bin
+DRIVER=serial
+DRIVER_NAME=serial
+MODULE_REGEXP="serial\b"
+
+ALLDEVS="/dev/ttyS?"
+if /bin/ls /dev/ttyS?? >& /dev/null ; then
+	ALLDEVS="$ALLDEVS /dev/ttyS??"
+fi
+
+SETSERIAL=""
+if test -x /bin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/bin/setserial
+elif test -x /sbin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/sbin/setserial
+fi
+
+#
+# See if the serial driver is loaded
+#
+LOADED=""
+if test -f /proc/devices; then
+	if grep -q " ttyS$" /proc/devices ; then
+		LOADED="yes"
+	else
+		LOADED="no"
+	fi
+fi
+
+#
+# Find the serial driver
+#
+for i in $DIRS
+do
+	if test -z "$MODULE" -a -f $i/$DRIVER.o ; then
+		MODULE=$i/$DRIVER.o
+	fi
+done
+
+if ! test -f /proc/modules ; then
+	MODULE=""
+fi
+
+#
+# Handle System V init conventions...
+#
+case $1 in
+start)
+	action="start";
+	;;
+stop)
+	action="stop";
+	;;
+*)
+	action="start";
+esac
+
+if test $action  = stop ; then
+	if test -n ${SETSERIAL} -a "$LOADED" != "no" -a \
+           `head -1 /etc/serial.conf`X = "###AUTOSAVE###X" ; then
+		echo -n "Saving state of serial devices... "
+		grep "^#" /etc/serial.conf > /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		${SETSERIAL} -G -g ${ALLDEVS} >> /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		mv /etc/serial.conf /etc/.serial.conf.old
+		mv /etc/.serial.conf.new /etc/serial.conf
+		echo "done."
+	fi
+	if test -n "$MODULE" ; then
+		module=`grep $MODULE_REGEXP /proc/modules | awk '{print $1}'`
+		if test -z "$module" ; then 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver is not loaded."
+			rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+			exit 0
+		fi
+		if rmmod $module ; then :; else 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver could NOT be unloaded."
+			exit 1;
+		fi
+		echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver has been unloaded."
+	fi
+	rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+	exit 0
+fi
+
+#
+# If not stop, it must be a start....
+#
+
+if test -n "$MODULE" -a "$LOADED" != "yes" ; then 
+	if insmod -f $MODULE $DRIVER_ARG ; then
+          true
+	else
+		echo "Couldn't load $DRIVER_NAME driver."
+		exit 1
+	fi
+fi
+
+if test -f /etc/serial.conf ; then
+        if test -n ${SETSERIAL} ; then
+		grep -v ^# < /etc/serial.conf | while read device args
+		do
+                    if [ ! "$device" = "" -a ! "$args" = "" ]; then
+                        ${SETSERIAL} -z $device $args
+                    fi
+		done 
+	fi
+else
+	echo "###AUTOSAVE###" > /etc/serial.conf
+fi
+
+touch ${RCLOCKFILE}
+${SETSERIAL} -bg ${ALLDEVS}
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a3707e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the secure shell server:
+
+sshd_start() {
+  # Create host keys if needed.
+  if [ ! -r /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa1 -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key -N '' 
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t dsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  /usr/sbin/sshd
+}
+
+sshd_stop() {
+  killall sshd
+}
+
+sshd_restart() {
+  if [ -r /var/run/sshd.pid ]; then
+    echo "WARNING: killing listener process only.  To kill every sshd process, you must"
+    echo "         use 'rc.sshd stop'.  'rc.sshd restart' kills only the parent sshd to"
+    echo "         allow an admin logged in through sshd to use 'rc.sshd restart' without"
+    echo "         being cut off.  If sshd has been upgraded, new connections will now"
+    echo "         use the new version, which should be a safe enough approach."
+    kill `cat /var/run/sshd.pid`
+  else
+    killall sshd
+  fi
+  sleep 1
+  sshd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sshd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sshd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sshd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a005fb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the system logging daemons.
+#
+# Written for Slackware Linux by Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>.
+
+syslogd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -x /usr/sbin/klogd ]; then
+    echo -n "Starting sysklogd daemons: "
+    echo -n "/usr/sbin/syslogd "
+    /usr/sbin/syslogd
+    sleep 1 # prevent syslogd/klogd race condition on SMP kernels
+    echo "/usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x"
+    # '-c 3' = display level 'error' or higher messages on console
+    # '-x' = turn off broken EIP translation
+    /usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x
+  fi
+}
+
+syslogd_stop() {
+  killall syslogd 2> /dev/null
+  killall klogd 2> /dev/null
+}
+
+syslogd_restart() {
+  syslogd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  syslogd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  syslogd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  syslogd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  syslogd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..916e59e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.sysvinit   This file provides basic compatibility with SystemV style
+#               startup scripts.  The SystemV style init system places 
+#               start/stop scripts for each runlevel into directories such as
+#               /etc/rc.d/rc3.d/ (for runlevel 3) instead of starting them
+#               from /etc/rc.d/rc.M.  This makes for a lot more init scripts,
+#               and a more complicated execution path to follow through if
+#               something goes wrong.  For this reason, Slackware has always
+#               used the traditional BSD style init script layout.
+#
+#               However, many binary packages exist that install SystemV
+#               init scripts.  With rc.sysvinit in place, most well-written
+#               startup scripts will work.  This is primarily intended to
+#               support commercial software, though, and probably shouldn't
+#               be considered bug free.
+#
+#               Written by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>, 1999
+#               from an example by Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@cistron.nl>.
+
+# Run an init script:
+startup() {
+  case "$1" in
+  *.sh)
+    sh "$@"
+    ;;
+  *)
+    "$@"
+    ;;
+  esac
+}
+
+# Set onlcr to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr 0>&1
+
+if [ "$runlevel" = "" ]; then
+  runlevel=$RUNLEVEL
+  export runlevel
+  prevlevel=$PREVLEVEL
+  export prevlevel
+fi
+
+# Run kill scripts in the previous runlevel if not "none"
+if [ ! "$prevlevel" = "N" ]; then
+  for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$prevlevel.d/K* ; do
+    if [ -x $script ]; then
+      startup $script stop
+    fi
+  done
+fi
+
+# Now do the startup scripts:
+for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$runlevel.d/S* ; do
+  if [ -x $script ]; then
+    startup $script start
+  fi
+done
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rssh.conf b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rssh.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a74acc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/rssh.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+# This is the default rssh config file
+
+# set the log facility.  "LOG_USER" and "user" are equivalent.
+logfacility = LOG_USER 
+
+# Leave these all commented out to make the default action for rssh to lock
+# users out completely...
+
+allowscp
+allowsftp
+#allowcvs
+#allowrdist
+#allowrsync
+
+# set the default umask
+umask = 022
+
+# If you want to chroot users, use this to set the directory where the root of
+# the chroot jail will be located.
+#
+# if you DO NOT want to chroot users, LEAVE THIS COMMENTED OUT.
+# You can quote anywhere, but quotes not required unless path contains a
+# space... as in this example.
+
+chrootpath = "/var/users"
+
+##########################################
+# EXAMPLES of configuring per-user options
+
+#user=rudy:077:00010:  # the path can simply be left out to not chroot
+#user=rudy:077:00010   # the ending colon is optional
+
+#spaces in the path must be quoted...
+#user=rudy:011:00001:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # scp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00010:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # sftp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00011:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # both with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00100:  # cvs, with no chroot 
+#user=rudy:011:01000:  # rdist, with no chroot
+#user=rudy:011:10000:  # rsync, with no chroot
+#user="rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # whole user string can be quoted
+#user=rudy:01"1:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # or somewhere in the middle, freak!
+#user=rudy:'011:00001:/usr/local/chroot'  # single quotes too
+
+# Spaces before or after the '=' are fine, but spaces in chrootpath need
+# quotes.
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  # neither do comments at line end
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a161fec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+#	$OpenBSD: sshd_config,v 1.69 2004/05/23 23:59:53 dtucker Exp $
+
+# This is the sshd server system-wide configuration file.  See
+# sshd_config(5) for more information.
+
+# This sshd was compiled with PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin
+
+# The strategy used for options in the default sshd_config shipped with
+# OpenSSH is to specify options with their default value where
+# possible, but leave them commented.  Uncommented options change a
+# default value.
+
+#Port 22
+#Protocol 2,1
+#ListenAddress 0.0.0.0
+#ListenAddress ::
+
+# HostKey for protocol version 1
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key
+# HostKeys for protocol version 2
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key
+
+# Lifetime and size of ephemeral version 1 server key
+#KeyRegenerationInterval 1h
+#ServerKeyBits 768
+
+# Logging
+#obsoletes QuietMode and FascistLogging
+#SyslogFacility AUTH
+#LogLevel INFO
+
+# Authentication:
+
+#LoginGraceTime 2m
+PermitRootLogin no
+#StrictModes yes
+#MaxAuthTries 6
+
+#RSAAuthentication yes
+#PubkeyAuthentication yes
+#AuthorizedKeysFile	.ssh/authorized_keys
+
+# For this to work you will also need host keys in /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
+#RhostsRSAAuthentication no
+# similar for protocol version 2
+#HostbasedAuthentication no
+# Change to yes if you don't trust ~/.ssh/known_hosts for
+# RhostsRSAAuthentication and HostbasedAuthentication
+#IgnoreUserKnownHosts no
+# Don't read the user's ~/.rhosts and ~/.shosts files
+#IgnoreRhosts yes
+
+# To disable tunneled clear text passwords, change to no here!
+#PasswordAuthentication yes
+#PermitEmptyPasswords no
+
+# Change to no to disable s/key passwords
+#ChallengeResponseAuthentication yes
+
+# Kerberos options
+#KerberosAuthentication no
+#KerberosOrLocalPasswd yes
+#KerberosTicketCleanup yes
+#KerberosGetAFSToken no
+
+# GSSAPI options
+#GSSAPIAuthentication no
+#GSSAPICleanupCredentials yes
+
+# Set this to 'yes' to enable PAM authentication, account processing, 
+# and session processing. If this is enabled, PAM authentication will 
+# be allowed through the ChallengeResponseAuthentication mechanism. 
+# Depending on your PAM configuration, this may bypass the setting of 
+# PasswordAuthentication, PermitEmptyPasswords, and 
+# "PermitRootLogin without-password". If you just want the PAM account and 
+# session checks to run without PAM authentication, then enable this but set 
+# ChallengeResponseAuthentication=no
+#UsePAM no
+
+#AllowTcpForwarding yes
+#GatewayPorts no
+#X11Forwarding no
+#X11DisplayOffset 10
+#X11UseLocalhost yes
+#PrintMotd yes
+#PrintLastLog yes
+#TCPKeepAlive yes
+#UseLogin no
+#UsePrivilegeSeparation yes
+#PermitUserEnvironment no
+#Compression yes
+#ClientAliveInterval 0
+#ClientAliveCountMax 3
+#UseDNS yes
+#PidFile /var/run/sshd.pid
+#MaxStartups 10
+
+# no default banner path
+#Banner /some/path
+
+# override default of no subsystems
+Subsystem	sftp	/usr/libexec/sftp-server
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2762324
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  File not found.
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/var/www/missing.html b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/var/www/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2eec17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.d/var/www/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  O endere&ccedil;o que voc&ecirc; requisitou n&atilde;o p&ocirc;de ser encontrado :(
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.perms b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.perms
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c136ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.perms
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+./etc;0;0;755
+./etc/apache;0;0;755
+./etc/apache/httpd.conf;0;0;644
+./etc/apache/php.ini;0;0;644
+./etc/apache/vhosts;0;0;644
+./etc/logrotate.d;0;0;755
+./etc/logrotate.d/apache;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.httpd;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.0;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.4;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.6;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.K;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.M;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.S;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.inet2;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.inetd;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.local;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.postfix;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail;0;0;644
+./etc/rc.d/rc.serial;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.sshd;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.syslog;0;0;755
+./etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit;0;0;755
+./etc/ssh;0;0;755
+./etc/ssh/sshd_config;0;0;644
+./etc/rssh.conf;0;0;644
+./etc/hosts;0;0;644
+./etc/profile;0;0;644
+./var;0;0;755
+./var/www;0;0;755
+./var/www/htdocs;0;0;755
+./var/www/htdocs/missing.html;0;0;644
+./var/www/missing.html;0;0;644
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/GPG-KEY b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/GPG-KEY
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd23e95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/GPG-KEY
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+security@slackware.com public key
+
+Type  bits/keyID    Date       User ID
+pub  1024D/40102233 2003-02-26 Slackware Linux Project <security@slackware.com>
+sub  1024g/4E523569 2003-02-26 [expires: 2012-12-21]
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.1 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=H5uu
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+
+slamd64 public key
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.6 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=D1wm
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/devices.tar.gz b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/devices.tar.gz
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc4aea6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/devices.tar.gz
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/vserver.sh b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/vserver.sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e9d68a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.s/vserver.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# vserver template script
+#
+
+BASE="/etc/simplepkg/templates/vserver/vserver.s"
+DEVICES="$BASE/devices.tar.gz"
+GPGKEY="$BASE/GPG-KEY"
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: `basename $0` <jail-root> <jail-name>"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1/$2" ]; then
+  echo "folder $1/$2 does not exist"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+echo "creating /etc/vservers/$2..."
+mv $1/$2 $1/$2.old
+vserver $2 build -m skeleton --force &> /dev/null
+result="$?"
+rm -rf $1/$2 && mv $1/$2.old $1/$2 
+
+if [ "$result" != "0" ]; then
+  mkdir -p /etc/vservers/$2/apps/init
+fi
+
+echo sysv > /etc/vservers/$2/apps/init/style
+echo 3 > /etc/vservers/$2/apps/init/runlevel.start
+echo 6 > /etc/vservers/$2/apps/init/runlevel.stop
+
+cp /etc/resolv.conf $1/$2/etc/
+cp /etc/localtime $1/$2/etc/
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 defaults 1 1 > $1/$2/etc/fstab                                                           
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 rw 0 0 > $1/$2/etc/mtab                                                                  
+
+echo "creating devices and dependencies..."
+if [ -f "$DEVICES" ]; then
+  cd $1/$2/
+  tar zxvf $DEVICES
+  chroot $1/$2/ sbin/ldconfig
+else
+  echo error: device template $DEVICES not found
+fi
+
+if [ -f "$GPGKEY" ]; then
+  echo "importing slack gpg pubkey"                                                                                  
+  mkdir $1/$2/root/.gnupg                                                                                        
+  gpg --homedir $1/$2/root/.gnupg --import $GPGKEY
+fi
+
+# todo: add rebootmgr
+echo "done; now config your vserver at /etc/vservers/$2"
+echo "then, set all desired iptables rules and other stuff and then start $server vserver"
+echo "dont forget to change root's password with the command "vserver $2 exec passwd"" 
diff --git a/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.template b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cd1f69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/templates/vserver/vserver.template
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+# 
+# This one comes from disk: A1 (Base Linux series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cxxlibs: ADD
+dcron: ADD
+elvis: ADD
+etc: ADD
+findutils: ADD
+gawk: ADD
+gettext: REC
+grep: ADD
+gzip: ADD
+infozip: ADD
+less: ADD
+logrotate: ADD
+openssl-solibs: ADD
+pkgtools: ADD
+procps: ADD
+sed: ADD
+shadow: ADD
+slocate: ADD
+sysklogd: ADD
+sysvinit: ADD
+tar: ADD
+util-linux: ADD
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: AP1 (Applications series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+bc: OPT
+diffutils: REC
+jed: OPT
+joe: OPT
+jove: OPT
+lsof: OPT
+mysql: OPT
+sudo: OPT
+glibc: REC
+# Tagfile for emacs series
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: F1 (Frequently Asked Questions)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+libidn: REC
+libxml2: REC
+mhash: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from the N (Network/UUCP/Mail/News) series.
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# 
+#
+apache: OPT
+curl: OPT
+gnupg: OPT
+inetd: REC
+lftp: OPT
+lynx: OPT
+mod_ssl: OPT
+mailx: REC
+openssh: REC
+openssl: REC
+php: OPT
+rsync: OPT
+stunnel: OPT
+tcpip: REC
+wget: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: TCL1 (Tcl/Tk series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: Y1 (Yaaaaaahhoooo? Games and Amusements).
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# extra
+# libsafe
+# contrib
+simplepkg
+ssmtp
diff --git a/branches/0.6/utils/add-gpl b/branches/0.6/utils/add-gpl
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..0a261e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/utils/add-gpl
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+#  add-gpl is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  add-gpl is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+# This script should be used to add a license in scripts.
+#
+
+script="SlackBuild"
+#script="build"
+
+for file in `find -name "*.$script"`; do
+
+  echo Changing $file...
+  package="`basename $file .$script`"
+  slackbuild="`basename $file`"
+
+  string="\#\!\/bin\/bash\n\#\n#  $slackbuild is free software; you can redistribute it and\/or modify it under the\n#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software\n#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.\n#\n#  $slackbuild is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY\n#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR\n#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.\n#\n#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with\n#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple\n#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA"
+
+  sed -e "s/\#\!\/bin\/bash/$string/" $file > $file.new
+  cat $file.new > $file
+  rm $file.new
+
+done
diff --git a/branches/0.6/utils/add-slack-required b/branches/0.6/utils/add-slack-required
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..67804d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/utils/add-slack-required
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+#  add-slack-required is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
+#  Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  add-slack-required is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+#  ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+# add slack-required files in an existing repository
+# by rhatto at riseup.net
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: $BASENAME /path/to/slackbuilds /path/to/packages"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1" ]; then
+  echo "$BASENAME: folder not found: $1"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$2" ]; then
+  echo "$BASENAME: folder not found: $2"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+slackbuild="$1"
+repository="$2"
+
+# we need the function package_name
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your $BASENAME installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+function search_and_copy_slackbuild {
+
+  if [ -f "$1" ]; then
+    echo Copying `basename $1` to `dirname $package`/$pack.slack-required
+    cp $1 `dirname $package`/$pack.slack-required
+    svn add `dirname $package`/$pack.slack-required 2> /dev/null
+  fi
+
+}
+
+for package in `find $repository/ -name *tgz`; do
+  pack="`package_name $package`"
+  for build_script in `find $slackbuild/ -name $pack.SlackBuild`; do
+
+    search_and_copy_slackbuild `dirname $build_script`/slack-required
+    search_and_copy_slackbuild `dirname $build_script`/$pack.slack-required
+
+  done
+done
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/utils/convert-template-scheme b/branches/0.6/utils/convert-template-scheme
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..de7e507
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/utils/convert-template-scheme
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+#  This software is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  This software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+# script for converting simplepkg templates
+# to the 0.5 own-folder format
+#
+
+cwd="/etc/simplepkg"
+cd $cwd
+
+for file in `ls *.template`; do
+  cd $cwd  
+  template="`echo $file | cut -d . -f 1`"
+  mkdir templates/$template
+  mv $template.d templates/$template/
+  mv $template.s templates/$templates/
+  mv $template.template templates/$template/
+  cd templates/$template/$template.s
+  # optional step
+  # if [ "$template" != "vserver" ]; then
+  #   ln -sf ../../../defaults/templatesvserver/vserver.s/vserver.sh
+  # fi
+done
+
diff --git a/branches/0.6/utils/exec-slackbuild b/branches/0.6/utils/exec-slackbuild
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..0d92f28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/utils/exec-slackbuild
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+#!/bin/bash -x
+#
+# Script to execute SlackBuild and pass parameters
+#
+# by Rudson R. Alves
+#
+# Version 0.0.1
+PROG_VERSION=0.0.1
+LANG=en_US
+BACK_TITLE="Exec SlackBuild $PROG_VERSION [$1]"
+
+if [ $# -ne 2 ]; then
+    echo "Use: exec-slackbuild <SlackBuild_script> <output_file>"
+    exit 0
+fi
+
+SLACKBUILD=$1
+AUX_TMP=$2
+
+# Load slackbuildrc
+if [ -f ~/.slackbuildrc ]; then
+  source ~/.slackbuildrc
+elif [ -f /etc/slackbuildrc ]; then
+  source /etc/slackbuildrc
+fi
+
+# set do default null variables
+[ -z $SRC_DIR ]      && SRC_DIR="default"
+[ -z $REPOS ]        && REPOS="default"
+[ -z $TMP ]          && TMP="default"
+[ -z $ARCH ]         && ARCH="default"
+[ -z $CLEANUP ]      && CLEANUP="default"
+[ -z $NUMJOBS ]      && NUMJOBS="default"
+[ -z $BUILD ]        && BUILD="default"
+[ -z $CONF_OPTIONS ] && CONF_OPTIONS="default"
+
+# Edit variables
+ANS=`dialog --separate-widget "rudson" --stdout --backtitle "$BACK_TITLE" \
+    --title "Set variables" --form "Use down key to more variables; default = null argument; use \" to set several arguments." \
+    19 52 11 \
+    "SRC_DIR:"       1 1 "$SRC_DIR"          1 15 30 60 \
+    "REPOS:"         3 1 "$REPOS"            3 15 30 60 \
+    "TMP:"           5 1 "$TMP"              5 15 30 60 \
+    "ARCH:"          7 1 "$ARCH"             7 15 30 60 \
+    "CLEANUP:"       9 1 "$CLEANUP"          9 15 30 60 \
+    "NUMJOBS:"      11 1 "$NUMJOBS"         11 15 30 60 \
+    "BUILD:"        13 1 "$BUILD"           13 15 30 60 \
+    "CONF_OPTIONS:" 15 1 "$CONF_OPTIONS"    15 15 30 60`
+[ $? -ne 0 ] && exit 11
+
+# Remove "s
+     SRC_DIR=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $1}' | tr -d \"`
+       REPOS=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $2}' | tr -d \"`
+         TMP=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $3}' | tr -d \"`
+        ARCH=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $4}' | tr -d \"`
+     CLEANUP=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $5}' | tr -d \"`
+     NUMJOBS=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $6}' | tr -d \"`
+       BUILD=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $7}' | tr -d \"`
+CONF_OPTIONS=`echo $ANS | awk '{print $8}' | tr -d \"`
+
+# Set to null ("") variables with default value
+     [ "$SRC_DIR" = "default" ] && SRC_DIR=""
+       [ "$REPOS" = "default" ] && REPOS=""
+         [ "$TMP" = "default" ] && TMP=""
+        [ "$ARCH" = "default" ] && ARCH=""
+     [ "$CLEANUP" = "default" ] && CLEANUP=""
+     [ "$NUMJOBS" = "default" ] && NUMJOBS=""
+       [ "$BUILD" = "default" ] && BUILD=""
+[ "$CONF_OPTIONS" = "default" ] && CONF_OPTIONS=""
+
+# Select debug level
+DEBUG=`dialog --stdout --backtitle "$BACK_TITLE" \
+    --cancel-label "no debug" --title "$MK_TITLE" \
+    --menu "Select debug level" 10 35 3 \
+    "-x"    "Simple debug" \
+    "-xv"   "More information" \
+    "none"  "No debug"`
+
+[ $? -ne 0 -o "$DEBUG" = "none" ] && DEBUG=""
+
+# Check sintax from SlackBuild
+sh -n $SLACKBUILD || exit 11
+
+# Execute SlackBuild in background
+SRC_DIR="$SRC_DIR" REPOS="$REPOS" TMP="$TMP" ARCH="$ARCH" CLEANUP="$CLEANUP" NUMJOBS="$NUMJOBS" BUILD="$BUILD" CONF_OPTIONS="$CONF_OPTIONS" sh $DEBUG $SLACKBUILD > $AUX_TMP 2>&1 & PID=$!
+
+# Return pid from process
+echo $PID
diff --git a/branches/0.6/utils/merge-template b/branches/0.6/utils/merge-template
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..3df5f7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/utils/merge-template
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+#  This software is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  This software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+# tip: to assemble a template from all slack tagfiles:
+#
+# for diskset in a ap d e f k l n t tcl x xap y; do 
+#   lynx -dump http://slack.sarava.org/slackware/slackware-10.2/slackware/$diskset/tagfile >> slack.template
+# done
+#
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: `basename $0` <template> <base-template>"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -f "$1" ] || [ ! -f "$2" ]; then
+  echo error: $1 ou $2 not found
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+cp $2 $1.new
+
+cat $1 | while read line; do
+  pack="`echo $line | cut -d : -f 1`"
+  if ! grep -qe "^$pack:" $2; then
+    echo $line >> $1.new
+  fi
+done
diff --git a/branches/0.6/utils/metapkg b/branches/0.6/utils/metapkg
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..e3db602
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/utils/metapkg
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# metapkg v0.1: install or remove a pkgtool metapackage
+#
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | GPL
+#
+#  Metapkg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  Metapkg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+# A metapackage is a file containing a list of packages.
+# This script just installs all the packages in a metapackage.
+# Remeber that mkjail template == metapkg metapackage.
+# 
+
+#
+# TODO
+#
+# In the mean term, metapkg will not be developed, but the code will rest
+# until someone need it. Some ideas to think for the future of metapkg would
+# be a better integration with simplepkg structure, like:
+#
+# - By default metapkg searches by a slack-required in the package/slackbuilds repos
+# - With -f, metapkg uses a local file (template, slack-required or tagfile)
+#
+
+COMMON="/usr/libexec/simplepkg/common.sh"
+BASENAME="`basename $0`"
+ROOT="/"
+
+function usage {
+  echo "usage: [ROOT=/otherroot] $BASENAME --option [metapackage]"
+  echo "options: --install, --remove"
+  exit 1
+}
+
+if [ -f "$COMMON" ]; then
+  source $COMMON
+else
+  echo "error: file $COMMON found, check your `basename $0` installation"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  usage
+else
+  eval_config $BASENAME -u
+fi
+
+if [ ! -f "$BASE_CONF/$2.template" ]; then
+  echo error: template $2 not found
+  exit 1
+else
+  TEMPLATE="$BASE_CONF/$2.template"
+  unset server
+fi
+
+if [ "$1" == "--install" ] || [ "$1" == "install" ]; then
+  install_packages
+elif [ "$1" == "--remove" ] || [ "$1" == "remove" ]; then
+  remove_packages
+else
+  usage
+fi
diff --git a/branches/0.6/utils/searchpkg b/branches/0.6/utils/searchpkg
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..cc5a827
--- /dev/null
+++ b/branches/0.6/utils/searchpkg
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+#  This software is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
+#  terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+#  Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or any later version.
+#
+#  This software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+#  WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR
+#  A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+#  this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple
+#  Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+#
+# searchpkg: search packages inside a local slackware-like repository
+# this is part of simplepkg
+# feedback: rhatto at riseup.net | gpl
+# 
+
+# find . -type f -exec ls -l {} \; > FILELIST.TXT
+
+if [[ $# != 1 && $# != 2 ]]; then
+  echo "usage: $0 [-1] <repository> [package-name]"
+  echo "package-name can be either the full package file name, just its prefix or so"
+  echo "option -1 show just the first matching package"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+FILELIST="$1/FILELIST.TXT"
+PACKAGE_FIELD="8"
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+ grep .tgz $FILELIST
+else
+  grep -e "$2" $FILELIST | grep tgz | awk "{ print \$$PACKAGE_FIELD }"
+fi
author	rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58>	2007-04-13 21:46:27 +0000
committer	rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58>	2007-04-13 21:46:27 +0000
commit	f76d87c78ade79c700b6dd48aeb6b8bbef60cf34 (patch)
tree	a64bfb20225c12ec13001a2ba7a4e3f381532c06
parent	aa280bb3fbf166e31b939342c1d956848a801780 (diff)
download	simplepkg-f76d87c78ade79c700b6dd48aeb6b8bbef60cf34.tar.gz simplepkg-f76d87c78ade79c700b6dd48aeb6b8bbef60cf34.tar.bz2